Buhler 435 Users Manual

!! Buhler-12 Buhler Lawn Mower Manuals - Lawn Mower Manuals – The Best Lawn Mower Manuals Collection

535 to the manual 2f272d1a-2437-33f4-21f3-c904d8796383

2015-02-02

: Buhler Buhler-435-Users-Manual-485729 buhler-435-users-manual-485729 buhler pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 249

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Operator’s Manual

:: 435
:: 485
:: 535
89002109

12/2007

Foreword

To the Owner
This manual contains information concerning the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of Buhler Versatile 4WD tractors. You
have purchased a dependable machine. With only proper care and operation can you expect to receive the performance and long
service built into this tractor.
HAVE ALL OPERATORS READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY AND KEEP IT AVAILABLE FOR READY REFERENCE.
The tractor was designed to pull agricultural equipment in agricultural applications at field speeds of 7.2 KPH (4.5 MPH) or greater.
Proper ballasting to provide equal traction to front and rear axles under moderate to heavy load will improve tractor performance
and life. Your Buhler Versatile dealer will instruct you in the general operation of your tractor. Your dealer’s staff of factory–trained
service technicians will be glad to answer any questions that may arise regarding the operation of your tractor.
For engine maintenance not covered in this manual, follow the instructions provided in the Cummins Engine Operator’s manual.
Before putting the tractor in service, become familiar with the procedures outlined in both manuals.
At this time biodiesel blends up to B5 are the only blends approved for use in all Cummins engines for both On highway and
Off highway markets. B5 which is a blend of 5 percent pure biodiesel (B100) and 95 percent standard petroleum diesel has
demonstrated to have no impact on engine performance, durablilty or maintenance. The industry standard known as ASTM D6751
defines the specification for B100. However, this standard currently lacks a specification for stability. Without a specification for
stability, the quality of the fuel blends higher than B5 could degrade to a point which could damaging to engines. Cummins is
supporting industry efforts to add a stability spec to the current ASTM standard, and continues to evaluate the impact of these
blends on the durability of engines. Until this spec is developed and tested, other blends of biodiesel will be unsuitable for use in
Cummins On highway and Off highway engines.
The warranty coverage that is extended to your Buhler Versatile 4WD tractor is explained in the Warranty and Limitation of Liability
Agreement form. Your dealer will provide you with a copy of the warranty and retain a copy which you have signed. After you read
the warranty, ask your dealer to explain any points that you may not understand.
Do not modify, alter, or permit anyone else to modify or alter this tractor or any of its components, or any tractor function, without
first consulting an authorized Buhler Versatile dealer. If you have any questions regarding tractor modifications, contact Buhler
Versatile Inc., 1260 Clarence Ave, Winnipeg MB, R3C 4E8.
Your safety, and the safety of those around you depends upon the care and good judgement you use while operating this equipment.
Read the safety precautions carefully.
For a complete list of the delivery service checks performed by your dealer, refer to the Delivery Report in this manual. The first
copy is your record of the service performed and the second copy, which is to be removed from the manual, is your dealer’s record.
MAKE SURE THAT BOTH COPIES ARE SIGNED BY YOURSELF AND YOUR DEALER.
After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, have your dealer perform the factory recommended first 50–hour service. Return
this manual with your tractor to the dealer so the “First 50–Hour Service” checklist can be filled out. You will be responsible for the
cost of lubricants, fluids, filters and other items replaced as part of normal maintenance. Prior to taking the tractor to your selling
dealer for service, it is recommended that you contact them to determine any other charges for which you may be responsible.
All data given in this book is subject to production model variations. Dimensions and weights are approximations only, and the
illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition. For exact information about any particular tractor, please
consult your Buhler Versatile dealer.

CAUTION: THIS SYMBOL IS USED THROUGHOUT THIS BOOK WHENEVER PERSONAL SAFETY IS INVOLVED. TAKE TIME TO
READ AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS.
CAUTION: PICTURES IN THIS MANUAL MAY SHOW PROTECTIVE SHIELDING OPEN OR REMOVED TO BETTER ILLUSTRATE
A PARTICULAR FEATURE OR ADJUSTMENT.
BE CERTAIN, HOWEVER, TO CLOSE OR REPLACE ALL SHIELDING BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE.

Improvements
Buhler Versatile Inc. is continually striving to improve its products. We reserve the right to make improvements or changes when
it becomes practical and possible to do so, without incurring any obligation to make changes or additions to the equipment sold
previously.

435/485/535

1-3

Operator’s Manual - Contents
Section 1 - Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Section 2 - General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Section 3 - Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Section 4 - Lubrication and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Section 5 - Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Section 6 - Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Delivery Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

435/485/535

1-5
Section 1 - Safety
Contents

Section 1 Contents - Safety Information
Introduction to the Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Tractor Statement of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Precautionary Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Machine Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
The Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Driving the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Operating the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Operating the PTO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Servicing the Tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Additional Safety Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Articulation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Safety Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
ROPS Maintenance and Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Damage to the Cab/ROPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

435/485/535

1-
Foreword

Introduction to this manual
This manual has been prepared to assist you in the
correct procedure for breaking in, driving, operating,
and maintaining your tractor.
The manual is divided into 6 sections with contents
page at the beginning of each section itemizes the
section in detail. A detailed index is also provided at
the back of this manual.

The sections are:
Section 1 - Safety Information
Section 2 - General Information
Section 3 - Operation
Section 4 - Lubrication and maintenance

F1-1

Section 5 - Troubleshooting Charts
Section 6 - Specifications

Tractor Statement of Use

Read this manual carefully and keep it along with other
tractor information in the storage pocket attached to
the rear of the seat (1) for future reference. If at any
time you require advice concerning your tractor, do not
hesitate to contact your authorized Buhler Versatile
dealer. He has factory trained personnel, genuine
replacement parts, and the necessary equipment for
your service requirements.

Buhler Versatile has designed the 435, 485 and 535
4WD articulated tractors to be used in customary
agricultural applications. Using the tractor in an
industrial only application (ie. road building) will not
be covered by warranty.

Your tractor has been designed and built to give
maximum performance, economy and ease of operation
under a wide variety of operating conditions. Prior to
delivery, the tractor was carefully inspected, both at
the factory and by your dealer, to ensure that it reaches
you in optimum condition. To maintain this condition
and ensure trouble–free operation, it is important that
the routine services, as specified in this manual, are
carried out at the recommended intervals.
All data given in this book is subject to production
variations. Dimensions and weights are approximate
only, and the illustrations do not necessarily show
tractors in standard condition. For exact information
about any particular tractor, please consult your
authorized dealer.
The company policy is one of continuous improvement,
and the right to change prices, specifications or
equipment at any time without notice is reserved.
Section 1 of this manual lists the precautions to be
observed to ensure your safety and the safety of others.
Read the safety precautions carefully and follow the
advice offered BEFORE operating the tractor.

435/485/535

The machine is constructed to use specific tire
combinations along with additional ballast to properly
distribute weight and power for the operation of
agricultural equipment.
To obtain maximum performance and durability, the
tractor must be operated and maintained in a manner
as described in this manual. Failure to follow the
information contained in this manual may lead to
premature deterioration or personal injury.
You have made a substantial investment in this
agricultural tractor and it demands proper operation
and maintenance.
PLEASE FOLLOW YOUR OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

1-7
Section 1 - Safety
Precautionary Statements

Precautionary Statements
Personal Safety
Throughout this manual and on machine decals, you will find precautionary statements (“CAUTION”, “WARNING”,
and “DANGER”) followed by specific instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal safety of you
and those working with you. Please take the time to read them.

CAUTION: THE WORD “CAUTION” IS USED WHERE A SAFE BEHAVIORAL PRACTICE ACCORDING TO
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND COMMON SAFETY PRACTICES WILL PROTECT THE
OPERATOR AND OTHERS FROM ACCIDENT INVOLVEMENT.

WARNING: THE WORD “WARNING” DENOTES A POTENTIAL OR HIDDEN HAZARD WHICH HAS A POTENTIAL
FOR SERIOUS INJURY. IT IS USED TO WARN OPERATORS AND OTHERS TO EXERCISE EVERY APPROPRIATE
MEANS TO AVOID A SURPRISE INVOLVEMENT WITH MACHINERY.

DANGER: THE WORD “DANGER” DENOTES A FORBIDDEN PRACTICE IN CONNECTION WITH A SERIOUS
HAZARD.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE “CAUTION”, “WARNING”, AND “DANGER” INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.

Machine Safety
Additional precautionary statements (“ATTENTION” and “IMPORTANT”) are followed by specific instructions.
These statements are intended for machine safety.
ATTENTION: The word “ATTENTION” is used to warn the operator of potential machine damage if a certain
procedure is not followed.
IMPORTANT: The word “IMPORTANT” is used to inform the reader of something he needs to know to prevent
minor machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.

435/485/535

1-8
Section 1 - Safety
Precautionary Statements

Safety
Precautionary Statements
National Safety Council statistics indicate many people die or suffer serious injury each year as a result of farm
accidents.
Don’t become a statistic or victim.
Carefully review the procedures given in this manual with all operators ANNUALLY. It is important that all
operators be familiar with, AND FOLLOW, safety precautions.
Operating instructions must be given to everyone using the tractor before operation and at least once yearly
thereafter in compliance with OSHA Regulation 1928.57 (United States).
A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To help
prevent accidents, read and take the following precautions before operating the tractor. Equipment should be
operated only by those who are responsible and instructed to do so.

The Tractor

Driving the Tractor

1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before

using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge

can lead to accidents.

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or

driving the tractor.

2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons

to operate the tractor.
3.

Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on
the tractor, especially children. The instructional
seat (optional) is used for instructing or service
diagnosing only.

4. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.

Replace safety decals if missing, illegible or

damaged.
5.

Do not modify, alter, or permit anyone else to
modify or alter the tractor or any of its components
or any tractor function without first consulting an
authorized Buhler Versatile dealer.

6. Install all shields before starting or operating the

tractor.
7.

Always use the steps and handrails
when entering and exiting the tractor. Never
jump from the tractor. There is a danger of
catching clothing on protruding parts.

435/485/535

When driving on public roads always use hazard
lights (and extremity lights where applicable).
Have consideration for other road users by pulling
to the side of the road so that any following traffic
may pass.

3. Dim the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at

night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to prevent

blinding the driver of an oncoming vehicle.
4. Reduce engine speed before turning or applying

the brakes.
5. Any towed vehicle whose total weight exceeds that

of the towing tractor must be equipped with

brakes for safe operation.
6.

Never apply the differential lock when turning.
When engaged, the differential lock will increase
the effort required to turn the tractor and increase
the turning radius.

Always check overhead clearance, especially
when transporting the tractor. Watch where you
are going, especially at row ends, on roads, and
around trees and low overhanging obstacles.

To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and
at speeds compatible with safety, especially when
operating over rough ground, when crossing
ditches or slopes and when turning corners.

1-9
Section 1 - Safety
Precautionary Statements
9. Use extreme caution when operating on steep

slopes.
10. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going

down hill as would be used when going uphill.

Do not coast or freewheel down hills.
11. When descending steep grades, select a sufficiently

low gear to maintain control with minimum

braking.
12. Drive the tractor slowly on hillsides and curves to

eliminate the danger of tipping. Avoid slopes

which are too steep for safe operation. Avoid sharp

uphill turns.
13. When driving out of a ditch, gully or up a steep

hillside, engage the clutch slowly. Avoid sharp

uphill turns.
14. Use caution when driving near the edge of a ditch

or gully. It may cave in, causing the tractor to roll

over.
15. Use extreme caution when operating the tractor

on single wheels. The danger of tipping increases.

Do not travel at high speeds.
16. Before transporting the tractor and implement

on public roadways, check with authorities for

local regulations.

Operating the Tractor
1.

Apply the parking brake, place the PTO control
in the “OFF” position, the lift control in the down
position, the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position and the transmission lever in
neutral before starting the tractor.

Do not start the engine or operate controls
while standing beside the tractor. Always sit in
the tractor seat when starting the engine or
operating the controls.

3. Do not bypass the transmission neutral start

circuit. Consult your authorized dealer if your

neutral start controls malfunction.
4. Use jumper cables only in the recommended

manner. Improper use can result in a tractor

runaway.
5. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

lever while the engine is running. Unexpected

tractor movement can result from such contact.
6. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.
7. Shut off the engine and PTO and apply the parking

brake before getting off the tractor.
8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.

17. Use the wide transport marker lights to clearly

indicate the full width of the tractor with those

tire options.

9. Do not operate the tractor engine in an enclosed

building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust

fumes can cause death.

18. Ensure towed implements are equipped with slow–

moving vehicle (SMV) signs when traveling on

public roads.

10. The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from

the air but will not exclude chemical vapor. Follow

the chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding

protection from dangerous chemicals.

19. Install additional lights on implement rear to

safeguard against rear–end collisions. Daybreak

and dusk are particularly dangerous. Buhler

Versatile tractors have seven–pin trailer connectors

to facilitate installation of extra lighting.
20. Be aware of the transport width of towed

implements. Install additional lights to the sides

of wide implements to alert passing traffic. Keep

clear of the approaching lane.
21. Use hazard warning flashers as required by law

when transporting or driving the tractor on public

roads. Use extremity lighting kit when required or

deemed necessary.
22. Use extreme caution when pulling heavy loads

at road speeds. Avoid hard application of the

tractor brakes at high speed.

11. Always wear a protective mask when working with

toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions on

the chemical container.
12. If the power steering or engine ceases to operate,

stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be

more difficult to control.

13. WARNING: RELIEVE PRESSURE BEFORE

STOPPING THE ENGINE TO CONNECT OR

DISCONNECT HYDRAULIC, STEERING, WATER,

OR FUEL LINES.

435/485/535

1-10
Section 1 - Safety
Precautionary Statements

14. Pull only from the drawbar. Use only a drawbar

pin that locks in place. Pulling from the tractor

rear axle or any point above the axle may cause

the tractor to overturn.

25. When hitching drawn equipment to the drawbar,

only allow an assistant between the tractor and

implement if the tractor is off, in neutral and the

brakes are engaged.

15. Be sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted

and will disconnect safely in case of accidental

detachment of the implement.

26. Do not leave implements with the hydraulic

cylinders fully extended or retracted where the

heat from the sun can cause the hydraulic fluid

to expand. Hydraulic pressure can rupture the

hoses, releasing high pressure oil causing personal

injury.

16. Do not leave equipment in the raised position

when the vehicle is stopped or unattended.
17. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories

are approved for use and are correctly

installed. Maintained in accordance with the

instructions issued by the equipment or accessory

manufacturer.
18. Remember that your tractor, if abused or

incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become a

hazard both to the operator and to bystanders.

Do not overload or operate with attached equipment

which is unsafe, not designed for the particular task,

or is poorly maintained.
19. The cab is designed to meet and exceed

the applicable noise level standards (86dBA).

However,
noise
(sound
pressure
level)

in the workplace can exceed this level

when the cab window is open. Therefore, it

is recommended that the operators wear suitable

ear protectors when operating in high noise level

conditions.
20. Always keep sleeves, jackets or other clothing

relatively tight and belted. Loose clothing may

catch in moving parts and result in personal injury

or death.
21. Use steps and hand holds when mounting and

dismounting the tractor or for servicing

components too high to reach from the ground.
22. Lock the seat in position and buckle your safety

belt before operating the tractor.
23. Do not operate the tractor when you are tired,

sick, or impaired in any way.
24. Never operate the tractor in confined areas, or

when visibility next to the tractor is reduced. Injury

to bystanders or damage to the tractor or

equipment may result.

435/485/535

27. Be careful when turning with an implement. Lift

it from the ground if possible during turns. Side

thrust caused by the implement could damage

the tire and implement.
28. Use transport locks, lower the implement to the

ground and securely block the frame before

servicing the implement. Relieve pressure from

the hydraulic system and shut off the tractor.

Operating the PTO
1.

When operating PTO–driven equipment, shut off
the engine and wait until the PTO stops before
getting off the tractor and disconnecting the
equipment.

2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the

power take–off or when near rotating equipment.
3.

When operating stationary PTO–driven equipment,
ensure that the park brake is set and the gearshift
lever is in neutral, block the rear wheels front and
rear and engage the articulation lock. Do not leave
the tractor unattended. If you must leave the
tractor for any reason, stop the engine and remove
the key.

4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or

service PTO driven equipment when the tractor

engine is running.
5. Make sure all PTO shields are in position at all

times.
7. Take special care in hook–up of implements to

the PTO.

1-11
Section 1 - Safety
Precautionary Statements

Servicing the Tractor
Most accidents can be avoided by observing certain
precautions. To help prevent accidents, read and
take the following precautions before servicing the
tractor.

Do not modify, alter or permit anyone else to
modify or alter the tractor or any of its components
or any tractor function without first consulting an
authorized Buhler Versatile dealer.

Unqualified persons should not remove or attempt
to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or any other
part of the fuel injection system. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in serious injury.

The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator cap. It is dangerous
to remove the cap while the system is hot. Always
turn the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the
pressure to escape before removing the cap
entirely. Wear gloves when removing the cap.

2. Do not smoke while refueling the tractor. Keep
any type of open flame away.
3.

Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable
and satisfactory condition to ensure your safety
and comply with legal requirements.

To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames
away from the battery or cold– weather starting aids.
To prevent sparks which could cause explosion,
use jumper cables according to instructions.

Do not attempt to service the air conditioning
system. It is possible to suffer severe frost bite or
injury from escaping refrigerant. Special
equipment and instruments are required to
service the air conditioning system which uses
R134A refrigerant. See your authorized Buhler
Versatile dealer for service.

6. Stop the engine before performing any service on
the tractor.
7. Escaping diesel/hydraulic fluid under pressure
can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
• DO NOT use your hand to check for leaks.
Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search
for leaks.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
connecting or disconnecting lines.
• Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurizing lines.
• If fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
attention immediately or gangrene may
result.

10. Continuous long–term contact with used engine

oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged

contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly

with soap and water.
11. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care

and ensure, when stored, they cannot fall and

cause injury.
12. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters

properly. Follow local laws governing disposal of

used engine oil.
13. Never oil, grease or adjust the tractor while it is

running. Do not leave the engine running while

the tractor or drawn equipment is being adjusted,

repaired or cleaned.
14. Be sure all connections are tight and lines and

hoses are undamaged. Before disconnecting

hydraulic lines, relieve all pressure. Do not overfill

the hydraulic tank.
15. Do not smoke and avoid open flames when

servicing batteries.
16. Starting fluid is highly flammable. Do not use

near fire, sparks, or open flames.
17. Remove mud, crop residue, chains and tools from

steps and operator’s platform. They may interfere

with pedal operation or entry/exit from the

tractor.
18. Never operate the tractor with a damaged tire.

The tire may explode.
19. Tighten all connections before starting the engine

or pressurizing lines.

435/485/535

1-12
Section 1 - Safety
Precautionary Statements

Diesel Fuel

Safety Cab

Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab which must
be maintained in a serviceable condition. Be careful
when driving through doorways or working in confined
spaces with low headroom.

Under no circumstances should gasoline, alcohol
or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel. These
combinations can create an increased fire or
explosive hazard. In a closed container, such as a
fuel tank, these blends are more explosive than
pure gasoline. Do not use these blends.

2. Do not smoke while refueling the tractor or when

standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame

away.
3. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the

engine running. Allow the tractor to cool off before

fueling.
4. Use the proper fuel transfer hose and nozzle. Make

sure the nozzle and hose are grounded to dissipate

static electric charges.
5.

When refueling, make sure the nozzle is in
contact with the filler neck of the tractor fuel tank
before fuel starts to flow and during the entire
time fuel is flowing.

6. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when

filling the tank.
7. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allow room for

expansion.
8. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
9. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.
10. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with

a genuine replacement cap. A non–approved cap

may not be safe.
11. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.
12. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
13. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
14. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade

fuels are not held over and used in the winter.
15. Ground fuel storage tanks to prevent static

buildup.

435/485/535

1. Do not modify, drill, weld, or alter the safety cab

in any way. Doing so could render you liable to

legal prosecution in some countries.
2.

Never attempt to straighten or weld any part of the
main frame or retaining brackets which have
suffered damage. By doing so you may weaken
the structure and endanger your safety. Replace
all damaged parts.

3. Never attach chains or ropes to the cab or main

frame for pulling purposes.
4. Never take unnecessary risks even though your

safety cab affords you the maximum protection

possible.
5. Do not carry harmful chemicals in the cab.

Chemicals may rupture the container, and the

fumes may poison the operator.
6.

The tractor cab is not designed to provide a
“sprayer safe” environment for the operator. When
applying chemicals from a spray unit, do not rely
on the cab filter elements to provide protection to
the operator from the airborne chemicals.

1-13
Section 1 - Safety
Safety Labels

Safety Labels
The following warning signs are installed on the tractor in the areas indicated. They are intended for your safety
and for those working with you. Please become familiarized with the content and location of these warning
signs.
Make sure all warning signs are legible. Clean or replace where necessary. Replacements warning signs can be
obtained from your Buhler Versatile dealer.

6
4 15

8
2

10
13 14

12
7

F1-2

435/485/535

1-14
Section 1 - Safety
Safety Labels

CAUTION

ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
FOR TRACTORS: 435/485/535

ATTACH IMPLEMENTS PROPERLY

• Attaching clevis

PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
PART NO: 86031286

type tongues

• Attaching clevis

MEETS OSHA REGULATION
CERTIFIED TO CSA STANDARD

type tongues

• Pull only from drawbar or three

86033283

point hitch.

• Use a safety chain when towing

1. ROPS Certificate - Located left underside of cab.

implement.

86000550-C

5. Implement Attaching - Located above the drawbar

at the rear of the tractor.

WARNING
CONTENTS UNDER PRESSURE

Accumulator charged to 69 bar (1000 psi).
Pump service brakes at least ten times
with engine off to release pressure before
loosening any fittings connected to the
accumulator.

86034047

2. Slow-Moving Vehicle - Located on rear of cab.

6. Accumulator Pressure - Located on the fender
support above the multifunction valve.

WARNING
AVOID POSSIBLE
INJURY OR DEATH
86001239

WARNING
ENGAGE PARK BRAKE
BEFORE EXITING
TRACTOR

Do not start engine by shorting
across starter terminals. Engine can
start and machine can move when
starting safety switch is by-passed.
Start engine only from operator’s
seat with transmission in neutral and
the parking brake applied
86000552-C

86034142

3. Tie down brackets
- Located on frames.

4. Park Brake - Located
inside cab on right hand window

CAUTION

NOT CONNECT JUMPER CABLE TO NEGATIVE POST OF DISCHARGE BATTERY
• DO
NOT LEAN OVER BATTERIES WHILE MAKING CONNECTIONS
• DO
DO
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE CLAMOS ARE NOT IN CONTACT
• DO ENSURE
• ENSURE VEHICLES ARE NOT IN CONTACT

8. Battery Boosting - Located on the underside of

the battery cover.

435/485/535

7. Jump starting - Located on the left
side frame next to the starter.
BATTERY BOOST INSTRUCTIONS

parkbrake, set transmission in neutral and turn all electrical connections off
• Apply
one end of jumper cable to positive terminal of boosting battery and other
• Connect
end to positive terminal of discharged battery
Connect
one end of negative cable to negative post of battery and other end to
• tractor frame
at least 300 mm (12") from discharged battery

86000551-D

F1-3A

1-15
Section 1 - Safety
Safety Labels

WARNING

CAUTION

ARTICULATING JOINT

STAY CLEAR OF THIS AREA WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING
TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY

• Shut off engine before servicing articulation area.
• Engage articulation lock before lifting tractor, transporting tractor on another vehicle,
performing maintenance in articulation area or operating stationary PTO equipment.

• Disengage lock before driving the tractor,

86000554-C

9. Pivoting Frames - Located on the right and left

sides.

CAUTION

PRESSURIZED SYSTEM
Remove cap slowly

86000548-C

10. Radiator Cap Pressure - Located on the left side

of the hood at the access hole for the radiator cap.

CAUTION
HOT EXHAUST SYSTEM COMPONENTS

86000549-C

11. Hot Exhaust - Located on the right side frame

under engine hood.

WARNING
Keep hands and
clothing away from
rotating fan and belts.
Failure to comply could
result in death
or serious injury.
86501511-E

12. Engine Cooling Fan - Located on both sides of

radiator under the engine side shields

CAUTION
This instructional seat
has been provided only
for training operators
or diagnosing machine
problems.
Keep all other riders off
the tractor and equipment.
Always wear your seat belt.
86033512

This roll over protective structure meets
OSHA and other safety standards when
installed in accordance with approved
factory mounting instructions
The protection afforded may be impaired if it
has been subjected to alteration, structural
damage, or involved in an overturn accident.
In these cases the entire structure must be
replaced.

BE SURE OPERATION AND SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS ARE GIVEN TO
ANYONE USING THIS TRACTOR AT
THE TIME OF INITIAL ASSIGNMENT
AND ANNUALLY THEREAFTER.
Read the operator’s manual provided.
BEFORE STARTING:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Know all the operating and safety
instructions in the operator’s manual
and on the machine.
Securely fasten your seatbelt.

Be sure the transmission is in neutral,
PTO is disengaged and implement
hydraulic levers are in neutral.
Be sure all shields are in place.
Hitch only to drawbar or three point
hitch lift points.

No riders should be permitted in the
cab or on the tractor.

Make sure everyone is clear of the
machinery.
• Do not allow children to operate the
tractor.
WHEN OPERATING:

•
•
•
•

Avoid operating tractor near holes,
ditches or steep slopes.
Reduce speed when turning, crossing
slopes and on rough, slick, or muddy
surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or stops.

Use flashers and extremity lights
when required.
BEFORE DISMOUNTING, SERVICING,
CLEANING OR ADJUSTING TRACTOR
OR IMPLEMENT:
• Bring tractor to a complete stop. Lower
implement, shift transmission to neutral,
set park brake.

•

Stop engine and wait for all moving parts
to come to a complete halt. Remove key
if leaving tractor.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW ALL OF THE
ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS COULD LEAD
TO SERIOUS INJURY.

86000553-D

14. ROPS Caution - Located inside cab on left hand

door post.

IMPORTANT

CLUTCH PEDAL MUST BE
DEPRESSED & TRANSMISSION
MUST BE IN NEUTRAL TO
START TRACTOR
86034143

13. Instructional Seat - Located inside cab on left

hand door post.

F1-3B

15. Clutch Pedal operation - Located inside cab on

right hand window

435/485/535

1-16
Section 1 - Safety
Additional Safety Items

Additional Safety Items
Articulation Locks
1. Use the articulation lock during stationary
applications, servicing, jacking or overhaul
operations. Do not use when the tractor is
operating.
2. Before engaging the lock, drive the tractor to a
level surface, put the steering straight, engage the
park brake, put the gearshift in neutral and stop
the engine.

3. Remove the pin (1) from the storage position
located on the right of the swing frame and insert
the pin through the hole on the left of swing
frame (2).

F1-6

NOTE: It may be necessary to start the engine and
articulate the frame slightly to enable the
articulation pin to seat properly through the swing
frame and front frame.

Emergency Exit
1. The cab has an emergency exit located in the right
rear of the cab (3). To operate, pull out the
pin (4) attaching the lever to the glass window.
This will allow the window to open beyond
the latch. If greater access is required, the
silicone hinge/seal can be cut to remove the
window completely.

F1-5

F1-4

435/485/535

1-17
Section 1 - Safety
Safety Cab

Safety Cab

Damage to the Cab/ROPS

A safety cab incorporates a Roll Over Protective
Structure (ROPS). Safety belts are standard fitted
equipment for the tractor at the time of factory
assembly. The safety belt, when used by the operator,
maximizes the protection offered by the ROPS.

If the tractor has rolled over or the cab has been
damaged (such as striking an overhead object during
transport), it must be replaced to provide the original
protection.

WARNING: ALWAYS USE YOU SAFETY BELT WITH
THE CAB/ROPS TO PREVENT BEING THROWN
FROM THE TRACTOR IN THE EVENT OF ROLLOVER.
SAFETY BELTS SAVE LIVES WHEN THEY ARE
USED.
Information regarding the safety cab/ROPS and safety
belt are available from your authorized Buhler Versatile
dealer.

ROPS Maintenance and Inspection
After the first 50 hours of operation and every 1500 of
operation (or yearly, whichever comes first):
1. Check the torque of the cab/ROPS mounting bolts,
as detailed in the lubrication and maintenance
section of this manual.
2. Check the operators seat mounting bolts and safety
belt mounting bolts. Tighten the seat mounting
bolts to 40 N·m (30 ft-lbs.). Replace any worn or
damaged parts.

IMPORTANT: Do not try to weld or straighten the
cab/ROPS.
After an accident, check for damage to the cab/ROPS,
operator’s seat, safety belt and safety belt mountings.
Replace all damaged parts before operating the
tractor.

WARNING: NEVER ATTACH, CHAINS, ROPES
OR CABLES TO THE CAB/ROPS FOR PULLING
PURPOSES. ALWAYS PULL FROM THE TRACTOR
DRAWBAR. BE CAREFUL WHEN DRIVING THROUGH
DOOR OPENINGS OR UNDER LOW OVERHEAD
OBJECTS. MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT
OVERHEAD CLEARANCE FOR THE CAB/ROPS.

WARNING: IF THE CAB/ROPS IS REMOVED OR
REPLACED, MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE PROPER
HARDWARE IS USED AND THE RECOMMENDED
TORQUE VALUES ARE APPLIED TO THE ATTACHING
BOLTS. SEE YOUR AUTHORIZED BUHLER
VERSATILE DEALER.

435/485/535

1-18

435/485/535

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Contents

Section 2 Contents - General Information
Tractor Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overall Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tractor Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Tractor Identification Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Vehicle Identification Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Tractor Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Engine Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Transmission Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Front & Rear Axle Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Protective Shielding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine Side Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Starter Solenoid Shield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Battery Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Break-In period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Towing the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Transporting the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

435/485/535

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Tractor Orientation

Tractor Orientation
Overall Description

Tractor Terminology

The Models 435, 485 and 535 tractors are
classified as 4–wheel drive articulating vehicles.
The tractors consist of front and rear frame assemblies
which steer by pivoting at the center articulation
joint.

This manual uses the following terms to describe
tractor function and directional relationships:

The front frame, (1) incorporates the engine, fuel
tanks, transmission, front drive axle, and cab. The rear
frame, (2) incorporates the rear drive axle and supports
any implements that are operated by the tractor. This
type of design allows for greater flexibility of weight
distribution, depending upon operating conditions and
type of implement. The operator can ballast the tractor
to best suit the needs of the particular operation.

Front (1) - The engine end of the tractor. This direction

will also be referred to as the “Forward Direction

of Travel”.
Right (2) - The console side of the cab.
Rear (3) - The drawbar end of the tractor, which is

used for pulling implements.
Left (4) - The doorway side of the cab.

The construction of the tractor is a modular-type
construction. This means that the major components
are individual units which are supported within
the front and rear frames. This makes for easier
serviceability and longer life due to reduced structural
stress on components.

F2-2

F2-1

F2-3

Articulation - The ability to steer by pivoting
between front and rear frame sections.

435/485/535

F2-4

Oscillation - The ability of a vehicle to twist,
allowing travel over uneven terrain.

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Tractor Identification Data

Tractor Identification Data
The tractor and its major components are identified
using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.
These codes are recorded on the Vehicle Identification
Plate, (ID plate).
NOTE: Tractor identification data must be supplied
to the dealer when requesting parts or service.
Identification data is needed to aid in identifying the
tractor if it is ever stolen.

TRACTOR NUMBER

MODEL

UNIT

ENGINE

TRANSMISSION

REAR AXLE

FRONT AXLE

HYDRAULIC PUMP

HYDRAULIC LIFT

FWD-FACTOR

SPECIAL ORDER

Please record the following identification data in the
sample ID plate, right.

BUHLER VERSATILE INC.

The following information provides the locations of the
identification data.

F2-5

Vehicle Identification Plate
The Vehicle Identification Plate (1) is located on the
left rear underside corner of the cab.
The ROPS identification plate (2) is located adjacent
to it.

F2-6

Tractor Identification

The tractor serial number (3) is stamped on the front
frame.

This serial number stamp is used in the event that the
Tractor Identification Plate is removed or mutilated.

F2-7

435/485/535

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Tractor Identification Data
Engine Identification

The Cummins engine used in your Buhler Versatile
4WD tractor is serviced solely by the Cummins
Engine Company through its authorized dealers and
distributors. Many Buhler Versatile dealers are
authorized Cummins dealers. If your dealer is
not, he will arrange for the engine service on
your tractor to be carried out by an authorized
Cummins
engine
dealer
or
distributor.
For service, warranty, and parts information, contact
your Buhler Versatile dealer.

F2-8

For the 435, 485 and 535 tractor (Cummins QSX15
engine), the Engine Identification Plate (1) is located
on the front left side of the engine block below the
valve cover.

Transmission Identification
Synchromesh Transmission (12 x 4 Synchronized)
The serial number plate is on the right rear of
the transmission case (2). This is a 6-digit alpha
numeric number.

F2-9S

1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission
The serial number plate is located on the left rear of
the transmission case (3).

435/485/535

F2-9P

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Tractor Identification Data
CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission
There are two serial number plates, located on the top
of the transmission case (1) and on the bottom rear
right below the transmission oil level sight glass (2).

1
F2-9C2

2
F2-9C1

Front & Rear Axle Identification
On the underside (or topside) of the input shaft is
the Differential Identification Plate (3) containing
differential model information.
NOTE: Make a copy of the information recorded in the
preceding paragraphs and keep in a safe location in
the event your operator’s manual is lost or destroyed.

F2-10

435/485/535

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Protective Shielding

Protective Shielding
Engine Side Covers
The side covers protect the operator from hot and/or
moving parts. Do not operate the tractor unless the
engine side covers are in place and latched.

F2-11

Starter Solenoid Shield
The shield covers the starter solenoid electrical
connections to prevent accidental contact. The
shield must be installed whenever the batteries are
connected to the electrical system. Always disconnect
battery before removing the shield.

DANGER: NEVER ATTEMPT TO START THE TRACTOR
BY BYPASSING THE WIRES TO THE STARTER
MOTOR.

F2-12

Battery Cover
The battery cover protects the batteries from damage
and the electrical connections from accidental contact.
The battery cover must always be in place and latched
during operation.

WARNING: INSTALL ALL PROTECTIVE SHIELDS
BEFORE STARTING OR OPERATING THE TRACTOR.
F2-13

435/485/535

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Break-In Period

Break-in Periods
The first 50 hours of operation are the most critical for
insuring long and dependable tractor life. Please carry
out the following procedures:
1. Review the tractor Pre-delivery Checklist contained
in the assembly manual with your dealer. Be sure
all applicable items on the sheet have been
checked.
2. Check all fluid levels and be sure all systems are
filled with the correct fluids for your operating
conditions.
3. Check the engine, transmission, and hydraulic oil
levels hourly during the first 10 hours of
operation.

Engine Break-in
The Cummins engine used in Buhler Versatile 4WD
tractors has been run on a dynamometer before
installation but not enough to be considered broken
in.
1. Do not operate the engine at more than 3/4 load
for the first 24 hours of operation. Full load should
only be held for short intervals during the next 24
hours of operation.
2. Check the oil level every 8 to 10 hours for the first
100 hours of operation.
3. Follow the recommendations outlined in the
Cummins manual supplied with your tractor.

4. Inspect the tractor for leaks hourly during the first
10 hours of operation.
5. Torque the wheel bolts to 715 N·m (525 ft-lbs)
after the first hour of operation and after every three
hour of operation for the first day. Re-tighten to the
specified torque daily until wheel hardware
maintains the specified torque.
6. Operate the engine at 3/4 load as much as possible
during the first 50 hours (3/4 load is approximately
one gear lower than would be normally used to pull
a matched load).
7. Do not operate the engine at idle speed or maximum
horsepower for more than 5 minutes at a time for
the first 50 hours.
8. Check the frame pivot pin, drag link and steering
cylinder cap screw torques after the first 10 hours
of operation. Torque the frame pivot pin to 1365
N·m (1000 ft-lbs) and the remaining pins to 175
N·m (130 ft-lbs).
9. Have your dealer complete the “First 50-Hour
Service” checklist at the end of this manual.

435/485/535

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Towing the Tractor

Towing The Tractor
IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a short
distance such as out of a building. Do not tow down
roadways or as a method of transport. Haul the tractor
on a trailer.
If towing the tractor is necessary, use a strong chain
or cable of sufficient strength to tow the vehicle.
Consult your Buhler Versatile Dealer. Tow the tractor
BACKWARD from the drawbar or FORWARD from both
of the front tie-down slots. Use the tie-down slots in
the front and rear frames to attach the chains to the
tractor.

WARNING: WHEN THE TRACTOR IS TOWED AND
THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING THERE WILL BE NO
BRAKES AVAILABLE ON THE TRACTOR RESULTING
IN A POSSIBLE COLLISION. ALWAYS USE A SOLID
TOWING BAR BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND THE
TOWING VEHICLE. The towing vehicle must
be of adequate size to stop the towed
tractor.

IMPORTANT: Do not tow the tractor by hooking to the
engine cross brace.
1. Engage the parking brake, then shift transmission
in neutral. Attach the chain to the tractor.
2. If possible start the engine and let the engine run
so that full use can be made of the power steering
and brakes. If the engine cannot be run engage
the articulation lock. (see page 1-12)

IMPORTANT: If the engine is not operational, and
the transmission internal components are rotated by
the axle drive shafts for a long period of time,
possible transmission damage due to lack of
lubrication may result.

IMPORTANT: When the engine is running, the
clutch, transmission input shaft, and transmission
output shafts will also be driven. Be sure that
these components are functional prior to starting
the engine.

3. Release the parking brake and tow the tractor.

435/485/535

CAUTION: DO NOT TOW THE TRACTOR FASTER
THAN 8 KPH (5 MPH). ENGAGE THE ARTICULATION
LOCK WHEN IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO STEER THE
TRACTOR (WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING).

WARNING: ONLY USE CABLES OF SUFFICIENT
STRENGTH TO TOW THE TRACTOR. IF A CABLE
BREAKS OR SLIPS, IT MAY WHIP WITH SUFFICIENT
FORCE TO CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY. WHEN USING
A CHAIN, ATTACH WITH THE HOOK OPEN SIDE
FACING UP; IF IT SLIPS, IT WILL DROP DOWN
INSTEAD OF FLYING UPWARD CAUSING SERIOUS
INJURY.

2-
Section 2 - General Information
Transporting

Transporting the Tractor
1. Haul the tractor with all four wheels on to a flatbed
trailer.
2. Remove the outer duals or triples during
transporting unless special permits allow for over width hauling. Consult local authorities for
information on over-width hauling.

6. Always fully engage the park brake and install
the articulation lock pin (4) when transporting the
vehicle.

3. Make an accurate measurement of the highest point
on the tractor when it is loaded on the transporter.
Consult local authorities regarding over-height
hauling based on the measurements taken.
4. Tie-down brackets are located in the following
positions.
Cutout slots (1) are located on either side of the front
frame to allow a chain hook to be used to hold down
the front end of the tractor.
Tie-down brackets are located on either side of the rear
frame, in the articulation area (2) and on the drawbar
cage (3). Use a chain of adequate size, routed through
the brackets to hold down the tractor.

F1-6

F2-14

435/485/535

2-10

435/485/535

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Contents

Section 3 Contents - Operation
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-operation Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautionary Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding & Battery Charging. . . . . . . . . . . .
The Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Entering the Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cab Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency Exit / Rear Window . . . . . .
Operator’s Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deluxe Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructional Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls & Instruments Overview. . . . . . . .

Forward Operator Controls . . . . . . . . .

Overhead Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Right Side Console Controls. . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel and Column Adjustments. .
Park Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foot Brake & Decelerator Pedal. . . . . . . . .
Forward Operator Control Console . . . . . . .
Overhead Control Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control & Air Conditioning. . . . . . .
Electronic Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator, Warning Lamps & Alarm . . .

EIC Tractor Performance Monitor. . . . .

Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EIC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Side Console Controls . . . . . . . . . . .

Synchromesh Transmission. . . . . . . . .

Powershift Transmission. . . . . . . . . . .

Hand Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Autoshift (CAT TA22 Transmission). . .

Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Hydraulic Controls - Manual . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 3-2
. 3-2
. 3-2
. 3-3
. 3-4
. 3-4
. 3-4
. 3-5
. 3-6
. 3-6
. 3-7
. 3-9
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-20
3-21
3-25
3-27
3-36
3-40
3-41
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47

Remote Hydraulic Controls Electro-Hydraulic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tractor Start-up and Engine Operation. .

Cold Weather Starting. . . . . . . . . .

Tractor Boosting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

3-49
3-50
3-51
3-53

.
.
.
.

Tractor Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Hand Throttle Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Decelerator Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Cruise Control Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Stopping the Tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Transmission Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

Synchromesh Transmission Operation . . . 3-57
1407 Powershift Transmission Operation 3-59

CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission Operation 3-61
Drawbar Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
External Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Hydraulic System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72

Hydraulic Schematic Diagram. . . . . . . . . 3-73
Remote Control Valve Operation - Manual . . . . 3-74

Lockout Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

Hydraulic Flow Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77

Hydraulic Quick Couplers. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

Hydraulic Motor Applications . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Remote Control Valve Operation Electro-Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

Electro-Hydraulic Control Pods. . . . . . . . 3-83

Engagement Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84

Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Programmable Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Flow Control Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

Hydraulic Quick Couplers. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88

Connecting Single-Acting Cylinders. . . . . 3-89

Connecting Double-Acting Cylinders . . . . 3-89

Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

Hydraulic Motor Application. . . . . . . . . . 3-90

Bleeding Remote Cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Wheels, Tires & Articulation Blocks . . . . . . . . 3-91

Wheel Installation-Single . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91

Wheel Installation-Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92

Wheel Installation-Triple. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93

Tire Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95

Articulation Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Ballasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Ballasting Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102

435/485/535

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Introduction

Introduction

Precautionary Statements

Read this section thoroughly. It details the location
and operation of the various instruments, switches
and controls on this tractor.
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate
the tractor until you are fully accustomed to all the
controls. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of
the tractor, consult your authorized dealer.
Pay
particular
attention
to
the
break–in
recommendations in section 2 to ensure that your
tractor will give the long and dependable service for
which it was designed.
Perform lubrication and maintenance schedules as
detailed in Section 4.

Pre–operation Checks
After completing the daily lubrication and maintenance
operations, perform a walk around visual inspection of
the tractor. Pay particular attention to the following
items:
• Fan belt for cracks
• Engine area for accumulation of debris
• Hoses, lines, and fittings for leaks or damage.
• Tires for damage
• Hardware for looseness
• Driveline and hydraulic pump areas for leaks or
debris accumulation
• Make sure the tractor is ballasted properly for the
work to be performed (see “Ballasting” in this
Section)
• Check dual or triple wheel mounting bolt torque
Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.

435/485/535

• DO NOT OPERATE THE TRACTOR IN A CLOSED
BUILDING.
• BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE, BE SURE ALL
OPERATING CONTROLS ARE IN NEUTRAL OR
OFF AND THE PARK BRAKE IS ENGAGED.
• OPERATE ALL CONTROLS ONLY FROM THE
OPERATOR’S SEAT.
• STOP THE ENGINE BEFORE SERVICING THE
TRACTOR.
• KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE.
• STOP THE ENGINE BEFORE RAISING THE
ENGINE SIDE SHIELDS.
• USE HAND HOLDS AND STEPS WHEN MOUNTING
AND DISMOUNTING THE TRACTOR.
• USE THE ARTICULATION LOCK IN STATIONARY
APPLICATIONS AND SERVICING. DO NOT USE
WHEN THE TRACTOR IS MOVING.
• ON HIGHWAYS, SIGNAL BEFORE STOPPING,
TURNING, OR SLOWING THE TRACTOR.
•

USE PROPER SAFETY DEVICES TO WARN OF
SLOW–MOVING VEHICLE WHEN DRIVING ON
PUBLIC ROADS. CHECK WITH LOCAL
AUTHORITIES CONCERNING HIGHWAY TRAVEL.

• WIDE TRANSPORT MARKER LIGHTS ARE
SUPPLIED WITH ALL TIRE OPTIONS. USE
THEM.

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Welding & Battery Charging

Welding & Battery Charging
Precautions: Welding

Precautions: Battery Charging

To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical systems,
always observe the following:

1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit
connections, including the connection at the
batteries, when the engine is running.

1. Always disconnect BOTH cables from the batteries
before carrying out any welding on the tractor or on
any implement attached to the tractor.

2. Never short any of the charging components to
ground.

2. Position the welder ground cable clamp as close to
the welding area as possible. Never weld on one
frame member (i.e., front or rear frame) and have
the ground strap of the welder on the other frame.
Doing this can cause damage to the hoses,
articulation bearings, and wire harnesses in the
articulation joint area.

3. Do not use a booster battery of higher than 12 volts
nominal voltage.

3. Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or across
any electrical wiring or electronic component while
welding is in progress.

5. Always disconnect the negative cable from the
batteries when charging the batteries in the tractor
with a battery charger.

4. On Powershift transmission equipped units, remove
the electrical connectors attached to the
transmission electronic controller, even when
the negative cable of the battery is disconnected,
to provide additional protection to the transmission
controller.
5. Always have an assistant standing by with a fire
extinguisher to put out any fires that may start due
to welding procedures.
6. Always completely clean the area to be welded so
that it is free of any grease, fuel or oil before
welding.

4. Always observe correct polarity when installing the
batteries or using a booster battery to jump start
the engine. Follow the instructions in this manual
when jump starting the tractor. Connect positive to
positive and negative to negative.

WARNING: BATTERIES CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID.
IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH SKIN, FLUSH THE
AFFECTED AREA WITH WATER FOR FIVE MINUTES.
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.
AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES OR
CLOTHING. WEAR EYE PROTECTION AND
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING WHEN WORKING NEAR
BATTERIES.

435/485/535

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features

The Cab
Entering the Cab

The cab has been designed for operator comfort and
convenience. The roof and floor are insulated to reduce
noise.

3
CAUTION: THE CAB IS NOT DESIGNED TO PROVIDE
A ”SPRAYER SAFE” ENVIRONMENT FOR THE
OPERATOR. WHEN APPLYING CHEMICALS FROM A
SPRAY UNIT, DO NOT RELY ON THE CAB FILTER
ELEMENTS TO PROVIDE PROTECTION TO THE
OPERATOR FROM AIRBORNE CHEMICALS.

2
F3-1

Cab features include:
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Air suspension operators seat
(Optional semi active seat)
Tinted glass
Opening rear window
Fresh air heater/defroster
Air-conditioning
Interior lighting
Instructional seat (optional)
Storage tray
Trouble light (optional)
Cigarette lighter and ashtray
Radio/CD (optional)
Accessory power sockets

UNLOCK

LOCK

Position 1 Position 2

F3-2

The cab is entered through the single door (1) using
the entry ladder (2) and grab handles (3) located on
the left side of the tractor. The door is hinged at the
rear and is held in the fully open position by a gas
spring.
The push-button door latch is located on the outside
bottom corner of the door (4).
The door latch can be locked with the ignition key.
The latch is unlocked in position 1 and locked in
position 2.
To open the door from inside squeeze the door latch
(5) while pushing door open.
The inside latch will open the door even if the door is
locked from the outside.

435/485/535

F3-3

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features
Rear Window / Emergency Exit
The right rear window, (1), can be opened to provide
ventilation. The window can be locked open, closed,
or positioned partially open.
To lock the window, pull the handle in and forward in
an arc. The handle will fold, go over center and lock.
To open the window, pull the handle back and push
out. The handle will unfold. There are four detents in
the handle, which will hold the window in a partially
open position. To lock in the full open position,
continue rotating the handle outward until the handle
stops. This is also an over center position, which will
prevent the window from closing unless the latch is
pulled.

The rear window also serves as an emergency exit in
the event that the cab door cannot be opened. To
operate, pull out the pin (2) attaching the handle to
the glass window.
This will allow the window to open wide enough for
exit. If greater access is required, the silicone hinge/
seal can be sliced through with a knife to remove the
window completely.

F1-5

F1-4

435/485/535

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features - Seating

Operator’s seat
The tractor is equipped with a choice of operator’s
seat.

The Standard Seat
The Deluxe Seat

(Equipped with: adjustable headrest, heated seat
cushion, semi-active air suspension system.)
NOTE: Before operating the tractor, it is important to
adjust the seat, steering wheel, and controls to the
most comfortable position.

Seat Belt

1
WARNING: THIS TRACTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH A
RETRACTABLE SEAT BELT. ALWAYS USE THE SEAT
BELT.
The seat belt automatically adjusts for the size of the
individual in the seat.

2
3

To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push
the tongue end (1) into the buckle end (2) until a click
indicates it is properly engaged.
To release the belt, push the red release button (3) on
the buckle and remove the tongue from the buckle.
To clean the belt, sponge with clean, soapy water. Do
not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these
chemicals will weaken the webbing.
Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying,
damage or general wear.

435/485/535

F3-4

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features - Seating

Standard Seat
The seat is equipped with controls to permit the
following adjustments for personal comfort.
NOTE: All adjustments should be made in the following
order while sitting in the seat.

Adjust the seat using the following procedures:
NOTE: With the engine off, adjust the seat by
turning the ignition switch to the “ACC” position.
DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
1. Height/Weight Adjustment
Raise - Depress the top of the switch. Release when
the desired height is obtained.

Lower - Depress the bottom of the switch. Release
when the desired height is achieved.

4
2. Backrest Angle Adjustment
Lift the lever and tilt the backrest to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the backrest in
position.

3
5

NOTE: The backrest will tilt backward far enough to
contact the rear window.

6
F3-5

6. Storage tray
3. Fore/Aft Position Adjustment

Pull out for access.

Pull up on the lever and move the seat fore/aft
through the 178 mm (7”) adjustment range to the
desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat
into position.
4. Fore/Aft Float
Pull up on the lever to allow the seat to float fore and
aft 51 mm (2”). Push down on the lever to lock the
seat into position.
5. Lateral Float
Pull up on the lever to allow the seat to float laterally
51 mm (2”). Push down on the lever to lock the seat
into position.

435/485/535

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features - Seating

6. Dampener Adjustment

The firmness of the ride can be adjusted as follows:
Soft - Rotate the control knob clockwise to decrease
the firmness of the seat bounce.
Firm - Rotate the control knob counterclockwise to
increase the firmness of the seat bounce.

7. Swivel Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted to:
• Lock in the forward position.
• Lock in one position to the left of center.
• Lock in one of four positions to the right of center
(increments of 7° for a total of 28° rotation)
• Provide a free swing position without locking in any
position.

To adjust the seat swivel:
1. Move the swivel control lever partially to the
rear.

2. Swing the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the lever to lock the seat into position.
NOTE: Moving the control lever fully rearward will
provide the free swing position.
8. Lumbar Adjustment
Adjust as follows:
Increase support - Rotate the wheel down.
Decrease support - Rotate the wheel upwards.
9. Armrest Angle Adjustment
Rotate the roller on each armrest to adjust to the
desired angle.
Both armrests can also be raised up to the full vertical
position for easy access.

435/485/535

8
F3-6

3-
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features - Seating

Deluxe Seat
The seat is equipped with controls to permit the
following adjustments for personal comfort.
NOTE: All adjustments should be made in the following
order while sitting in the seat.
Adjust the seat using the following procedures:

1
5

NOTE: With the engine off, adjust the seat by
turning the ignition switch the “ACC” position.
DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
1. Height/Weight Adjustment
Depress the top of the switch to raise the seat. Release
when the desired height is obtained.

Depress the bottom of the switch to lower the seat.
Release when the desired height is achieved.
2. Backrest Angle Adjustment
Lift the lever and tilt the backrest to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the backrest in
position.
NOTE: The backrest will tilt backward far enough to
contact the rear window.
3. Fore/Aft Float

4
3

7
F3-7

7. Storage tray
Pull out for access.

Pull up on the lever to allow the seat to float fore and
aft 51 mm (2”). Push down on the lever to lock the
seat into position.
4. Lateral Float
Pull up on the lever to allow the seat to float laterally
51 mm (2”). Push down on the lever to lock the seat
into position.
5. Swivel Adjustment
Pull up on the lever to swivel the seat. Push down on
the lever to lock the seat into position.
6. Fore/Aft Position Adjustment
Pull up on the lever to move the seat forward
or backward to the desired position. Push down
on the lever to lock the seat into position.

435/485/535

3-10
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features - Seating

7. Heated seat cushion
The seat incorporates a thermostatically controlled
heating element within the seat cushion which
maintains a comfortable working temperature in cold
conditions. Depress the top of the switch to activate.
The indicator switch lamp will illuminate. To switch
off, depress the bottom of the switch.

8. Dampener Adjustment
The seat incorporates a semi-active suspension system
that greatly reduces vibration to the operator.
NOTE: The suspension system is factory calibrated
and should only be serviced by an authorized Buhler
Versatile dealer.
Depress the top of the switch to increase the increase
the firmness of the ride.
Depress the bottom of the switch to soften the ride.
9. Lumbar Adjustment
Adjust as follows:
Increase support - Rotate the wheel down.
Decrease support - Rotate the wheel upwards.
10. Armrest Angle Adjustment
Rotate the roller on each armrest to adjust to the
desired angle.
Both armrests can also be raised up to the full vertical
position for easy access.
11. Headrest Adjustment
The headrest can by raised to the desired position by
pulling upward, using the handle incorporated in the
back of the headrest.

435/485/535

9
F3-8

3-11
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Features - Seating

Instructional Seat (Optional)
An instructional seat (1) with seat belt is available for
the purpose of providing seating for training a new
operator on the operation of the tractor.

WARNING: INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT IS USED ONLY
FOR INSTRUCTING OR SERVICE DIAGNOSING ONLY.
DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE, ESPECIALLY
CHILDREN. SEAT BELT MUST BE WORN AT ALL
TIMES.
A strap is provided to secure the seat cushion in a
raised position (2) when the seat is not being used for
training. This will expose the utility tray incorporating
a cup holder and storage tray.

The seat back is designed to carry a laptop computer
in the lowered position (3).

F3-9

435/485/535

3-12
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

Controls and Instruments Overview
The information on the following pages identifies,
locates and describes the function of the controls and
instruments located in the cab.

The controls have been divided into the following four
areas:
Forward Operator Controls
Overhead Controls
Right Side Console Controls

WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE THE TRACTOR UNTIL
YOU ARE THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH THE
LOCATION AND OPERATION OF ALL CONTROLS.

Additional Cab Controls

7
6

5
AIR FILTER

ENGINE

COLD START

COOL LEVEL

ENGINE

INTERCOOLER

TRANS PRESS

TRANS FILTER

HYD TEMP

HYD FILTER

L GEAR

TRAILER BRAKE

ALTERNATOR

PTO ON

TRAILER 1

DIFF LOCK

5
COOLANT TEMP

FUEL LEVEL

ENG OIL PRESS

n/min

RPM

F2
TIMED
EXIT

PANEL DIM

AREA

1000
PTO
540
MPH
km/h

SERVICE

BATTERY VOLT S

DISTANCE

FUEL

AREA ON

%SLIP 1000

ENG
HRS

SYSTEM

STATUS

STOP

USED GAL IMP WIDTH CAL 540

SELECT

SPEED

% SLIP

LOWER
HEAD

START

HOUR HOUR OFF ALARM PTO
RESV DIST FT METERS VOLTS

CABIN
TEMP

PTO RPM

ACC

UPPER

OFF

STOP

RUN

OVER
RIDE

OFF

START

ETHER

13
20
14
19
18
15

17
16

Forward Operator Controls
(steering wheel omitted for clarity)

435/485/535

F3-10

3-13
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments
Forward Operator Controls
1. Key-start/stop switch, 4 position

15. Clutch control pedal

2. Engine shut down override switch

16. Brake pedal

3. Electronic Instrument Cluster (EIC) including:

17. Decelerator pedal

4. 11 touch sensitive switches for

EIC functions and aid in calibration

18. Ashtray

selecting

19. Steering wheel tilt control lever

5. Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)

20. Roof beacon (optional)

6. Fuel level and battery voltage bar graphs
7. 26 Indicator and warning lamps

Overhead Controls

21. Dome lights

Central display (LCD) indicates:
Top - transmission gear information
Middle - engine speed
Bottom - hours, ground speed, PTO speed as
selected

22. Front windscreen wiper/washer switch
23. Rear windscreen wiper/washer switch (optional)
24. Heater/air-conditioning vents

9. Coolant temperature and oil pressure bar graphs
10. 6 touch sensitive function switches: timed exit,

panel light, cabin temperature, engine hours
11. Multi-function switch: horn, turn signal, high/low

beam

25. Recirculation vent
26. Air conditioner on/off switch
27. Temperature control selection switch
28. Fan switch

12. Master light switch, 4 position

29. Radio (optional)

13. Hazard warning switch

30. Rearview mirror

14. Ether (cold start) button

31. Right hand console lamp

MP
AUTO TE

ROL
CONT

F3-11

Overhead Controls
435/485/535

3-14
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

N R
M

STOP

N 4
2

E
UIS
CR

TO
AU

)

F3-12

Right Side Console Controls - Synchromesh Transmission with Manual Hydraulics
1. Gear selector
2. Range selector
3. Hydraulic lever control 1-6
4. PTO - Power Take Off (optional)
5. Fuse & relay panel cover
6. Flow controls 1-4
7. CAT TA22 transmission autoshift switch (optional)
8. Differential lock switch (optional)
9. Hand throttle control lever
10. Cruise control +/- increment/decrement switch
11. Cruise control on/off switch
12. Cup holder
13. Cigarette lighter
14. Electro-hydraulic control pods (optional)
15. Electro-hydraulic engagement switch

435/485/535

N
N

AUTO

Synchromesh transmission with optional
Electro-hydraulics

F3-13

3-15
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

STOP

E
UIS
CR

TO
AU

)

F3-14

Right Side Console Controls - Optional 1407 Twindisc or CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission
with Manual Hydraulics
1. Bumpshift lever
2. Hydraulic lever control 1-6
3. PTO - Power Take Off (optional)
4. Fuse & relay panel cover
5. Flow controls 1-4
6. CAT TA22 transmission autoshift switch (optional)
6. Differential lock switch (optional)
7. Hand throttle control lever
9. Cruise control +/- increment/decrement switch
10. Cruise control on/off switch
11. Cup holder
12. Cigarette lighter
13. Electro-hydraulic control pods (optional)
14. Electro-hydraulic engagement switch

N
N

AUTO

F3-13

Powershift transmission with optional
Electro-hydraulics
435/485/535

3-16
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

Steering Wheel and Column
The steering column may be adjusted for tilt and
telescope to provide a comfortable operating
position.

Steering Wheel Tilt Control

To tilt the steering wheel, pull the tilt control lever
(1) upward. Position the steering wheel at the desired
angle and lock in position by releasing the control lever.
The steering wheel can be tilted upward to the top
stop to allow easy exit from the seat.

Steering Wheel Telescopic Adjustment
ET
HE
R

To telescope the steering wheel rotate the center
locking knob (2) counterclockwise and unlock the
steering column. Slide the steering wheel up or down
to the desired position and lock the column in place
by rotating the locking knob (2) clockwise.

IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with hydrostatic
power steering. Never hold the steering wheel against
either of the articulation stops for more than 10
seconds or for more than a total of 10 seconds in any
one minute. Failure to observe this precaution may
result in damage to the steering system components.

F3-15

Parking Brake
The parking brake (3) is located on the floor to the
right of the operator’s seat. To engage the parking
brake, pull the lever up. To disengage, raise the lever
up slightly, then depress button (4) and push the lever
down.

CAUTION: The parking brake must be
engaged before the operator leaves the
seat.
NOTE: A two-minute pulsating audible alarm will
sound with a flashing parking brake lamp to remind
the operator to engage the parking brake if the tractor
engine is stopped without the parking brake applied.
The parking brake indicator lamp will illuminate when
the parking brake is applied.
IMPORTANT: To prevent the tractor from being driven
with the parking brake applied a flashing “P” will be
displayed in the transmission LCD of the EIC (5) and
the parking brake warning lamp will flash along with a
continuous audible alarm. Tractors equipped with the
CAT TA22 transmission require that the parking brake
be engaged before the engine will start.

435/485/535

3
4

F3-28

GEAR
F3-120

3-17
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments
Foot Brake
The foot brake pedal (5) is located in the lower right
corner of the operator’s console near the cab floor. The
pedal should be depressed to bring the tractor to a
stop once the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

CAUTION: KEEP THE CAB FLOOR AREA FREE FROM
DEBRIS OR OBJECTS WHICH MAY OBSTRUCT THE
OPERATION OF THE BRAKE PEDAL. KEEP THE
PEDAL CLEAN AND DRY TO PREVENT YOUR FOOT
FROM SLIPPING OFF THE PEDAL.

F3-56

DANGER: NEVER LEAVE THE OPERATOR’S SEAT
WITHOUT FIRST BRINGING THE TRACTOR TO A
COMPLETE STOP USING THE FOOT BRAKE, AND
THEN engaging THE PARKing BRAKE.
DANGER: NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR IF THE
FOOT OR PARKing BRAKE DOES NOT FUNCTION
PROPERLY.
DANGER: NEVER RELY SOLELY ON THE
TRANSMISSION TO HOLD THE TRACTOR
STATIONARY WHEN PARKED; ALWAYS engage
THE PARKing BRAKE.

Decelerator Pedal
At the lower front of the right console is the decelerator
pedal (6) which can be used to reduce engine speed
when turning or while shifting. Fully depressing the
decelerator pedal will reduce the engine to an idle
speed of 1400 RPM. If the pedal is not fully depressed,
engine speed will be reduced proportionally. When
the pedal is released, engine speed will return to the
previous throttle setting.
IMPORTANT: Do not release the decelerator before
completing the turn. If the transmission is in a high
gear, the tractor will accelerate quickly, reducing the
time to correct tractor direction.

435/485/535

3-18
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

Forward Operator Control Console
The following description details the controls located
in the forward operator’s console.

A
ACC

OVER
RIDE

Ignition Switch

OFF

STOP

C
RUN
START

The ignition switch (1) has four key positions.
Position A - Accessories “ON,” Engine “OFF”
Position B - Engine and electrical equipment “OFF”
Position C - Warning lights and instruments “ON.”
Engine RUN position.

Position D - Starter motor operates

F3-19

Engine Shut Down Override Switch
The rocker switch (2) allows the operator to override
the automatic shut down. See “Operating the Engine”
for details on the automatic shut down feature. The
switch should only be used to move the tractor to a
safe area for investigation and repair. Push the top of
the switch to override the shut down system. Push the
bottom of the switch to return to normal (automatic
shut down) operation.

Rotary Beacon Switch (optional)
The rocker switch (3) controls the operation of the
beacon. Push the top of the switch to operate the
beacon. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the
beacon off. Tractors without rotary beacons have a
blanking plate in place of the switch.

Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray (4) can be tilted out for convenient use.
To clean the ashtray, pull it upward and out from the
dash and empty.
The cigarette lighter (page 3-14) is located on the
left of the right hand console. Push the lighter in to
activate. It will automatically pop out when heated.
Return lighter to it’s socket after use.

435/485/535

OVER
RIDE

ACC

OFF

STOP

RUN
START

F3-16

3-19
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments
Master Light Switch
The master light switch (1) has 4 positions.
Position A - Full counterclockwise is off.

Position B - Headlights and parking lights
Position C - Headlights and parking lights and lower
work lights

Position D - All work lights, headlights and parking
lights.

D
ER
LOW

R
UPPE

D
HEA

OFF

Hazard Warning Light Switch

Push the top of the rocker switch (2) to activate the
hazard lights. Push the bottom of the switch to turn
the hazard lights off.

1
F3-18

Multi Function Switch

The lever type multifunction switch (3) operates the
horn, turn signals, headlight flash and is used to select
high or low beam.
Turn Signals - Move the lever upward to indicate a
right turn, or downward to indicate a left turn. The turn
signal warning light on the warning light bar will flash
when the signals are operated. The opposite warning
light on the warning light bar will also light, but will
remain steady. The turn signal must be manually
returned to neutral after the turn is completed.
An audible warning will sound if the turn signals are
left on for more than two minutes
Headlights (High/Low Beams) - With the master light
switch in positions B, C or D, the multifunction switch
lever can be pulled toward the steering column to
change the headlights between high and low beam.
Headlight Flash - With the master light switch in
position A (Off), the multifunction switch lever can be
pulled toward the steering column to flash the high or
low beams of the headlights.
Horn - Press the button on the end of the multifunction
switch lever to activate the horn.

C
B
A

LOWER

HEAD

UPPER

OFF

ETHER

4
F3-17

Ether Cold Start Button
The ether cold start button (4) is used to inject ether,
a highly combustible substance, into the engine
intake manifold. Ether will ignite in the engine at
temperatures far below those needed to ignite diesel
fuel.
Use the ether to assist the engine starting in
temperatures at or below 0° C (32° F).
Note: See cold-weather starting on page 3-51 for
detailed operation.

435/485/535

3-20
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

Overhead Controls

The following description details the overhead controls
located in the cab roof.

Front Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
The front windshield wiper switch (1) is a three
position switch.
Position A - Off
Position B - Slow

C
B

Position C - Fast

Press the switch to operate the screen washer.
When the front windshield wiper switch is turned off,
the wiper arm will always park on the right side of the
windshield.

F3-20

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (optional)
The rear window wiper switch (2) is also a three
position switch and operates as the front windshield
switch.
Position A - Off
Position B - Slow
Position C - Fast
Press the switch to operate the screen washer.
When the rear window wiper switch is turned off,
the wiper arm will always park on the left side of the
window.

Power Heated Mirrors (optional)
The power heated mirrors controls are located on the
right side in the cab roof.
The mirror controls consist of a momentary rocker
switch (3) which activates the mirrors heating elements
for nine minutes before automatically switching off.

MIRROR
R

The mirrors are adjusted with the joystick (4). Turning
the joystick left or right to select the required mirror,
moving the joystick up and down or left and right to
obtain the desired position.
F3-142

435/485/535

3-21
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments

Climate Controls
Heater
Before activating the heater, open the heater valve on
the rear/right side of the engine block (1). Under most
cold-weather conditions it is not necessary to have the
valve completely open.
During hot weather, shut the heater valve off. This will
ensure that no engine coolant will flow into the heater
core.
Make sure the air conditioner is deactivated except
during defrosting. To increase the cab interior
temperature for cold weather operation, start the engine
and make sure the coolant temperature bar graph
indicates two or more bars. Rotate the temperature
control switch (3) to increase the temperature. Adjust
the fan speed switch (4) to increase or decrease air
flow.

F3-21

Air Conditioning Operation

CAUTION: THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM USES
R134A REFRIGERANT. DO NOT MIX WITH OTHER
REFRIGERANTS. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TOP OFF
THE SYSTEM WITH ANY OTHER REFRIGERANTS.
CONSULT A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FOR ALL AIR
CONDITIONING REPAIRS.

The climate controls consist of a rocker switch (2)
which activates the air conditioning, and two rotary
switches, controlling the temperature (3) and the
pressurizer fan (4).
Depress the top of the air conditioning rocker switch
(2) to activate the air conditioner. Depress the bottom
of the switch to deactivate the air conditioner.
The temperature control switch (3) is used to maintain
a constant temperature. Rotate the temperature
control switch counterclockwise to increase cooling.
Adjust the fan speed switch (4) to increase or decrease
air flow.

AUTO TEMP CONTROL

F3-22

To aid in defrosting the windshield and side windows
the air conditioner and heater may be operated at the
same time. The air conditioner will remove moisture
from the air while the heater warms the air in the
cab. When the windows are clear, deactivate the air
conditioner.

435/485/535

3-22
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments
IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off when
cooled or dehumidified air is not required. This is
especially important during cold weather as damage to
the compressor could result. For proper air conditioner
operation, the cab air filter must be serviced regularly.
(See Lubrication & Maintenance section).

Pressurizer Vents
The pressurizer has adjustable and fixed vents to
direct air flow as required.

F3-24

Fixed vents (not shown) direct air to the windshield to
aid defrosting and defogging.
Two adjustable vents (1) can be directed onto the
front side windows and door to aid defrosting and
defogging.

Four adjustable vents (2) face the operator.
Vent (3) is for air re-circulation.
Rotate the vents inside their housings to direct air as
required. The slide lever inside the vent can be moved
side to side to direct air flow to the left or right.
For additional comfort, a floor vent (4) is
provided at the bottom of the right hand console.

F3-23

Sun Blind
A sun blind is provided front and rear. Pull down
on the bottom frame (5) and extend to the desired
position. Push up to retract.

F3-114

Mirror
An interior rear view mirror (6) is provided for your
convenience. It is located on the right post and is
adjustable.

MP
AUTO TE

ROL
CONT

NOTE: To provide a wider view, the mirror has a
convex lens. This causes objects to appear farther
away than they are.

Console Light
A console light (7) is provided to illuminate the right
console. The light comes on when the master light
switch is set to positions B, C or D. (see page 3-19).

435/485/535

6
F3-57

3-23
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments
Trouble Light (Optional)
A trouble light is located in the left, rear corner
of the cab, under the rear deck. The light has a
5.5 M (18') power cord attached. To remove the light
(1) move the locking lever (2) to the left and carefully
pull the light downward while unwinding the cable
from the holder. The light base is magnetic which
enables attachment to the tractor for convenience
while working.
The light switch (3) is a two-position switch. With the
switch lever in the off position (vertical), the light is off.
With the switch lever in the on position (horizontal),
the light will come on when the cab door is open.
The trouble light, when it is stowed in it’s cradle, is used
in conjunction with the cab dome lights to illuminate
the cab interior when the cab door is open.

4
3

1
5

NOTE: The trouble light has been designed to turn off
when the door is closed.

F3-27

To stow the trouble light, reel in the cable with the
crank handle (4) inserting the pin (5) into its socket,
and lock in position with the lever (2).

Power Outlets
Three power outlets are located in the rear deck
behind the operator’s seat.
Outlet (6), 12 volt, 1-pin accessory connector.
Outlet (7), 12 volt, 3-pin accessory connection.
Outlet (8), 16-pin diagnostic connector.
Outlet (9), Cummins diagnostic connector.
Outlet (10), CAT TA22 transmission diagnostic
connector (Optional CAT TA22 Installation only)

NOTE: On earlier models a Cummins engine diagnostic
cable, BVI p/n: 86033779 is supplied with the tractor
and is located in the storage tray under the seat. This
cable connects to the 16 pin connector (8) and the
Cummins insite tool harness.
The 3-pin accessory plug (7) has 3 terminals.
Pin 1 - Key switched 12 volt power source protected

by a 20-amp fuse.

F3-25

Pin 2 - Live 12 volt power source
protected by a 20-amp fuse.
Pin 3 - Ground.

3
F3-26

435/485/535

3-24
Section 3 - Operation
Cab Controls & Instruments
Dome Lights

Two dome lights (1) are provided in the cab roof to
illuminate the interior. Each light can be set to one of
three positions.

Position A - On when the door is open

Position B - Off

Position C - On

Cab-Mounted Accessory Bracket (Optional)

The cab has an optional bracket for mounting cab
accessories, ie: Implement Monitor Boxes, Gauges, CB
Radio, and Cellular Phone. The bracket is equipped
with three power outlets:
Socket (4) is a 12 volt, 1-pin accessory connector.

Plugs (5&6) are 12 volt, 3-pin accessory connections.
These plugs have 3 terminals:

Pin 1 - Key switched 12 volt power source protected

by a 20-amp fuse.
Pin 2 - Live 12 volt power source
protected by a 20-amp fuse.

F3-110

Pin 3 - Ground.

Radio (Optional)
A radio/cassette or radio/CD player can be installed in
the cab of your tractor.

P/N: 86032815 - radio/cassette
P/N: 86032814 - radio/CD player
If you require installation of either of these units,
please contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.
A separate instruction manual is supplied with
each radio and should be followed for proper radio
operation.

3
F3-26

Rotary Beacon (Optional)
A rotary beacon with a magnetic base can be mounted
in one of three locations on the roof cap.
The power cable is connected to the socket (7) located
to the left of the door underneath the roof cap.
The beacon is operated by the switch on the right
hand side of the forward control console.
The rotary beacon kit is available from you a Buhler
Versatile dealer, P/N: 86031163

435/485/535

F3-118

3-25
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC

Electronic Instrument Cluster
7

F3-29

Introduction
The following information details the operation and
programming of the Electronic Instrument Cluster
(EIC). The above illustration of the EIC shows an
example of a normal operating display.
When the key-start switch is turned on, a self-test of
all the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) segments and
warning lamps is activated, the audible alarm will
sound for approximately one second and all lamps
will be illuminated briefly to confirm that the bulbs
are functioning. The LCD background areas are
illuminated when the tractor key switch is turned on.
They also have dimmer controlled back lighting.
The EIC is divided into the following areas:
1. The central LCD displays transmission gear
information at the top. Engine speed in the middle
and operating hours/ground speed and PTO speed
at the bottom.

3. Fuel level and battery volts are displayed
in the right bar graphs.
4. The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) is
displayed on the right side of the cluster. The
TPM provides information on 3-point hitch
and other selected system information. Fault code
information is also displayed.
5. Eleven touch-sensitive switches select EIC
functions for display within the TPM. The switches
are also used for calibration purposes.
6. Four touch-sensitive switches are used to control
timed exit, cabin temperature (optional), engine
hours and instrument lighting.
7. Coolant level and engine oil pressure are displayed
in the left bar graphs.

2. There are 26 colored indicator or warning lamps,
which provide operating information or give warning
of system malfunctions.

435/485/535

3-26
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
Audible Alarm
An audible alarm will sound under the following
conditions:
• when the ignition is first switched on.
• when a warning light illuminates or a bar graph
indicates a malfunction.
The alarm will alert the operator that a malfunction
has occurred.

n/min

Depending on the severity of the malfunction, the
alarm will sound as follows:
Non-Critical Alarm - An audible alarm sounds for one
second only. The tractor will continue to operate, but
the cause of the alarm should be investigated and
corrected.

RPM
F3-30

Critical Alarm - A continuous pulsating tone will
sound until the malfunction is corrected or the engine
is switched off. The engine “STOP” message will flash
in the center display for 30 seconds before automatic
engine shut down occurs. The cause of the malfunction
should be located and corrected immediately to
prevent damage to the tractor.
The audible alarm has a rotary volume control (1)
located on the left side of the steering column below
the front controls. Rotate the alarm cover to adjust
the volume.

F3-31

Automatic Engine Shut Down
An automatic engine shut down feature is standard
equipment. This feature will automatically shut down
the engine within 30 seconds under the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Transmission oil pressure low
Engine oil pressure low
Intake manifold temperature high-critical
Engine coolant temperature high-critical
Engine coolant level low
Electrical charging system voltage low
Engine oil temperature high-critical

435/485/535

WARNING: The engine shut down feature
is fully automatic. It can be overridden
by the operator to drive the tractor to a
safe location. The override switch is to the
right of the steering column and should
only be used to move the tractor far
enough to avoid a dangerous situation.
(See “Engine Shut down Override Switch Operation”
page 3-18).

3-27
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC

15
16

1
22
23

F3-29

Indicator, Warning Lamps and Audible Alarm
The twenty-six colored status lamps, shown above,
provide operating information or give warning of
system malfunction. The malfunction warning lamps
are accompanied by an audible alarm.
The status lamps/audible alarm function as follows:
1. Left Turn Signal
The Turn Signal lamp (1) will flash in unison with
tractor left-hand turn signal. An audible alarm will
sound if the turn signals are left on for more than two
minutes.
2. Trailer 1 Turn Signal
Not used.

3
2
1

TRAILER BRAKE

TRAILER 1

3. Trailer Brake
Not used.
F3-32

435/485/535

3-28
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
In the event of an engine fault occurring, 1 of 3
warning lamps will flash depending on the level of the
fault.
4. Engine Maintenance - Attention (white lamp)

Illuminates when engine maintenance is required.
A fault code is also displayed.
5. Engine Maintenance - Warning (yellow lamp)
Illuminates when a non-critical fault occurs in the
electronic engine control system. As soon as possible,
contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.
6. Engine Maintenance - Critical (red lamp)
Illuminates when a critical fault occurs in the electronic
engine control system. The alarm will sound and
the engine “STOP” message will flash in the center
display for 30 seconds before automatic engine shut
down occurs. The cause of the malfunction should be
located and corrected immediately to prevent damage
to the tractor.

F3-33

7. Air Filter Restriction
The Air Filter lamp will illuminate accompanied by
the non-critical alarm if the fault has existed for 10
seconds. Stop the tractor and service the air filter to
prevent engine damage.
8. Cold Start
The Cold Start lamp will illuminate when outside
temperature is at or below 0° C (32° F).

Use the ether cold start to assist engine starting in
cold weather, (see page 3-51).
9. Coolant Level Low
The Coolant Level lamp will illuminate when coolant
drops below the sender level. A critical alarm will
sound. Check for leaks and refill cooling system.
10. Alternator Charge Indicator
The Alternator lamp will illuminate steady if the
alternator is not charging the battery. The lamp will
flash and the non-critical alarm will sound if an
overcharge condition occurs.
11. Intercooler Overheated
The Intercooler lamp will illuminate and the noncritical alarm will sound when an overheat condition
occurs. The cause of the alarm should be determined
and corrected before further operation or engine
damage may occur.

435/485/535

F3-34

3-29
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
12. Transmission Oil Pressure
The Transmission Oil Pressure lamp will illuminate
accompanied by the critical alarm, indicating that the
transmission lubrication circuit oil pressure is low.

14
15
16

The engine “STOP” message will flash for 30 seconds
before automatic shut down occurs.
Stop the engine and investigate the cause.
13. Transmission Filter
The Transmission Filter lamp will illuminate indicating
a restricted or blocked filter. The filter is now in a bypass
condition and is no longer filtering the oil returning to
the transmission. The filter should be serviced within
1 hour of operation.
14. Hydraulic Oil Temperature
The Hydraulic Oil Temperature lamp will illuminate
indicating that the hydraulic oil temperature is too
high. Stop the engine and investigate the cause.

F3-35

15. Hydraulic Filter
The Hydraulic Filter lamp will illuminate indicating
a restriction or blockage in one of the two filters. The
filter is now in a bypass condition and is no longer
filtering the oil returning to the reservoir. The filter
should be serviced within 1 hour of operation.
16. PTO On (Optional)
The PTO lamp will illuminate when the PTO switch is
engaged.
17. Diff Lock (Optional)
The Diff Lock lamp will illuminate when the differential
lock switch is engaged.
18. Right Turn Signal
The Turn Signal lamp will flash in unison with tractor
right-hand turn signal. An audible alarm will sound
if the turn signals are left on for more than two
minutes.

435/485/535

3-30
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
19. Parking Brake
The Parking Brake lamp will illuminate when the park
brake is applied (raised).

WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, ALWAYS
APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE BEFORE LEAVING
THE TRACTOR SEAT.
20. System Status
The System Status lamp is illuminated when all
systems are normal. It flashes when a malfunction is
detected in a system monitored by the warning lamps
or bar graphs.

19
F3-36

21. Headlight High Beam
The High Beam lamp will illuminate when the tractor
lights are switched to high beam.
22. F1

For future expansion/accessories

23. F2
For future expansion/accessories
24. Safety Belt
The Safety Belt lamp illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “RUN” position and stays
illuminated for five seconds to remind the operator to
fasten the safety belt.

25. Auto Diff Lock
The Auto Diff Lock lamp illuminates when Auto
differential lock is engaged.
26. Timed Exit
Press to toggle between delayed lighting settings.
Lamp illuminates when timer is set.
27. Panel Dim
Press to toggle between illumination settings. (see
page 3-35 for details).
28. Cabin Temperature (optional)
Press to indicate cabin temperature in TPM display.
29. Engine Hours
Press to display engine hours.

435/485/535

3-31
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC

Bar Graph Displays (LCD)
The four bar graphs each consist of twenty LCD
segments.

All bar graph sensors are continuously tested for faults.
If a fault occurs, the bar graph will flash and a fault
code will be stored.

Engine Coolant Temperature
The outside left bar graph (1) registers coolant
temperature. One segment of the bar graph will
be displayed if the engine is cold. The number of
segments displayed will increase as the engine warms
up. With the engine at normal operating temperature,
up to fifteen segments will be displayed. The normal
working range is indicated by the green area of the
adjacent range display.
Should the coolant temperature exceed a
predetermined level, the coolant temperature bar
graph will flash. The critical alarm will sound and the
legend “STOP” will flash in the central display for 30
seconds before automatic engine shut down occurs.

F3-38

Stop the engine immediately and investigate the
cause.
NOTE: The bar graph indicates engine coolant
temperature only. It is not an indication of coolant
level. The engine coolant must be checked daily.

Engine Oil Pressure
The inside left bar graph (2) indicates engine oil
pressure. With normal engine oil pressure, up to
sixteen segments of the bar graph will be displayed.
This is represented by the green area of the adjacent
range display.
Should engine oil pressure fall below a designated
level, the bar graph will flash. The critical alarm will
sound, the word “STOP” will flash in the central
display for 30 seconds before automatic engine shut
down occurs.
Stop the engine immediately and investigate the
cause.
NOTE: The bar graph indicates engine oil pressure only.
It is not an indication of oil level. The engine oil level
must be checked daily by means of the dipstick.

435/485/535

3-32
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
Fuel Level
The inside right bar graph (3) indicates fuel level.
Each segment of the bar graph display represents
one-twentieth (approximately 5 percent) of the total
fuel content of the tank.

When the fuel level falls so that only two segments of
the bar graph are displayed, the bar graph will flash
continually and the non-critical alarm will sound for
one second.
The system also has a feature to assist the operator
during refueling procedures. An audible indicator
alerts the operator when the tanks are filled to 3/4
capacity (15 bars) and 19/20 or 95% (19 bars).
NOTE: This feature only operates when the ignition
switch is set to the “RUN” position.

F3-39

CAUTION: ALWAYS SHUT THE ENGINE OFF DURING
REFUELING PROCEDURES

Battery Volts
The outside right bar graph (4) indicates battery
voltage.

Central Display
Three liquid crystal displays (LCD) are located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
5. The top LCD is the digital transmission gear shift
position display.

5
6

6. The center LCD is the digital engine speed
display.
7. The lower LCD will display selected information as
follows:
• Tractor ground speed (MPH or km/h)

• PTO speed (rev/min)
• Engine hours accumulated (actual time)
• Service alert - as required
• Timed exit - as required
F3-40

435/485/535

3-33
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
Transmission Gear Shift Position Display
The top LCD provides a display of the gear selected.

The left figure (1) displays a letter as follows:
F - Forward gear selected*
N - Neutral selected
R - Reverse gear selected*
A - Automatic shift selected (Powershift option only)

F3-41

P - Parking brake applied*
CL - Clutch depressed* (Synchromesh only)
The right figure (2) displays gear 1-12 or 1-16
depending on the transmission options.
*If the letter “P” is flashing, the display is indicating
an “Operator Prompt” where the parking brake is
inappropriately on or off or out of sequence with
the transmission control lever. To return to normal
operation, release or apply the parking brake as
appropriate. Return the transmission control lever to
neutral, release the parking brake, then shift to either
forward or reverse as desired.
NOTE: A tractor equipped with synchromesh
transmission will only display gear shift position when
moving.

Engine Speed Display
With the engine running, the digital value (3) of the
engine RPM will be displayed, together with the RPM
legend (4) in the center LCD.

The engine LCD registers in increments of 10 RPM.
If a critical engine or driveline fault should occur,
the word “STOP” will flash for 30 seconds before
automatic engine shut down occurs.

4
F3-42

435/485/535

3-34
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
Selectable Display
Using the key pad, the lower display will allow the
operator to select one of following displays:
Ground Speed Display (Speedometer)
The Ground speed (5) and the MPH or km/h legend
(6) will be displayed when the tractor is moving.
Switching between MPH or km/h is covered within
EIC programming in this section. When the display
is set to another mode the ground speed may be
recalled at any time by touching the GROUND SPEED
button (7).

F3-43

NOTE: The speedometer senses rotation of the rear
axle and may be subject to errors caused by the effects
of wheel slip, tire pressures/condition, etc. If the
optional radar sensor is installed, the tractor senses
true ground speed for greater measurement accuracy.
NOTE: The lower central display will automatically
show ground speed if the tractor is traveling at more
than 20 km/h (12.4 MPH ).

Engine Hour Meter

When the KEY-START switch is turned on, the LCD
will display the hours the engine has operated (8) and
the hour meter symbol (9).
Driving the tractor will cause the display to change
automatically to ground speed. The hour meter display
may be recalled at any time by touching ENGINE
HOUR button (10).
With the engine running, the hour meter will
accumulate hours in increments of 0.1 hours until
1999.9 hours are reached. After that time, the hour
meter will accumulate complete hours only, e.g. 2000,
2001 hours, etc.

F3-46

NOTE: Accumulated hours are stored in the computer
permanent memory which is not affected by
disconnecting the tractor batteries.
The hour meter may be programmed to remind the
operator when the next scheduled service is due.

Service Alert
When a Service Alert is reached, the word “SERVICE”
(11) will flash along with the selected display. See
“Setting the service alert intervals” on page 3-41.

435/485/535

3-35
Section 3 - Operation
Electronic Instrument Cluster - EIC
Timed Exit
The Timed Exit feature enables the worklights and
headlights to be set to remain on for a period of time
after the tractor has been switched off.
The TIMED EXIT button (1) is used to set up the
exit timer. Pressing the switch once will temporarily
display the status of the timer in the lower section
of the central LCD panel. Pressing the TIMED EXIT
button while the status is displayed will cycle forward
through each of the possible timer settings. The timer
may be set in 10-second increments up to a maximum
of 60. When the timer is set to zero, the display will
show “OFF.”
When the key switch is turned off, the worklights and
headlights will stay on for the specified number of
seconds.

A “Timed Exit” status light (2) illuminates whenever
the timer is set.

Panel Dim
The PANEL DIM button (3) controls the brightness of
the EIC backlight and the warning lights.
The EIC maintains four brightness settings:
1. Daytime Dim
2. Daytime Bright
3. Night Dim

4. Night Bright
Pressing the PANEL DIM (3) button toggles between
“Bright” and “Dim” settings. When the headlight/
worklight rotary switch is in the “OFF” position, The
“Daytime” settings are active. With the headlight/
worklight rotary switch “ON” the “Night” settings are
active.
The brightness of the active set-point can be set to any
level between 1 (dim) and 11 (brightest). To increase/
decrease the brightness level, hold down the PANEL
DIM switch (3) while pressing the UP arrow button
(4). To decrease the brightness level, hold down the
PANEL DIM button (3) and press the DOWN arrow
button. Each time the arrow button is pressed, the
brightness will increase or decrease by one level. All
four settings will be saved when the key is turned off.

435/485/535

3-36
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)

EIC Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)
Introduction
The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) is located in
the lower right-hand corner of the EIC display.
The monitor is controlled by eleven touch sensitive
buttons as detailed.
The following information can be accessed by toggling
the select button (1) together with the arrow buttons
(2) to obtain the required display. Shortcut display
button (3), where available, can also be used.
Diagram (F3-53) shows an overview of the display
navigation.

DISTANCE

SELECT

DIST

AREA

AREA
HOUR

AREA

% SLIP

%SLIP

FUEL

F3-47

PTO RPM

CABIN
TEMP

HOUR

VOLTS

PTO

AREA

F3-53

Selectable Display Information
• Distance measurement in feet or meters

• Fuel per area

• Area per hour forecaster (acres or hectares)

• Cabin temperature

• Area accumulated (acres or hectares)

• Battery voltage

• Wheel slip percentage with adjustable alarm
point (optional feature)

• PTO speed (optional)

• Fuel per hour

435/485/535

3-37
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)
Selectable Display Information

The following information may be selected for
display:

1
AREA

Area Per Hour Forecaster
(see page 3-43 for calibration)

DISTANCE

Area Per Hour Forecast is displayed by pressing the
AREA button (1) or toggling the SELECT button. The
“AREA/HOUR” legend (2) will display, together with a
forecast of the area that will be worked in one hour (3)
if the current rate of work is continued.

AREA

PTO RPM

START
STOP

HOUR
SELECT

This forecast is based on the last 5 seconds running
average. The forecast may be in acres (FT) (4) or
hectares (METERS).

SPEED

The unit of measure can be changed between FT/
METER. See “EIC programming” in this section.

% SLIP

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per
hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by wheel slip that may
be present.

F3-48

Area Accumulator (see page 3-43 for calibration)
Accumulated area (total area worked) (5) is displayed
by depressing the AREA button (1) until “AREA” and
“ON” (6) will be displayed. Area is displayed in acres
or hectares. Touch the START/STOP button (7) and
the word “OFF” (8) will display indicating the area
counter is shut off. Toggle between Area Per Hour and
Area Accumulator by pressing AREA button (1)
NOTE: A remote implement status switch
P/N: 9702509, can also be added to the tractor, by
the use of a harness located under the rear frame next
to the trailer plug. RF049B (green wire) and RF144
(black wire) (9). If extra length is needed a harness
can be purchased from you Local Buhler Versatile
dealer: P/N 86034242. In order for the harness to
work, the wire located on the tractor trailer plug pin
4 must be disconnected and the expose wire covered
with electrical tape. The green wire RF049C must be
installed into pin 4 of the tractor trailer socket. By
adding a contact switch to a trailing implement, the
area counter can be turned on and off by lowering and
raising the implement.
English display (acres), designated by “FT” legend
(10) starts to accumulate in increments of 0.1 acres.
When 1000 acres are reached, area accumulation
continues in whole acres. When 9999 acres are
reached, the display will reset to zero.

F3-136

AREA

DISTANCE

AREA ON

PTO RPM

START
STOP

OFF
SELECT

SPEED

% SLIP

F3-49

435/485/535

3-38
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)
Metric display (hectares), designated by METERS
legend starts to accumulate in increments of .01
hectares. When 100.0 hectares are reached, area
accumulation continues in increments of 0.1
hectares until 1000 is reached. The display will then
accumulate whole hectares. When 9999 hectares are
reached, the display will reset to zero.
With AREA selected, area accumulation can be reset
to zero by holding down the START/STOP button for
three seconds until a “beep” is heard from the audible
alarm.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area
calculations are based on axle speed and are subject
to inaccuracies caused by wheel slip that may be
present.
Wheel Slip (with Radar Option)
Touch the % SLIP selector button (1). The “% SLIP”
legend (2) will display together with a two-digit slip
value (3) in the main TPM display. The slip value
is detected by the comparison of theoretical ground
speed (axle rotation sensor) with true ground speed
(radar sensor).

AREA

PTO RPM

3
DISTANCE

START

%SLIP

STOP

ALARM
SELECT

WARNING: The radar ground speed sensor
emits a low intensity microwave signal
which will not cause any ill effects in
normal use. Although the signal intensity
is low, do not look directly into the face
of the sensor while in operation so as to
avoid eye damage.

SPEED

% SLIP

F3-50

Slip Alarm (with Radar Option)
A slip alarm point may be entered - see “EIC
Programming.” When wheel slip exceeds the value
entered, the alarm will sound for one second. If wheel
slip is selected, the “% SLIP” (2) legend will be
displayed. In addition, the “ALARM” (4) legend will
flash and continue to flash until wheel slip is reduced
below the preset level.

AREA

DISTANCE

435/485/535

START
STOP

SELECT

VOLTS

Battery Voltage
Touch the SELECT button (5) until the “VOLTS”
legend (6) is displayed together with a digital display
of battery voltage (7) to the nearest tenth volt.

PTO RPM

SPEED

% SLIP

F3-51

3-39
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)
Distance Measurement
Touch the SELECT button (1) again and the “DIST
FT” (2) or “DIST METERS” legend will be displayed.
The tractor will now measure distance in feet or
meters. Operate the tractor normally and press the
START/STOP button (3) at the point where distance
measuring is to begin. The “ON” legend (4) will be
displayed along with a digital display of distance
traveled (5). At the end of the distance, again press the
START/STOP button (3). A digital display of distance
traveled (5) in feet or meters will be displayed with the
“OFF” legend (6). If the START/STOP button is again
pressed, additional feet or meters will be added to
the existing measurement. Pressing the START/STOP
button (3) for more than three seconds will zero the
display.

AREA

PTO RPM

DISTANCE

START

STOP

OFF
SELECT

DIST FT

SPEED

% SLIP

F3-52

Cabin Temperature (Optional)

In tractors fitted with the automatic temperature
control system, cabin temperature can be displayed
by depressing the CABIN TEMP button (7) or by
toggling the SELECT button (8). The “Ct” legend (9)
will display, together with temperature reading (10).

10
AREA

DISTANCE

PTO RPM

START
STOP

SELECT

SPEED

% SLIP

F3-54

7
12

Fuel Per Hour
Fuel per hour is displayed by toggling the SELECT
button (11). The FUEL/HOUR legend (12) will display
together with rate of fuel consumption in liters or
gallons per hour (13). (For switching between metric
and imperial see page 3-42).

AREA

DISTANCE

FUEL

AREA

PTO RPM

START
STOP

HOUR
GAL

SELECT

Fuel Per Area
Fuel per area is displayed by selecting fuel per hour
mode and then toggling the UP and DOWN arrow
buttons (14). The fuel per area legend (15) will display
together with the related fuel consumption in liters or
gallons per hour/area.

SPEED

% SLIP

F3-55

435/485/535

3-40
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM)

Fault Codes
In the event that a fault occurs within the tractor
electrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol
“READ YOUR MANUAL,” (1) will flash on and off
and the code will be stored. The tractor is factory set
to display normal TPM functions and to store fault
codes.
To view fault codes as they occur, see “Turning active
fault display on/off” on page 3-42

AREA

PTO RPM

DISTANCE

START
STOP

Fault codes (2) will be displayed as flashing threedigit number preceded by the letter “F.”

2
SPEED

SELECT

% SLIP

The fault code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor
in which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g., short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc.

F3-61

A complete detailed list of fault codes, their cause and
remedy may be seen in “Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Charts.

If necessary, contact your Buhler Versatile authorized
dealer and quote the fault code number.

AREA

Entering Fault Codes (Mode 2)

1. Hold the SELECT button (3) for two seconds

2. The TPM will display “1” (4) and “CAL (5).” Use
the UP/DOWN arrows (6) to change the display (4)
to “2”

SPEED

3. Hold the SELECT button (3) for two seconds to enter
into Mode 2 (Fault Codes)

DISTANCE

PTO RPM

START
STOP

CAL

SELECT

% SLIP

Viewing Fault Codes

Touch the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons (7) to cycle
through stored fault codes. Each fault code will be
displayed along with the number of times the fault
has occurred, the engine hours of the most recent
occurrence, and the position of the fault code in the
stored list.

3
F3-122

The illustration, F3-137 shows a typical fault code
display.
8 - Fault Code, 9 - Item number, 10 - Number
of occurrences, 11 - Engine hours of the last
occurrence.

To Exit Mode 2
Touch the START/STOP (8) button to return to the
calibration menu. Touch the START/STOP button (8)
again to return to normal operation.

435/485/535

F3-137

3-41
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Calibration

EIC Calibration
Electronic Instrument Control System (EIC) Calibration
The EIC system is factory pre-calibrated with the
required operating presets and fault codes, however, it
is necessary to verify Mode 1 calibration settings and
become familiar with the calibration procedure.
To access the Electronic Instrument Control System
for programming and calibration, follow the “Entering
Operator Calibration (Mode 1)”. All programming and
calibration is done with the key switch in the “RUN”
position and the engine off.

Entering Operator Calibration (Mode 1)
1. Hold the SELECT button (1) for two seconds

AREA

2. The TPM will display “1” (2) and “CAL (3).” (If it
does not, use UP and DOWN arrow button (4) to
change the display to “1”)

3. Hold the SELECT button (1) for two seconds to enter
into mode 1 (Operator Calibration)

Without
TPM

With
TPM

Implement width

Slip percent threshold

Service alert/intervals

Area preset

Fault code display on/off

English/Metric units selection

SPEED

START
STOP

CAL

4. Touch the SELECT button (1) to cycle through the
six Operator Calibration screens:
Calibration Screen

DISTANCE

PTO RPM

SELECT

% SLIP

1
F3-122

AREA

PTO RPM

1. Setting the implement width
DISTANCE

The implement width is used in all area calculations
performed by the TPM. It is a measure of the working
width of the implement.

2. Once the implement width has been entered, touch
the SELECT button (1) to confirm the change.

STOP

4
IMP WIDTH CAL

1. Enter the width of the implement. The selected
(flashing) digit (5) can be changed by touching
the UP and DOWN arrow buttons (4). Other digits may
be selected by touching the LEFT and RIGHT arrow
buttons (6).

SPEED

START

SELECT

% SLIP

1
F3-123

435/485/535

3-42
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Calibration
2. Slip percent threshold

On tractors equipped with an optional radar speed
sensor, the slip alarm can be used to notify the
operator whenever the wheel slip percentage is above
a certain threshold.
1. To set the slip alarm threshold, enter the desired
maximum percent slip (1). The selected (flashing)
digit can be changed by touching the UP and
DOWN arrow buttons (2). Other digits may be
selected by touching the LEFT and RIGHT arrow
buttons (3). The alarm can be disabled entirely by
setting the threshold value to zero.

2. Once the desired threshold value has been entered,
touch SELECT button (4) to confirm the change.

4
F3-140

3. Setting the service alert intervals
The two service alert intervals can be used to remind
the operator that regular scheduled maintenance
is required. The service alerts are based on engine
hours. If, for example, a service alert is set to 50
hour intervals, it will become active at 50 hours,
100 hours, 150 hours, etc. Once a service interval
becomes active, the word “SERVICE” (5) will flash in
the lower portion of the central display until the alert
is cleared by the operator.
1. To set a service alert interval, enter the desired
number of hours. The selected (flashing) digit can
be changed by touching the UP and DOWN arrow
buttons (2). Other digits may be selected by touching
the LEFT and RIGHT arrow buttons (3).
2. Once the interval has been entered, touch the
SELECT button (4) to confirm the change.
3. If a service interval is active, the service alert
display will be flashing. Hold the START/STOP
button (6) to clear the alert.

435/485/535

SERVICE

1000
PTO
540
MPH
km/h
F3-125

3-43
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Calibration
4. Setting the area preset
The area accumulator calculates the total area covered
by the tractor. The accumulated area is stored in the
area preset when the tractor is switched off. When the
tractor is started again, area accumulation starts from
the stored preset.

AREA

PTO RPM

DISTANCE

AREA

1. To modify the area preset, enter the desired area.
The selected (flashing) digit (3) can be changed by
touching the UP and DOWN arrow buttons (4) . Other
digits may be selected by touching the LEFT and
RIGHT arrow buttons (5).

START
STOP

4
CAL

SPEED

2. The area preset may be cleared by holding the
START/STOP button (2) for two seconds.

SELECT

% SLIP

3. Once the desired area preset has been entered,
touch the SELECT button (1) to confirm the change.

F3-124

5. Turning active fault display on/off
Whenever a fault is detected by the electrical system,
a fault code is stored in the EIC memory, and the
flashing book icon appears in the TPM display. If
active fault display is turned on the fault code will also
be displayed as a flashing number in the TPM.
1. To toggle active fault display, touch the UP and
DOWN arrow button (4). When active fault display
is on, the display will show “ON” (6) and fault
code. When active fault display is off, the display
will only show “OFF”.

AREA

PTO RPM

DISTANCE

START

STOP

SELECT

SPEED

% SLIP

2. Touch the SELECT button (1) to confirm the
change.

F3-61

6. Selecting between Imperial and Metric units
The EIC can display measurements in either English
(Imperial) units, or in Metric units.
1. To select the desired display units, touch the UP
and DOWN arrow buttons (4). When English units are
selected, the display will show “˚F”, “GAL”, and
“FT”. When Metric units are selected, the display
will show “˚C”, “L”, and “METERS”.
2. Touch the SELECT button (1) to confirm the
change.

AREA

PTO RPM

DISTANCE

START

4
GAL

STOP

CAL

SELECT

SPEED

% SLIP

To exit Mode 1
Touch the START/STOP button (2) to return to
the calibration menu. Touch the START/STOP
button (2) again to return to normal operation.

1
F3-121

435/485/535

3-44
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Calibration
Entering Wheel speed calibration (Mode 20)
A 100 meter (328 ft) track is required to perform
wheel speed calibration.

AREA

DISTANCE

1. Drive tractor to the start of the designated test
area.

PTO RPM

START
STOP

CAL

2. Stop the tractor 10 m before the start line.
3. Press and hold the SELECT button (1) on the Tractor
Performance Monitor (TPM) display for 2 seconds
until TPM displays “1”.

SPEED

SELECT

% SLIP

AD-7

4. Touch the UP arrow button (2) until the TPM
displays “20”.
AREA

DISTANCE

PTO RPM

START
STOP

SELECT

SPEED

% SLIP

AD-8

5. Press and hold the SELECT button (1) on the TPM
for 2 seconds until TPM displays “DIST CAL 0”.

AREA

DISTANCE

PTO RPM

START
STOP

OFF
CAL

SELECT

DIST

SPEED

% SLIP

AD-9

6. Select a low gear and drive the tractor forward.
7. As the tractor crosses the “Start Line” touch the
SELECT button (1) once. The TPM will display
“DIST CAL 1”
8. Continue driving until the tractor reaches the
“Finish Line”.

AREA

DISTANCE

START
STOP

CAL
DIST

SPEED

PTO RPM

% SLIP

SELECT

1
AD-10

435/485/535

3-45
Section 3 - Operation
EIC - Calibration
9. As the tractor crosses the “Finish Line” touch the
SELECT button (1) once. The TPM will display
“DIST CAL 2”.

AREA

DISTANCE

START
STOP

CAL

SELECT

DIST

SPEED

PTO RPM

% SLIP

1
AD-11

10. Touch select button (1) again to save the

calibration. The TPM will display “DIST CAL 3”.

AREA

PTO RPM

11. Touch start/stop button (2) twice to exit mode 20.
12. Drive the tractor around and stop 10 m before the

finish line.

DISTANCE

START
STOP

CAL

SELECT

DIST

SPEED

% SLIP

2
1
AD-12

Distance check
1. Touch the distance button (3) once. If the TPM does
not display “0 meters or feet” hold the start/stop
button (2) for 2 seconds to clear the display.

AREA

2. Select a low gear and drive the tractor forward.

DISTANCE

5. As the tractor crosses the “Start Line” touch
the start/stop (2) button once. The TPM should show
approximately 100 m (+/- 5 m), (328 ft (+/- 15 ft).
If not, re-run distance check.

3
START
STOP

3. As the tractor crosses the “Finish Line” touch
the start/stop (2) button once. The TPM will begin
accumulating distance traveled
4. Continue driving until the tractor reaches the “Start
Line”.

PTO RPM

METERS

SPEED

SELECT

% SLIP

AD-13

435/485/535

3-46
Section 3 - Operation
Right Side Console Controls

Right Side Console Controls
2

Synchromesh Transmission Control Levers

The synchromesh transmission is controlled by two
control levers. Range shift lever (1) and gearshift lever
(2).
The transmission has three forward gears, low, medium,
high and reverse gear controlled by the range shift
lever (1). Within each range, including reverse, there
are four synchronized speeds, 1 to 4, controlled by
gearshift lever (2). The synchronized speeds allow for
easier shifting within each range. This combination
allows for twelve forward speeds and four reverse
speeds.
L

N 4
2

The Powershift transmission control lever (3) is used
to select forward or reverse travel and to change
transmission speeds. Move the lever forward for forward
travel and rearward for reverse travel. A neutral-lock
switch (4) is also fitted to the lever.

The Powershift transmission control lever is also used
to make instantaneous upward or downward speed
changes. Move and then release the lever to the right
for upward changes and to the left for downward
changes. See “Transmission Operation” in this section
for details.

N R
M

Powershift Transmission Control Lever with
Neutral Lock (1407 Twindisc and CAT TA22
Transmission)

NOTE: The control lever may only be moved to the
forward or reverse positions if the neutral lock latch
on the control lever knob is depressed. Neutral may be
selected without depressing the neutral lock latch.

E
UIS
CR

)

5
F3-62

3
4

F
M
R

Hand Throttle Control Lever
The lever (5) controls engine speed. Push forward to
progressively increase engine speed. Pull rearward to
reduce engine speed.

Cigarette lighter
Push the lighter (6) in until it latches. When it pops
out, remove from its socket and return after use.

E
UIS
CR

)

Cup holder
A cup holder (7) is provided for convenience.

F3-65

435/485/535

3-47
Section 3 - Operation
Right Side Console Controls
Cruise Control Operation
Cruise control automatically keeps the engine speed
at a specified RPM. Two switches control cruise
mode operation. The “CRUISE/OFF” switch (1)
enters and exits cruise mode. The “+/- (SET)” switch
(2) adjusts the cruise setting. When cruise mode is
activated, the engine returns to the last cruise
setting, if possible, based on throttle lever position.

N 4
2

E
UIS
CR

PTO Engagement Switch - yellow (optional)

To engage the PTO depress the button (3) in the
center of the PTO engagement switch (4) and pull the
knob upwards. To disengage the PTO, push the knob
down.

)

CAT TA22 Transmission Autoshift Switch
(optional)
Press and release the front/symbol of autoshift
momentary switch (5) to engage the transmission auto
shift. The letter “A” will be displayed in the powershift
display when autoshift is engaged. Press and release
the switch again to disengage the autoshift function.
See page 3-64 for details of operation.

F3-69

R
ON

Differential Lock Switch (optional front & rear)

STOP

Press the front/symbol of differential lock switch
(6) to engage the self-holding differential. The DIFF
LOCK warning light will illuminate on the EIC when
the differential lock is engaged. Press the rear of the
switch to disengage. See page 3-66 for details of
operation. The differential lock will disengage if the
back part of the switch is depressed, if the foot brake
is applied or when ground speeds exceed 16 KPH (10
MPH).

TO
AU

F3-63

Remote Hydraulic Valve Controls - Manual
Note: See “Remote Control Valve Operation” on page
3-74 for details of operation before use.
Up to six remote hydraulic control levers (7) are
located on the right console. These are color-coded to
match the quick couplers at the rear of the tractor.
The levers have four positions: neutral, extend (or
raise), retract (or lower) and float, as indicated by the
decals. When not in use, the levers should be in the
neutral position where they can be locked to prevent
accidental actuation.

R
ON

STOP

Lockout Levers - Manual
Below each control lever is a corresponding lockout
lever (8) to prevent or limit travel of the control lever.
See page 3-75 for details of operation.

F3-66

435/485/535

3-48
Section 3 - Operation
Right Side Console Controls
Hydraulic Flow Controls - Manual
Hydraulic flow to the remote valves 1 to 4 is controlled
by four rotary knob style flow controls (8). Each
knob can be rotated clockwise to increase flow and
counterclockwise to decrease flow.

The knobs are color coded for identification with the
remote valve it controls. See page 3-77 for details of
operation.

F3-64

435/485/535

3-49
Section 3 - Operation
Right Side Console Controls
Remote Hydraulic Valve Control Electro-hydraulic (Optional)

Each lever (3) activates a four position remote electrohydraulic valve. From neutral pull the lever rearward
to the stop for raise. Push forward one position at a
time for neutral, lower and float.
Each lever is color coded for identification with the
remote valve it controls.

N
N

Note: See “Remote Electro-hydraulic Control Valves”
on page 3-83 for details of operation before use.

Electro-hydraulic Engagement Switch (gray)
Depressing button (1) in the center of the engagement
switch (2) while pulling upwards on the knob will
engage the electro-hydraulic controls for the rear
remote valves.
Pushing the knob down will disengage the electrohydraulic controls and all hydraulic flow to the rear
remote valves.
IMPORTANT: The remote valve electro-hydraulic
engagement switch is provided as an isolator stop
switch. It can be used to immediately stop operation
of the rear remote hydraulics by quickly depressing
the knob. The stop switch only controls the remote
valves and has no effect on the three point hitch
link operation, thereby isolating operation of the rear
remote hydraulics from the three point hitch link
operation.

F3-67

Remote Valve Electro-hydraulic Flow Control
Knobs
Each remote valve has a flow control knob (4) to meter
oil flow. The knob controls flow from 4 to 102 L/MIN
(1 to 27 GPM). Turn the knob so the higher vertical
decal stripe is visible to increase the rate of oil flow.
Turn the knob so the lower vertical decal stripe is
visible to decrease the rate of oil flow. See page 3-87
for details of operation before use.

Remote Valve Electro-hydraulic
programmable Operation Switches

Manual/

Each remote valve has a manual/programmable
operation switch (5). When the top of the switch is
activated the lever (3) operates in the manual mode.
When the bottom of the switch is activated the lever
(3) can be operated with a programmed release to
neutral. See page 3-85 for details of operation before
use.

435/485/535

3-50
Section 3 - Operation
Tractor Start-up and Engine Operation

Tractor Start-Up and Engine Operation

WARNING: AVOID POSSIBLE INJURY OR DEATH
FROM A MACHINE RUNAWAY. DO NOT START
THE ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS STARTER
TERMINALS. THE ENGINE CAN START AND THE
MACHINE CAN MOVE WHEN THE STARTING SAFETY
SWITCH IS BYPASSED.

CAUTION: PREVENT INADVERTENT TRACTOR
OR IMPLEMENT MOVEMENT. BE SURE THE
HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVERS ARE IN NEUTRAL
AND THE 3-POINT HITCH IS SET TO THE LOWEST
POSITION PRIOR TO STARTING THE TRACTOR
WHEN ATTACHED TO AN IMPLEMENT.
THE TRACTOR CAN MOVE AS SOON AS THE
ENGINE IS STARTED BY TURNING THE STEERING
WHEEL, EVEN WITH THE PARK BRAKE ENGAGED
AND THE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL. BE SURE
ALL PERSONNEL ARE CLEAR OF THE TRACTOR
BEFORE STARTING.

Engine Starting
IMPORTANT: Protect the turbocharger during startup by not opening the throttle or accelerating above
1000 RPM until the engine oil bar graph reads in the
normal range.
Avoid excessive engine speed during warm-up.
1. Fasten your seat belt.
2. Put the transmission in neutral.
3.

On tractors equipped with a PTO, put the switch to
the “OFF” position. A safety switch on PTOequipped models permits engine starting only
when the PTO is off.

4. Engage the park brake.
5. Check to be sure that the remote hydraulic levers

are in the neutral position.
6. On tractors equipped with a 3-point hitch, make

sure that the hitch controls are set to the lowest

position.
7. Set the engine throttle to the lowest position.
8. Turn the ignition to “RUN” to activate the electrical

accessories. Observe the warning lamps to be sure

they are functioning.

Prestart Inspection

9. Engage the clutch pedal

Do the following before starting the engine each day:

10. Turn the ignition to the “START” position to crank

the engine, and release when the engine starts.

1. Check the engine oil level and adjust, if
necessary.
2. Check the coolant level and adjust, if necessary.
3. Check and clean the radiator and grill for dirt and
debris, if required.
4. Check the transmission and hydraulic oil tank
levels and adjust, if necessary.
6. Check differential oil levels.

The switch has a starter protection feature built-in.
If the switch is rotated to the start position, and
then released to the run position, it will be
necessary to rotate the switch to the stop position in
order to make another attempt to start the tractor.
This will prevent an accidental engagement of
the engine starter motor when the engine is already
running.

7. Inspect the condition of all belts, lights, switches,
hoses, lines, fittings, seals, tires, nuts and bolts.
Replace or tighten, if required.

IMPORTANT: To prevent starter motor damage, never
crank the engine for more than 30 seconds. If the
engine does not start within 30 seconds, wait 2
minutes to cool the starter motor before recranking.

8. Check the drawbar and 3-point hitch for wear,
especially around metal-to-metal contact parts.

11. Once the engine has started, allow it to idle

and warm up before adding a working load.

9. Check wheel bolt torques.

IMPORTANT: Pay attention to the warning light bar
and electronic monitor for any indication of a problem.
Stop the tractor immediately and investigate the
problem.

435/485/535

3-51
Section 3 - Operation
Cold Weather Starting
Cold-Weather Starting
The ether cold starting aid may be used to assist
the engine starting in temperatures at or below 0°C
(32°F).

LOWER
HEAD

UPPER

OFF

CAUTION: STARTING FLUID IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
DO NOT USE NEAR FIRE, SPARKS, OR FLAMES. BE
SURE ALL OPERATORS READ THE CAUTIONARY
INFORMATION ON CONTAINERS.
NOTE: The vehicles electronic control system prevents
ether from being injected into the engine if the engine
coolant temperature is above 27˚ C (80˚ F).
After following steps 1 to 10 under “Engine Starting,”
proceed as follows:
1. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds
of cranking, depress the ether aid button (1) for
two seconds while the engine is cranking to inject
starting fluid and then release. If the engine does
not start after 15 more seconds, release the
ignition switch. Allow the starter motor to cool
down for two minutes, and repeat the procedure.
NOTE: The ether injection function only operates
while the start motor is cranking the engine.

ETHER

F3-17

IMPORTANT: Pay attention to the warning light bar
and electronic monitor for any indication of a problem.
Stop the tractor immediately and investigate the
problem.
NOTE: If the engine fails to start after three attempts,
use a block heater or other means to warm the
engine.

IMPORTANT: Use only one starting fluid charge per
engine crank cycle of 30 seconds. Never hold the
button longer than 5 seconds, as damage to the
electric solenoid valve may result.
2. If, after the engine starts, it runs roughly while at
low idle with an outside ambient temperature
below 0° C (32° F), it is permissible to press the
cold start button and inject an additional amount
of starting fluid into the engine to aid in engine
warm-up.
NOTE: The cold start system injects a 4.8 cc metered
shot of starting fluid into the engine with each
depression of the switch.
ATTENTION: Use a maximum of three injections of
starting fluid into the engine for initial start-up and
engine warm-up. If the engine will not start or will not
smooth out, shut the tractor off and investigate the
cause. See “Engine Troubleshooting” in Section 4 of
this manual.
3. Once the engine has started, allow it to warm up
before putting it under load.

435/485/535

3-52
Section 3 - Operation
Cold Weather Starting
Engine Block Heater
Block heaters are standard equipment on Buhler
Versatile tractors. The block heater cord (1) is
located on the right side of the engine beneath the
turbocharger.
A 3-wire 15-amp extension cord is required to
connect the block heater to a grounded 115-volt
electrical outlet.

WARNING: TO AVOID SHOCKS OR OTHER INJURIES,
NEVER USE AN UNGROUNDED OR INADEQUATE
EXTENSION CORD. ALWAYS USE A GROUNDED
3-WIRE EXTENSION CORD WITH A 3-WIRE PLUG
WHICH IS RATED FOR AT LEAST A 15-AMPERE
LOAD, AND PROTECTED BY A SUITABLE FUSE OR
CIRCUIT BREAKER.
To operate the heater, plug the heater cord in for at
least four hours before attempting to start the engine.
Maximum starting ability is usually obtained after four
hours of heater operation.
Disconnect the cord when the engine has started.
Make sure that the cable is safely secured after use.

WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD! BE
SURE CORDS ARE PROPERLY GROUNDED. DO NOT
HANDLE IF WET. DO NOT PLUG THE HEATER IN IF
NOT IMMERSED IN COOLANT, IT MAY OVERHEAT
AND BURST CAUSING INJURY.

435/485/535

F3-68

3-53
Section 3 - Operation
Tractor Boosting Procedure
Tractor Boosting

Connection Procedure
1. Set the park brake, put the transmission in neutral,
PTO clutch control and all accessories OFF.

CAUTION:
WHEN
SERVICING
BATTERIES,
DISCONNECT THE NEGATIVE (BLACK) CABLES
BEFORE THE POSITIVE (RED) CABLES. WHEN
CONNECTING CABLES, CONNECT THE POSITIVE
(RED) CABLE FIRST, THEN THE NEGATIVE (BLACK).
THIS WILL REDUCE THE POSSIBILITY OF SPARKING
AND BATTERY EXPLOSION.

2. Attach one end of the booster cable (red) to the
positive terminal of the booster batteries and the
other end of the same cable (red) to the positive
terminal of the center battery on the tractor.
3. Attach one end of the negative cable (black) to the
negative terminal of the booster battery, and the
other end of the same cable (black) to a ground
on the tractor frame at least 305 mm (12")
from the discharged batteries. DO NOT CONNECT
TO THE NEGATIVE POST OF THE DISCHARGED
BATTERIES.
4. Be sure that the clamps from one cable do not
touch the clamps of the other cable. Do not lean
over the battery when making connections.
5. Start the tractor following normal engine starting
procedures.

THEREFORE, AS A SAFETY PRECAUTION:

6. When the tractor starts, remove the booster cables.
Disconnect the negative cable (black), then the
positive cable (red).

• WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND GOGGLES.

7. If the tractor fails to start, charge the batteries.

• DO NOT SMOKE OR EXPOSE THE BATTERY TO
OPEN FLAME.

The 435, 485 and 535 tractors have three batteries
connected in parallel. Each battery having 950 CCA
(BCI Group 31).

• DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT LIVE
CIRCUITS.
FOLLOW THE
OUTLINED.

CONNECTION

PROCEDURE

435/485/535

3-54
Section 3 - Operation
Tractor Operation

Tractor Operation
Hand Throttle Control Lever

N 4
2

To increase engine speed, move the lever (1) forward
(rabbit). Pulling the lever backward will reduce engine
speed (turtle).
Fuel consumption can be reduced by operating at
lower engine speeds under light load.

The tractor is equipped with a hand throttle, located
on the right console. Rated operating speed is 2100
RPM. Idle speed is 875 RPM. High idle no load speed
is 2225 RPM.

E
UIS
CR

)

F3-69

Decelerator Pedal
At the lower front of the right console is the decelerator
pedal (4) which can be used to reduce engine speed
when turning or while shifting. When fully depressed,
engine speed will drop to 1400 RPM. If the pedal
is not fully depressed, engine speed will be reduced
proportionally. When the pedal is released, engine
speed will return to the previous throttle setting.
IMPORTANT: Do not release the decelerator before
completing the turn. If the transmission is in a high
gear, the tractor will accelerate quickly, reducing the
time to correct tractor direction.

F3-56

Cruise Control Operation
Cruise control automatically keeps the engine speed
at a specified RPM. Two switches control cruise mode
operation. The “CRUISE/OFF” button (2) enters and
exits cruise mode. The “+/–(SET)” button (3) adjusts
the cruise setting.
When cruise mode is activated, the engine returns to
the last cruise setting, if possible, based on throttle
lever position.
The cruise function can be set to any engine RPM
between idle and high idle, but the operating cruise
RPM cannot exceed the RPM set by the hand throttle.
For example, if the cruise setting is 1800 RPM but
the hand throttle is at a normal 1700 RPM position,
cruise will not increase the RPM above 1700 RPM.
Operating cruise RPM always stays about 100 RPM
under the normal throttle RPM setting.
Setting - Move the throttle handle higher than the
desired cruise setting and press the “CRUISE” button
(2) to enter cruise operation.

435/485/535

The engine cruise will not engage unless the throttle
lever is set to a higher operating speed than the cruise
set point. The engine speed will remain at the cruise
setting RPM.
Adjust the cruise setting with the “+/–(SET)” button
(3). Set the cruise mode with the throttle lever at
Full Throttle (throttle lever fully forward) whenever
possible. Cruise function will disengage if the cruise
RPM is set to a value equal to the throttle position
RPM, moving the throttle to a higher position will
return cruise function.
The “+/–(SET)” button will change the setting 10
RPM per momentary push. When the button is held
down, the RPM will continue to move up or down.
However, the dash RPM display will not keep up with
RPM changes when the button is held down. In this
case, it is advisable to estimate the setting by ear, wait
for the dash to catch up, and fine tune the RPM using
momentary pushes.

3-55
Section 3 - Operation
Tractor Operation
It is never possible to set the cruise higher than the
current throttle lever position.
If the last cruise setting was above the throttle position,
the system will remember that cruise setting unless
the “+/–(SET)” button is pressed in cruise mode. The
cruise RPM will return to the stored cruise setting if
the throttle is moved above that RPM.
The electronic system remembers the current cruise
control setting at all times. The cruise setting remains
in memory after the cruise switch is turned off,
after the engine is shut off, or if the batteries are
disconnected.

N 4
2

E
UIS
CR

)

F3-69

Alternate Engine Speed Overrun
The alternative engine speed overrun feature of the
electronic engine controls provide a higher ground
speed when traveling over the road with the tractor.
All QSX 15 engines in 435, 485 and 535 tractors
have a rated engine speed of 2100 RPM. Actual high
idle engine speed, when the throttle lever is placed
in the full forward position, is 2225 +/– 50 RPM.
Overrun of the engine will occur in normal loaded
operating conditions when tractor ground speed is
below approximately 18.5 KPH (11.5 MPH).
In situations where engine load is minimal and
tractor ground speed is high, above 18.5 KPH (above
11.5 MPH), the Electronic Engine Control System
will progress to an alternate engine speed overrun
condition. The full throttle overrun will now be 2350
+/– 50 RPM). An example of this would be a tractor
traveling at 12.9 KPH (8 MPH), over the road, with
the throttle lever fully forward and the cruise switch
in the OFF position. Maximum engine RPM shown on
the EIC of the tractor will be 2225 +/– 50 RPM. If the
transmission is shifted into a higher gear and ground
speed increases above 18.5 KPH (11.5 MPH), the
engine will accelerate to a new higher speed, with the
EIC now displaying a maximum engine speed of 2350
+/– 50 RPM.
If tractor ground speed is reduced below 18.5 KPH
(11.5 MPH), the system will revert to the 6% normal
overrun mode.
IMPORTANT: Loads placed on the engine while roading
(implements, road grade) will affect tractor ground
speed and the alternate speed overrun feature.

F3-56

Deceleration (manual or pedal) - When in cruise mode
and hand throttle (1) moves lower than the cruise
setting, the cruise RPM decreases as well and stays
100 RPM less than the normal RPM for that throttle
position. The RPM will increase back up to the cruise
setting if the throttle handle is moved forward again.
Example: With the throttle handle at Full Throttle,
the cruise is set to 1800 RPM. When the throttle
handle is moved back past the normal 1800 RPM
position, the cruise speed will drop to 1700 RPM and
continue to decrease as the throttle decreases. When
the handle moves back up to full throttle, the cruise
speed increases until it reaches 1800 RPM again.

435/485/535

3-56
Section 3 - Operation
Tractor Operation
Using the deceleration pedal (4) in cruise mode
works the same as moving the throttle handle. If the
decelerator pedal causes the engine speed to decrease
past the cruise setting, the cruise speed will decrease
as well. When the decelerator pedal is released, the
cruise RPM will return to the specified setting. It is not
possible to use the “+” button to increase the cruise
setting higher than the current throttle position.
Exiting Cruise Mode - Pressing the “OFF” button (2)
exits cruise mode and returns to the normal engine
speed for the current throttle position. The cruise
function can be used in this way for two-speed
applications. The throttle position for high speed, the
cruise setting for low speed.

Stopping the Tractor
1. Gradually slow down the tractor. Set the throttle as
low as possible.
2. Disengage the clutch, apply the brake and put the
controls into neutral.
3. Reduce the engine speed to Idle. Run the engine
for 3 to 5 minutes before shutdown to allow the
engine to cool.
4. Shut down the engine and remove the key.
Turn all electrical accessories OFF.
5. Ensure that the parking brake is engaged before
exiting the tractor.

IMPORTANT: If the engine has overheated, allow it
to idle an extended length of time to reduce the
temperature. If the temperature does not return to
normal or the coolant level warning lamp is ON,
shut down the tractor immediately.

CAUTION: KEEP THE CAB FLOOR AREA FREE FROM
DEBRIS OR OBJECTS WHICH MAY OBSTRUCT THE
OPERATION OF THE BRAKE PEDAL. KEEP THE
PEDAL CLEAN AND DRY TO PREVENT YOUR FOOT
FROM SLIPPING OFF THE PEDAL.
DANGER: NEVER LEAVE THE OPERATOR’S SEAT
WITHOUT FIRST BRINGING THE TRACTOR TO A
COMPLETE STOP USING THE FOOT BRAKE, AND
THEN engaging THE PARKing BRAKE.
DANGER: NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR IF THE
FOOT OR PARKing BRAKE DOES NOT FUNCTION
PROPERLY.
DANGER: NEVER RELY SOLELY ON THE
TRANSMISSION TO HOLD THE TRACTOR
STATIONARY WHEN PARKED, ALWAYS engage
THE PARKing BRAKE.

435/485/535

3-57
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation

Transmission Operation
Synchromesh Transmission Operation

Range Shifting

The Synchromesh transmission has three forward
ranges and one reverse range. Within each range,
including reverse, there are four synchronized speeds.
The synchronized speeds allow for easier shifting
within each range. This combination allows for twelve
forward speeds and four reverse speeds.

1. Be sure the engine speed is below 1700 RPM.
Whenever possible, reduce engine speed to idle.

All shifting is done manually, in conjunction with the
clutch. The transmission incorporates a shaft brake,
which is designed to stop transmission rotation when
shifting between ranges. This is activated when the
range lever is in neutral and the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
IMPORTANT: Engage the clutch at a low throttle
setting and as light a draft load as possible to extend
clutch and synchronizer life. Do not engage the clutch
when the throttle is set higher than 1700 RPM while
under load. Raise the implement whenever possible
during shifting.
Use the decelerator pedal to bring the engine speed
down when shifting or engaging the clutch.

2. Depress the clutch fully and bring the tractor to a
complete stop. Place the range shift lever (1) in
neutral. Wait three to four seconds to allow the
transmission to slow down to a near stopped
condition before selecting the desired range. Shift
pattern decals are located behind the shift lever
indicating range position.
3. If you are not able to move to the desired position,
turn the steering wheel to the left or right to allow
gears to mesh.
4. Slowly release the clutch pedal to achieve a smooth
start.
5. Reset the engine speed to operating range.
The range shift decal located in front of the range shift
lever positions for high (H), medium (M), low (L), or
reverse (R) range.

All gears in the transmission are constantly in mesh.
When a range is selected, shift collars splined to the
shafts are being engaged with the range gears. The
tractor must be at full stop in order to shift between
ranges.
The transmission bearings and gears are pressure
lubricated. The lubrication circuit consists of a gear
pump located on and driven by the transmission, an
oil cooler located in front of the engine radiator, a filter
located inside the frame at the front of the tractor, and
the oil distribution manifold on the transmission. The
transmission case acts as a reservoir.

Should the transmission oil pressure warning lamp
come on, (page 3-29) immediately shut down the
tractor and contact your Buhler Versatile dealer to
investigate the cause of lubrication failure.
L

N R
M

CAUTION: KEEP THE CAB FLOOR AREA FREE FROM
DEBRIS OR OBJECTS WHICH MAY OBSTRUCT
THE OPERATION OF THE CLUTCH PEDAL. KEEP
THE PEDAL CLEAN AND DRY TO PREVENT YOUR
FOOT FROM SLIPPING OFF THE PEDAL, CAUSING
ABRUPT ENGAGEMENT.

N 4
2

E
UIS
CR

)

F3-72

435/485/535

3-58
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
Gear Shifting within a Range
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that shifting gears
with the tractor in motion be limited to light draft
or rolling loads and only within a set range. Do not
attempt to shift between ranges without first coming
to a complete stop.

1. Depress the clutch pedal fully.
2. Move the gearshift lever (2) to the required gear.
Shift patterns are located in front of the shift
levers indicating gear position.

NOTE: It is not necessary to reduce engine speed
for shifts within a range, but is recommended to
increase the life of shift components.

3. Release the clutch pedal slowly to insure a smooth
transmission engagement.

NOTE: While it is possible to shift with the tractor
in motion within a range, under heavy loads the
tractor will probably come to an abrupt stop before
the shift is complete. For your safety, it is
recommended that the operator throttle down,
raise any implements, and stop before attempting
any shifts.

Forward/Reverse Shifting
Shuttle shifting should not be attempted between the
forward and reverse ranges while the tractor is still
moving. Harsh transmission engagement will occur as
well as damage to the range shift mechanisms in the
transmission.
1. Bring the tractor to a complete stop before shifting
the range lever.
2. Select the range desired.
3. Release the clutch pedal slowly to achieve a smooth
start.

435/485/535

M R
F3-70

Range shift pattern

1
2

3
4
F3-71

Gear shift pattern

3-59
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission
Operation
The 1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission gears are
constantly in mesh. Gear shifting is done by the use
of eight electronically controlled hydraulic clutches in
the transmission.
There are twelve forward speeds and two reverse
speeds.
Clutch selection is controlled by electric solenoid
valves which direct hydraulic oil to the required
clutches. When the operator selects a gear, an
electronically controlled shift system activates the
solenoids required for the specified gear.
The clutch pedal is used to modulate pressure to
the master clutch allowing the operator to feather
engagement to any of the first seven forward gears or
first reverse gear. Use of the clutch pedal allows for
safe, accurate positioning of the tractor when hitching
up implements or operating in confined spaces.
Optimum inching control, particularly with heavy
loads, is best achieved in lower gears and by reducing
engine RPM.
The transmission controller has built-in error codes
which may appear on the display of the tractor. Refer
to “Transmission Troubleshooting” in Section 5 for an
explanation and possible causes of the error codes.
Transmission Shifting
When the tractor is started, the transmission display
module will display N3 showing that the shifter is in
neutral position and that it is the default 3rd gear
selection. Depressing the clutch pedal with the tractor
stationary will automatically change the transmission
to the first gear setting. By shifting the shift lever
forward the transmission automatically will go to any
gear selected from 1st to 7th gears.

GEAR
F3-77

NOTE: When gears 4 thru 7 are selected, the
programming starts the tractor in 3rd gear and
automatically shifts up to the pre-selected gear.

435/485/535

3-60
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
The 1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission is
operated by a single control lever (1). Because the
transmission has only one control lever, it is extremely
easy to use.
NOTE: The control lever is equipped with a neutral
lock button (2). The control lever may only be moved
to the forward or reverse positions if the neutral lock
button on the control lever knob is depressed. Neutral
may be selected without depressing the neutral lock
button.

1
2

F
M
R

The control lever is used to select forward or reverse
travel and to change transmission speeds. Move
the lever forward for forward travel and rearward for
reverse travel.

E
UIS
CR

IMPORTANT: Shifting the transmission at low throttle
setting and a light draft load will extend clutch life.

The control lever is also used to make instantaneous
upward or downward gear ratio changes. Nudge the
lever to the right for upward changes and to the left for
downward changes. (In this context, “nudge” means
move the lever and then release.)

)

F3-65

Consecutive gear ratio changes may be made, either
by nudging the lever several times or by holding the
lever to the left or right and allowing the transmission
to shift through the gear ratios automatically.
NOTE: Reverse gears are displayed as Rl and R2.
Automatic Range Select

Forward/Reverse Shifting

Depressing the clutch pedal while the tractor is moving
causes a neutral condition, allowing the electronic
control to automatically select a transmission range
matching tractor ground and engine speeds when the
clutch pedal is released. For example, if the tractor is
in ninth gear forward and the operator depresses the
clutch pedal, tractor ground speed will be reduced but
engine RPM will remain the same. The transmission
controller will sense the reduction in ground speed
and automatically shift the transmission down to a
gear that will match the ground speed when the clutch
pedal is released.

The automatic modulation feature of the 1407 Twindisc
Powershift transmission allows the transmission to be
shuttled from a pre-selected forward gear (1st through
7th gear) to R1 using the control lever. Shuttling the
control lever back to forward will return the tractor to
the pre-selected gear up to 7th gear.

If the clutch pedal is held down and the tractor comes
to a rolling stop, the transmission controller will shift
the tractor to first gear.
The transmission will not shift to neutral unless the
control lever is put in the neutral position.

435/485/535

It is not necessary to come to a complete stop for this
shuttle shifting operation.

3-61
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission Operation
Transmission Description
The transmission is a 16 forward and 4 reverse speed
constant mesh countershaft design. It accomplished
this by utilizing five shafts: input, intermediate,
planetary output, transfer gear output, and reverse.
It involves 7 rotating clutch groups (8 with optional
PTO) and 2 stationary clutch groups.
The transmission clutches are controlled by the
transmission control module and the transmission
shifts in response to operator inputs (direction selector
position, upshift/downshift requests, inching pedal
position, autoshift mode, etc). There are two different
modes of normal transmission operation: manual shift
mode and autoshift mode.
Transmission Operation
The TA22 Powershift transmission is operated by a
single control lever (1). Because the transmission has
only one control lever, it is extremely easy to use.
NOTE: The control lever is equipped with a neutral
lock button (2). The control lever may only be moved
to the forward or reverse positions if the neutral lock
button on the control lever knob is depressed. Neutral
may be selected without depressing the neutral lock
button.
The control lever is used to select forward or reverse
travel and to change transmission speeds. Move
the lever forward for forward travel and rearward for
reverse travel.
IMPORTANT: Shifting the transmission at low throttle
setting and a light draft load will extend clutch life.
The control lever is also used to make instantaneous
upward or downward gear ratio changes. Nudge the
lever to the right for upward changes and to the left for
downward changes. (In this context, “nudge” means
move the lever and then release.)

1
2

F
M
R

E
UIS
CR

)

F3-65

435/485/535

3-62
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
Before start up
• Always refer to the Pre-operation Checks and Cab
Features
• Ensure transmission bumpshift lever is in neutral.
• Fully apply parking brake.
• PTO switch is in the disengaged position (Optional
Equipment)
During initial Start up
During power up the transmission control system
initializes and ensures that the machines does not
move until the direction selector is first moved to
or in neutral and then moved to a non-neutral gear.
Following successful completion of all power-up
function, normal operation is established.
In order to optimize cold weather shifting and
inching performance, the transmission automatically
undergoes a clutch cycling function that engages all
the input clutches one at a time to top pressure. By
doing so, the clutch passages of the input clutches
will be purged of air and will enable better shifting and
inching response when cold. This function will only
activate if the transmission hydraulic oil temperature
is below 30°C at the time of startup.
Upon engine startup, this feature will disengage clutch
8 (Neutral Clutch) and engage the input clutches one
at a time. The parking brake must be engaged in order
for this feature to initiate.
The entire cycle should take about 10 seconds after
the start of the function. During this time, slight
periodic engine lug may be noted. This is normal.
If machine movement is desired immediately after
startup, the operator can cancel the cycling feature by
disengaging the parking brake and shift into gear. The
clutch cycling feature will automatically discontinue
and disengage to allow full transmission control to the
operator.
NOTE: Shifting and inching performance in some
gears may not be optimum if the cycling feature is
interrupted.
NOTE: The clutch cycling feature does not initiate if
there are speed sensor or parking brake faults.

435/485/535

Transmission and Parking Brake Operational
Interaction
The transmission shall neutralize whenever the parking
brake is engaged. A SPDT switch in the parking brake
circuit determines parking brake engagement status.
The transmission will not shift into gear unless the
parking brake status is “OFF”.

Cold Temperature Operations
Upon start-up of the transmission, if the transmission
hydraulic oil temperature is below 20°C, all function
associated with inching, auto-modulation, and shuttle
shift will be limited to F1 and R1.
NOTE: Once the target gear (or direction is achieved)
full gear range is available for normal in gear
operation.
NOTE: Once the transmission oil is at or above 20°C,
the cold oil operation function will be disabled. Once
disabled, it will not be re-enabled until the next ECM
power cycle or if the transmission oil temperature
drops below 18°C.

Shift Inhibits
Transmission overspeed protection: If the transmission
controller detects that a downshift will produce speeds
exceeding the established engine overspeed, the shift
will not be performed. The operator must slow down
the machine by decreasing the throttle or apply the
service brakes before the downshift will occur.
NOTE: Engage a suitable low gear before traveling
downhill.

Inching
When the inching pedal is depressed to less than 6% of
pedal travel (0% being fully depressed), the directional
clutch will immediately disengage (note that the clutch
will partially disengage when the pedal is depressed to
about 35% of travel). Releasing the clutch pedal will
proportionally increase the directional clutch pressure
slowly from zero to a predetermined inching pressure.
When the clutch pedal is fully released (greater than
85% of pedal travel), then the clutch pressure will be
automatically modulated to full pressure. Inching is
used for shifts out of neutral or for maneuvering slowly
for implement hookup.

3-63
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
Default gear for launching the machine will be F5 and
R1. Inching will be allowed from F1 to F10 and R1 to
R2 (subject to clutch energy analysis).
CAUTION: Inching time is NOT limited, and thus if
an operator holds the inching pedal below the automodulate threshold, excessive heat can be generated
and clutch damage can occur.

Auto-modulation
This strategy is used to shift the machine out of neutral
to any gear within the max allowed inching gear range.
This feature should be used in loaded conditions to
minimize clutch energies and ensure a smooth shift
out of neutral. Auto-modulation should be used to
launch the machine during normal operation. Only
use the inching method if fine speed control is needed
for maneuvering or implement hook-up.
ATTENTION: Selected Gear will match the Operator
Requested Gear except for when the shifter is in
Neutral. When the shifter is in Neutral, the selected
gear will show what forward gear the operator will get
when the shifter is place in forward.
Shuttle Shifts (Directional Shifts)
Shuttle shift is used to go from forward direction to
reverse, or vise versa, as quickly as possible without
the use of the inching pedal. This is accomplished by
using single clutch shifts. Shuttle shift will be allowed
between F1 and R1, F2 and R1, F3 and R1, F4 to R1,
and F5 to R2 (subject to clutch energy analysis). If a
shuttle shift is initiated from gears above the allowed
gear, the transmission controller will downshift the
transmission to the allowed gear and then initiate the
shuttle shift.
In order to perform a shuttle shift, move the shifter
from the current direction into the opposite direction
quickly and smoothly. The shifter must not linger in
the Neutral position for more than 0.3 seconds. If
the shifter stays in Neutral for more than 0.3 seconds
before being moved to the opposite direction of travel,
then a shift to Neutral will be initiated followed by
an auto-modulation shift into gear. This can cause
undesirable shift harshness and the desired gear may
not be achieved.

Speed Matching
Speed matching will enable the operator to push in
the inching pedal or shift to Neutral while coasting
and have the transmission automatically select a gear
to better match the current machine speed when the
inching pedal is released or the shifter is placed back
into gear. Transmission will speed match from F16
down to default or maximum launch gear for starting
(F10).

Manual Shift Mode
During manual shift operation, the transmission shifts
in response to specific operator actions: moving the
bumpshift lever forward or back for direction change, or
from side to side for upshift or downshift, (gear change)
or depressing the inching pedal (manual modulation
control). The transmission will override the operator
requested gear only when an operator request can not
be accommodated due to performance limitations or
to match the transmission gear to the transmission
input/output speed ratio (speed matching).
There are predetermined delays between upshifts
and downshifts. If rapid upshifts or downshifts are
requested, and if the shifts can not be carried out
in the requested time, the transmission will queue
the requested shifts and upshift or downshift at the
quickest time allowed. This strategy will allow better
shifts by letting the engine speed recover before the
next shift. This will also reduce the risk of engine stall
caused by rapidly upshifting and reduce the risks of
engine overspeed caused by rapidly downshifting.
Queued shifts can be canceled by using the bumpshift
lever to downshift. For example, if the transmission
is in F7 currently and the requested gear is F15, by
moving the bumpshift lever to the left (downshift)
once, the requested gear will become F7.
Queued shifts can also be used in autoshift modes.
When in gear and using the autoshift mode, queued
shifts can be accumulated if rapid upshift or downshift
are requested beyond the established gear limits.

Automatic Shift Mode
During autoshift operation, the transmission upshifts
and downshifts automatically based on the strategy
of the selected autoshift mode but without exceeding
the maximum requested gear.

435/485/535

3-64
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
Autoshift
This auto shift mode can be used to simulate the
functionality of a typical automatic transmission on an
automobile. Machine speed is controlled by throttle
position and load. The transmission will upshift to the
maximum sustainable gear and downshift when load
increases or speed reduction is requested.

TO
AU

Autoshift mode can be used to achieve the maximum
performance of the machine. If the load to the
machine increases and the engine is lugged down
below the optimum operating point in any gear, the
transmission will automatically downshift to provide
optimum performance. When the load condition has
passed, the transmission will automatically upshift to
maximize speed and output of the machine.
Transmission shift points are determined
transmission output speed (engine speed).

F3-139

Once in autoshift mode, selecting a certain gear
using the shifter will set the maximum gear that the
transmission can operate up to. For instance, if the
operator upshifts to F12, then the machine will only
shift up to F12, even if it is capable of operating in
gears above F12. Similarly, if the max gear is set at
F12 and the machine is loaded and only capable of
operating in F9, then it will stay in F9 until the load
condition has subsided.

GEAR
F3-138

Rules of Operation
During autoshift, all manual upshifts and downshift
requests using the bumpshift lever to upshift /
downshift will be utilized to change the max gear
limit. All shifts will be performed automatically based
to autoshift shift points.

NOTE: The autoshift mode is meant to operate with
the throttle set to full. If operating at part throttle,
the machine may not upshift because the upshift
point might not be reached at part throttle conditions.
Similarly, if the throttle is lowered to the point where
the downshift point is reached, it will downshift even
if the machine is not loaded.

During autoshift, if the inching pedal is pressed or if
the shifter is placed into Neutral, the function will be
terminated immediately.
•

Upon inching pedal release or placing the shifter
back into gear, gear selection will be based upon
the selection made by the Speed Matching
function.

Autoshift Enable and Termination
The autoshift mode will be engaged through the use
of the momentary SPDT auto function switch (1).
Press and release the front/symbol of the switch to
engage autoshift. Press and release the switch again
to disengage the autoshift function. The letter “A”
will be displayed in the powershift display (2) when
autoshift is engaged.

•

If the inching pedal was pressed down or the
shifter placed into Neutral while operating in a gear
that is at or above the max allowed launch gear, and
if the tractor coasted to slow speeds or stop, unless
changed by the operator while the inching pedal is
down or in Neutral, the max allowed start gear will
be used to launch the machine.

Once engaged, the transmission enters autoshift mode
between F1 and the max gear limit set to the current
desired gear. The operator is then allowed to upshift or
downshift to change the max gear limit.
When autoshift mode is disengaged through the use of
the auto function switch, the transmission will remain
in the current gear and enter manual shift mode.

435/485/535

• Otherwise, the gear previously operated in that is
below the max allowed launch gear will be used.
• The transmission will not resume autoshift mode
until the operator request the activation autoshift
through the auto function switch.
•

If a shuttle shift is attempted while in autoshift,
the shuttle shift will be initiated through the normal
shuttle shift routine and autoshift will be
disabled.

3-65
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
If the machine is operating at the max gear limit
and the operator manually request a downshift,
the transmission controller will downshift the
transmission as long as the downshift will not cause
engine overspeed, even when the downshift point is
not satisfied.
Inching Pedal Calibration

Diagnostic/Protection Mode
In the event that the transmission controls detect a
malfunction, an operator warning is generated while
action is taken to minimize damage to the machine.
The response strategy when a solenoid or machine
function error occurs is to keep the machine in the
current operating condition if possible.

To ensure the proper operation of the inching pedal
and to prevent false diagnostics at machine start-up,
an inching pedal calibration is required during the
initial factory startup of the machine.

If a fault occurs that prevents further operation in
the current gear, then the transmission will shift into
neutral immediately.

In order to perform the inching pedal calibration, use
the following steps:

Advanced Default Mode (Limp Home/Default Mode)

• Turn the key switch to “OFF”.
• Place shifter in Neutral and the inching pedal is in
the fully released position.
• Turn key to ON position and wait until the machine
display is running normally.
• Acknowledge and troubleshoot any faults that are
displayed (make sure no faults exist for the inching
pedal sensor and limit switch).
•

Without performing any other functions, depress
fully (and hold for minimum of 1 second) and
release fully the inching pedal four times in a row.
(Note that the limit switch must toggle with the
inching pedal firmly depressed).

• Note any fault conditions on the machine display.
•

By the fourth pedal press, a message should appear
on the display indicating a successful inching pedal
calibration. If a successful inching pedal calibration
does not show up on the display, check for
diagnostics on the inching pedal sensor and switch
and verify the sensor and switch are working
properly.

•

If fault conditions exist involving the inching pedal
sensor or switch, follow troubleshooting guides
to resolve the fault conditions. Perform the inching
pedal calibration once the faults has been
resolved.

If the transmission is shifted to neutral due to fault
conditions (either by the operator or the transmission
controller), further operation in gears up to F6 (if
available) will be allowed. Shifts out of Neutral up to
F6 can be initiated. If requested gear is not available
the highest available gear less than the requested gear
will be engaged.
If a short to battery fault occurs on clutches 1, 2, 3,
4, 8, or 9, and if the transmission shifts into Neutral
(either requested by operator or the transmission
controller), the transmission will remain in Neutral
until corrective action has been taken to clear the
fault. Default Mode cannot be initiated during these
clutch faults due to the lack of modulation profile
for the output clutches (lack of adequate lube for
modulation).
NOTE: If a solenoid fault occurs in gears above F6,
the transmission will be allowed to maintain gears
above F6 if possible, but once shifted below F6 or
into Neutral, the F6 limit will apply.
NOTE: The Advanced Default Mode will be incorporated
in the software only. Loss of power to the ECM will
result in all solenoids de-energizing.

NOTE: The calibration can be performed whenever the
machine is powered up, but is not necessary every time
since the calibration values are stored into permanent
memory in the transmission ECM. The inching pedal
calibration is required if hardware adjustments or
replacements are made to the inching pedal assembly
items (pedal linkage, sensor, switch, etc.)

435/485/535

3-66
Section 3 - Operation
Transmission Operation
Differential Lock (optional front & rear)
The tractor may be factory equipped with an
electronically controlled front and rear axle differential
lock. This will provide additional tractive effort on
hillsides or wet ground. The switch (1) is a three
position momentary switch located on the right
console. To activate, push and hold for two seconds the
front of the switch. An indicator light will illuminate
on EIC (2). The differential lock can be locked when
the tractor is moving or stopped.

1
F3-73

IMPORTANT: Do not engage the differential lock when
the tractor wheels are spinning or when the wheels are
turning at different speeds, such as an end of the field
turn. Drivetrain damage may result.
To disengage the differential lock, push the rear of the
switch down until the indicator light on the EIC turns
off. Depressing the brake pedal will also disengage the
differential lock.
Disengage the differential lock when not required, such
as during high speeds and road travel, turning and
parking, or when additional traction is not needed.

2
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
WHEN DRIVING THE TRACTOR ON ROADS OR
STEERING MAY BE IMPAIRED.
F3-35

435/485/535

3-67
Section 3 - Operation
Drawbar Assembly

Drawbar Operation

The drawbar height is fixed and must not be altered.
It is designed to produce maximum traction for the
wheelbase, tire size, weight distribution and ballast of
the tractor. The drawbar length is non adjustable.
The drawbar is free-swinging and should be positioned
for the best performance and the least side draft.
There are five drawbar positions available. To swing
the drawbar, pull the hairpin clips (1) from the wear
blocks (2). Remove the wear blocks, swing the drawbar
to the desired position and reinstall the wear blocks.
Choose a position that is right for the job and insert
the pin and wear block in that position to keep the
drawbar from moving.
It is recommended that the drawbar be pinned in
position at all times. On occasion, it may be necessary
to allow the drawbar to swing freely for implements
that place side loads on the rear of the tractor. The
drawbar can be used in a swinging application but
may require replacement of the drawbar wear block
after extended use.

2
F3-75

Clevis-type implement hitches should be connected
only to the lower plate of the drawbar. Other hitches
should be connected between the plates as shown on
the decal on top of the drawbar wear block.

Automatic Hitch Pin

The drawbar is equipped with a hitch pin that will
automatically drop in place when hitching up to
implements.
To operate, place the hitch pin (3) in the raised
position. Retaining ring (4) fits in the upper notch (5)
of the clevis to hold the hitch pin in the raise position.
Release strap (6) must be positioned in front of the
retaining ring as shown. The drawbar is now prepared
to hitch to the implement.

F3-76

When backing the tractor to attach the implement,
the implement hitch will contact the release strap
(6) when aligning the drawbar. As the release strap
is pushed forward it dislodges the retaining ring (4).
Hitch pin (2) will drop as the retaining ring (4) slides
down the incline (7) on the front of the clevis. The
implement is now attached to the tractor without
requiring the operator to leave the cab of the tractor.

435/485/535

3-68
Section 3 - Operation
Drawbar Assembly

4
WARNING: NEVER ALLOW ANYONE TO STAND
BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT WHILE
BACKING THE TRACTOR TO THE IMPLEMENT.
ALWAYS BRING THE TRACTOR TO A COMPLETE
STOP Place the shift levers in neutral AND
ENGAGE THE PARKING BRAKE BEFORE ALLOWING
ANYONE BEHIND THE TRACTOR TO HITCH THE
IMPLEMENT.
After the hitch pin (3) drops into place, retaining ring
(4) locks into the lower notch (7) of the clevis preventing
the hitch pin from inadvertently unhitching.
IMPORTANT: Always install a safety retaining pin in
the hitch pin (8) to secure the hitch pin and prevent
any accidental unhitching of the implement.
To manually unhitch the implement, first pivot the
retaining ring (4) up away from notch (7) then pull the
hitch pin from the clevis.

F3-74

The vertical load on the drawbar must be considered
as ballast and added to the weight of the tractor.
Do not exceed the maximum operating weight of the
tractor.

WARNING: ALWAYS SECURE THE DRAWBAR TO
PREVENT SWINGING WHEN TRANSPORTING
EQUIPMENT
OR
WHEN
OPERATING
ANY EQUIPMENT EXCEPT GROUND ENGAGING
EQUIPMENT.

38.1 mm (1-1/2”) Drawbar Pin Conversion Kit
A 38.1 mm (1-1/2") drawbar pin conversion kit
is available from your Buhler Versatile dealer,
P/N: 86030679 (Automatic). This kit allows the
existing drawbar pin to be replaced with a 38.1 mm
(1-1/2") diameter pin to fit implements with 38.1 mm
(1-1/2") tongue holes.

Drawbar Loading
The maximum recommended weight that can be
carried on the drawbar is as follows:
Max. Vertical Load 4535 kg (10,000 lbs.)
IMPORTANT: Loads on the drawbar increase greatly
when traveling in rough conditions. Reduce speed
to reduce the possibility of damage to the tractor or
implement.

435/485/535

F3-80

3-69
Section 3 - Operation
Drawbar Assembly
Implement Safety Chains
Implements that have safety chains can be attached to
the tractor using the tie-down slots (1) and the chain
slot (2) on the drawbar and drawbar cage. Make sure
the chain has enough slack in it to allow the tractor to
turn and not restrict implement turning.
The safety chain should be strong enough to carry
the gross weight of the implement to be towed by the
tractor. Check the implement operator’s manual for
weight and safety chain attachment instructions.
Your Buhler Versatile dealer can assist in properly
attaching safety chains to the tractor.

Implement Transport
Use the following precautions when attaching and
towing implements with the tractor:

F3-78

• Hook equipment to the drawbar only.
• Be sure that the drawbar is locked in position with
the side wear blocks to keep it from swinging side
to side.
• When transporting implements on the highway,
place the drawbar in the center position to stabilize
the tractor and towed implement.
• Use the drawbar pin retainer on the drawbar at all
times to prevent the equipment from unhitching
from the tractor.
•

Use safety chains from the drawbar and drawbar
cage to the implement when on public roads to
prevent the equipment from rolling into oncoming
traffic or ditches should the hitch pin be lost.

• Use a safe towing speed as specified by the
implement manufacturer.
• Use safety warning equipment as required by law.

CAUTION: WHEN TOWING LOADS OR IMPLEMENTS
ABOVE 16 KM/H (10 MPH), THE TOWED IMPLEMENT
MUST NOT EXCEED THE WEIGHT OF THE
TRACTOR, UNLESS THE IMPLEMENT IS EQUIPPED
WITH BRAKES. IF EQUIPPED WITH BRAKES, THE
IMPLEMENT WEIGHT MUST NOT EXCEED 2 TIMES
THE TRACTOR WEIGHT.

435/485/535

3-70
Section 3 - Operation
External lighting

External Lighting
Your tractor is equipped with external lighting for
safety and night time/low light operation.
Lighting is controlled by the master light switch (1).
A functional description of the master light switch can
be found on page 3-19.

5
2

6
3

Illustration F3-82 shows the location of the following
external lighting:
Road lights (2) (high/low beam) x 2

Lower work lights (3&4) x 8
Upper work lights (5) x 4 (optional)
Signal/hazard lights (6) x 4
Tail/brake/signal lights (7) x 2
Extremity/signal (8) x 2
Extendable extremity lights (8), located in the front
fender are utilized when the tractor is configured with
dual and triple tires.

6
7

To adjust, release the two locking bolts (9) and extend
the lights to cover the full width of the tires. Lock in
place by tightening bolts.
HID-Xenon work lamps located in position (4) are either
factory fitted or are available from your authorized
Buhler Versatile dealer. These lamps provide a more
natural light output 2.5 times greater than standard
halogen bulbs.

F3-82

C
B
A

D
ER
LOW

R
UPPE

HEA

OFF

F3-83

F3-81

435/485/535

3-71
Section 3 - Operation
External lighting
Trailer Socket
The trailer socket is attached to the hydraulic remote
coupler bracket at the rear of the tractor.
It is a seven-pin connector that can be used for a
trailer light hookup or as an outlet to attach an optional
implement status switch.
The pins in the socket are identified as follows:
Pin 1 - Ground
Pin 2 - Work lamps
Pin 3 - Left flasher
Pin 4 - Stop lamps

F3-84

Pin 5 - Right flasher
Pin 6 - Tail lamps
Pin 7 - Auxiliary (key switched 12 volt source protected
by a 20 amp fuse)

1
2

There is a male connector available through your
Buhler Versatile dealer, (BVI p/n: 59624), that can be
purchased to accommodate trailer wire harnesses.

5
4

F3-85

Toolbox/storage tray
A toolbox/storage tray is located on the left front frame
of the tractor. The toolbox lid will accommodate a
lock.

F3-116

435/485/535

3-72
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic System Overview

Hydraulic System
The tractor comes equipped with either a standard
manual hydraulic or the optional electro-hydraulic
(EHR) system. The system consists of a hydraulic
reservoir, a load-sensing variable-flow hydraulic
pump, an implement valve assembly with flow control
capability, quick couplers, a filter and oil coolers as
standard equipment.
A master control valve provides priority flow for
steering and excess flow to the implement valve.
A closed center steering motor receives priority flow
which feeds the steering cylinders.

Hydraulic Quick Couplers
Tractors with manual hydraulics are equipped with
four or six remote couplers. Tractors with optional
electro-hydraulics (EHR) are equipped with four, six
or eight couplers.
Each remote coupler is color coded with it’s
corresponding control lever.

8
7

Pump 3

From bottom to top:
1. Control lever 1 (Green) with load check
2. Control lever 2 (Blue) with load check
3. Control lever 3 (Brown)
4. Control lever 4 (Gray)
5. Control lever 5 (Black)
6. Control lever 6 (White)
7. Control lever 7 (Purple)
8. Control lever 8 (Lime)
Load checks are installed in the “extend” port of the
lower two control valves 1 and 2.

435/485/535

5
4

Pump 2

3
2
1

Pump 1

F3-117

3-73
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic System Overview

High pressure - flow

Transmission Cooler

Low pressure - return

Manifold Block
with Cooler Bypass,
Check Valves &
Supercharge Check

Hydraulic Cooler

Master Control
Block with
Steering & Brake
priority

113 L / 30 Gal.
Hydraulic Reservoir

Piston Piston
Pump 1 Pump 2

Trailer Brake
Valve (optional)

Engine

Trans
Filter
Standard
Filter
3rd Pump
Filter

Brake
Valve
Steering
Valve
Transmission

Piston Pump 3
High Flow option

Gear Pump for
Transmission filtration,
cooling & Lubrication

Gear Pump for
hydraulic filtration,
cooling
& Supercharge

Front Brake
Caliper

Gear Pump for
supercharging
high flow piston
pump & filtration

Rear Brake
Caliper

Trailer Brake
Quick Connector

Case
Drain

Steering
Cylinders

F3-115

Hydraulic System Schematic Diagram
NOTE: some components illustrated above may be optional equipment.

435/485/535

3-74
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
Remote Control Valve Operation - Manual
Up to six remote hydraulic circuits are controlled by
levers located on the right console. These are colorcoded to match the quick couplers at the rear of the
tractor.

The colors are as follows: (from left to right), green (1)
blue (2), tan (3) and gray (4). (Optional - black (5),
white (6).
NOTE: Tractors with manual hydraulics are fitted with
either Standard Flow System (4 or 6 remote valves),
or High Flow System (6 remote valves). See page 3-82
for details.

STOP

F3-86

The levers have four positions: neutral (7), extend
(raise) (8), retract (lower) (9) and float (10) as
indicated by the decals. When not in use, the levers
should be in the neutral position where they can be
locked to prevent accidental actuation.

9
For the extend position, the lever (1) is pulled toward
the operator. This is normally the implement raise
position. An adjustable pressure release detent will
hold the lever in the raised position until the cylinder
reaches the end of its travel, then release to the
neutral position. The lever lockout has no function in
this position.

F3-87

1
435/485/535

F3-91

3-75
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
For the retract position, the lever (1) should be moved
away from the operator one position. An adjustable
pressure detent will hold the control lever in this
position until the cylinder reaches the end of its travel,
then release to the neutral position. To prevent overtravel into the float position, the lockout lever can be
moved to the first (center) position.

1
H

IMPORTANT: Do not manually restrain a lever to
override the detent release for continuous operation or
excessive noise and detent damage may occur.

F3-89

The float position (2) is the position farthest away
from the operator, two detents from neutral.

The float position will be locked out when the lockout
lever is in the first detent and the control lever is
in neutral. Once in the retract or float position, the
lockout lever can be moved to the second detent to
prevent the lever from moving back into the neutral
position for motor operation.

The float position is generally used for implements
that are designed to “float” over the ground during
normal operation. When the remote valve is in the
float position, hydraulic oil on the rod end and piston
end of a cylinder can flow freely from one side of the
cylinder to the other.

F3-90

Lockout Levers
Below each control lever is a corresponding lockout
lever to prevent or limit travel of the control lever. The
lockout lever has three positions.
The rearward position (3) (closest to the operator)
releases the lock and allows full travel to all control
lever positions.

F3-88

435/485/535

3-76
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
The second position (3) prevents the control lever
from entering the float position.

3
The final position (4) has two functions. It will lock the
lever into the neutral position to prevent accidental
actuation of the lever. If the lockout lever is moved to
this position while the control lever is in the retract
position, the control lever is limited to travel between
the float and retract positions. This position can be
used for continuous flow applications.

By limiting the travel of the remote control lever from
returning to the neutral position during continuous
flow applications, the lockout will protect the hydraulic
system from pressure spikes created by hydraulically
driven implements during implement shutdown.
IMPORTANT: When shutting off hydraulically driven
implements, place the remote lever in the float position
to allow the implement to coast to a stop. Shut the
tractor off and place the remote lever in the
neutral position.

435/485/535

F3-92

4
F3-93

3-77
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
Hydraulic Flow Controls - Manual
Hydraulic flow to the remote valves 1 to 4 is controlled
by four rotary knob style flow controls (8). Each
knob can be rotated clockwise to increase flow and
counterclockwise to decrease flow.

The knobs are color coded for identification with the
remote valve it controls.
By pushing the button in the center of the knob (9)
the control knob can be pulled upward or pushed
downward to change the coarse flow control setting.
Each valve spool has a flow control valve to meter oil
flow to that coupler. Flow can range from a minimum
of 11.4 L/min (3 GPM) to full available flow 114L/min
(approximately 28 GPM).

F3-64

NOTE: For tractors equipped with six remote valves,
flow to remote valves 5 & 6 (the top two sections), are
controlled by rotating by hand, the valve flow control
links on the rear of the remote valve manifold (10),
clockwise to decrease flow and counterclockwise to
increase flow.

F3-126

435/485/535

3-78
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
Pressure Release Detent Adjustment

The detent adjustment screw (1) located on the rear of
the valve, may be adjusted to vary the system pressure
required to return each lever to the neutral position.
To adjust, loosen the jam nut and rotate the screw
clockwise to increase the release detent pressure.
A variable pressure flow meter should be used to
slowly raise the system pressure to accurately set
each detent. The adjustment should be made by your
authorized Buhler Versatile dealer.
NOTE: The factory pressure release detent setting is
150 bar (2175 PSI).

WARNING: ONLY ADJUST THE SCREW WHEN THE
REMOTE CONTROL LEVERS ARE IN NEUTRAL AND
THE TRACTOR IS SHUT OFF.

F3-95

Hydraulic Quick Couplers
Each remote valve section has a pair of hydraulic
quick couplers located at the rear of the tractor. These
are color-coded with the hydraulic control levers in
the cab. The couplers are self-sealing and leverless
and require no tools for connecting and disconnecting
hoses. The couplers also permit hoses to detach
themselves from the coupler should an implement
become disconnected from the tractor.

2
3

The left section couplers (2) are identified by an
“extend/raise” symbol on the couplers dust cover and
the right section (3) are identified by a “retract/lower”
symbol on the couplers dust cover.
Excess oil drain hoses (4) are attached to each coupler
to drain away oil released during connection and
separation of the couplers.
The couplers will accept standard (1/2") SAE or ISO
tips. The couplers can be connected or disconnected
under pressure.

F3-96

Coupler Connection
1. To connect couplers, wipe the outside tip of
the coupler to remove any dust and minimize
contamination.
2. Swing the dust cover (5) aside and insert the hose
into the coupler, making sure the hose is properly
seated.

435/485/535

3. Actuate the remote valve to supply hydraulic
pressure which will complete the hydraulic coupling
of the tractor and implement.

3-79
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
To ease removal and installation of the couplers,
relieve the pressure in the system. Securely support
the implement. Make sure no one will be injured by
moving equipment when relieving pressure in the
system. Move the control switch to the float position
with the engine running. This will relieve the pressure.
Turn the engine off with the control switch still in
float. After the engine is shut down return the control
switch to the neutral position. The couplers can now
be connected or disconnected with minimal pressure
and effort.
When using a double-acting cylinder, connect the
supply hose from the cylinder to the extend/raise
coupler (right side) and the return hose to the retract/
lower coupler (left side). To extend a double-acting
cylinder, pull the remote lever rearward to position (1).
To retract the cylinder, push the control lever forward
one position from neutral (2).
When using a single-acting cylinder, connect the
supply line to the right coupler. To extend the cylinder,
pull the remote lever rearward to position (1). To
retract the cylinder, push the control lever forward one
position from neutral (2).
To disconnect the coupler, make sure that the remote
control lever is in the neutral position and the engine
is off. Check to be sure that the implement has its
transport stops in place or is lowered to the ground.

F3-91

2
H

Grasp the coupler tip behind its hose connection and
firmly pull the connector out of the coupler. Replace the
dust cover on the coupler and cover the tip of the hose
with a protective cap to minimize contamination.

F3-89

Bleeding Remote Cylinders
WARNING: HYDRAULIC FLUID ESCAPING UNDER
PRESSURE CAN PENETRATE THE SKIN CAUSING
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. WEAR GLOVES
AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING WHEN SERVICING
HYDRAULICS. BE SURE THAT ALL CONNECTIONS
ARE TIGHT AND HOSES AND LINES ARE
UNDAMAGED.

When connecting a cylinder with trapped air (i.e.,
a new cylinder, one that has been out of service, or
one that has had the hoses disconnected), it will be
necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
With the hoses connected to the remote control valve
couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the cylinder
with the hose end uppermost and extend and retract
the cylinder seven or eight times using the remote
control valve operating lever. Check the hydraulic
tank oil level before and after operating the remote
cylinder.

435/485/535

3-80
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic Equipment

Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (i.e., hydraulic
motors) should be connected as per the table below
depending on the coupler manifold configuration. The
supply hose is connected to the a left coupler and the
return hose is connected to the corresponding right
coupler.
Manual hydraulics

Connect to row

4 to 6 Section

3 to 6

Electro-hydraulic

Connect to row

4 section

6 set (high flow)

4 or 6

8 set (high flow)

5 or 8

(1 starting at the bottom)

Low Pressure Return Circuit
A low pressure return line (1) is installed below the
hydraulic couplers that runs directly back to the
hydraulic reservoir. The low pressure return circuit will
reduce back pressure in the remote hydraulic return
line which will result in more efficient hydraulic motor
operation. The return circuit can also be used in
applications where low return oil pressure is desired
to improve implement operation such as orbit motor
case drain lines.
Connect the return line from the hydraulic motor or
implement to the coupler.
NOTE: Connectors and couplers are available from
your Buhler Versatile authorized dealer.
Use the flow control knobs to regulate the motor
speed. This will ensure that the hydraulic system will
supply only the oil required by the motor. This will
allow higher oil flow reserve for other valve sections
and their oil circuits.
NOTE: Hydraulic motors that are equipped with (1/2")
supply and return hoses, and require less than 10
GPM, can be hooked up directly to the gray couplers.
Hydraulic motors that have (3/4") supply and return
hoses, and require greater than 37.85 L/min (10
GPM), should be hooked up to the optional (3/4")
coupler kit. See “Optional Hydraulic Equipment” later
in this section for more information on this kit.

435/485/535

F3-97

With the remote control valve lever fully forward in
the float position, the motor will be stationary. The
hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is moved to
the retract position. To stop the motor, move the lever
from the retract position to the float position. In the
float position, the motor will be able to stop slowly,
which will not damage the motor. When moving from
the float position to the neutral position, i.e., for road
travelling, move through the retract position quickly to
prevent pressurizing the circuit.
IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow
equipment, the remote control valve lever must not be
moved from the full on position to the neutral or raise
positions as damage to the equipment may result. Use
the lockout levers on the control levers to prevent the
levers from moving to these positions.
Observe the following to further protect the tractor
and equipment:
• Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment or
motor. Use the flow control valve to control the rate
of flow or speed of the motor.
•

Do not hold the remote control valve lever to operate
the equipment. If the detent will not hold the lever
in the retract position, check the equipment for
proper adjustment or contact your dealer for
assistance in adapting the equipment to suit the
tractor.

•

To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate
continuous flow equipment at the highest flow
setting (by use of the flow control valve) and lowest
engine speed that will give the required machine
performance and speed.

3-81
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Manual
Hydraulic Motor Applications
The hydraulic system is a load sensing, pressure and
flow compensating system. Pressure and flow are
regulated by a load sensing line from the implement
valve. For proper and efficient use of the system, low
volume open center hydraulic motors or closed center
system motors with restricting orifices removed and
bypass valve closed should be used. Motor speed
must be regulated with tractor implement valve flow
control rather than bypass valves and orifices at the
motor. This will reduce heat buildup, save oil for other
simultaneous operations of the implement valve, and
increase system reliability.
1. Use hydraulic motors designed for closed center or
pressure/flow load compensating hydraulic systems
only. Do not use a hydraulic motor designed for
open center hydraulic systems unless it is adapted
for use by removing the inlet restrictor.
2. Be sure the hydraulic motor does not have restrictors
in the ports or fittings.
3. Hydraulic motors rated at less than 37.85 L/min
(10 US GPM) may be equipped with 12mm (1/2")
ID hoses and standard (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers.
4. Hydraulic motors rated at greater than 10 US
GPM (37.85 L/min) should be connected with
19 mm (3/4") hoses and (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers
to prevent excessive restriction and heat
generation.

Operating remote equipment simultaneously
or remote equipment and hydraulic lift
simultaneously
NOTE: Hydraulic pump output varies with engine
speed. Oil flow will be relatively constant in the remote
control valve circuits if the flow control valve is used
to provide reduced oil flow, thus providing constant
operating speed for hydraulic motors, etc. even if
engine speed varies. Maintain the engine speed above
the minimum required for simultaneous operation of
all required circuits and vary ground speed by selection
of the appropriate gear ratio.
If operating two or more remote control valves
simultaneously or remote valves and 3-point hitch,
the flow control should be adjusted to provide a partial
flow to each valve circuit. (The hydraulic system of the
tractor is designed to provide adequate oil flow to the
implement valve to satisfy system demand, regardless
of the number of valve sections that are activated
(i.e. running an air seeder fan motor and lifting the
cultivator).
By adjusting the flow control of each valve section,
the system performance will be maximized and will
show up as proper performance of the implement
functions.

Low Pressure Return Circuit - Case Drain
A case drain line (1) is available to connect the return
line from the hydraulic motor or implement to the
coupler. This low pressure return circuit will reduce
back pressure in the remote hydraulic return line which
will result in more efficient hydraulic motor operation.
The return circuit can also be used in applications
where low return oil pressure is desired to improve
implement operation such as orbit motor case drain
lines.
NOTE: Connectors and couplers are available from
your Buhler Versatile authorized dealer.

F3-98

Optional Hydraulic Equipment - 19 mm (3/4")
Coupler Kit
An optional coupler Kit: (BVI P/N: 86033182) is
available for hydraulic motors that require 19 mm
(3/4") couplers. The kit includes supply (2) and return
(3) couplers that are fitted below the main valve
coupler assembly.

435/485/535

3-82
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Remote Control Valve Operation Electro-Hydraulics (EHR) (Optional)
Tractors are equipped with either a Standard Flow
System or High Flow System.

Standard Flow System - 4 to 6 control valves
The standard flow system consists of dual variable
displacement piston pumps located in tandem on
the left side of the engine (1). The Pumps have a
combined rating of 208 L/min (55 GPM). Pump 1
provides priority hydraulic supply to the steering and
braking system followed by remote control valves 1
and 2. Pump 2 supplies remote control valves 3 to 6.

1
F3-103

The remote control valve assembly is divided internally
into two separate systems. One side of the system can
be used for the operation of a high flow/low pressure
requirement and the other side of the system can be
used for a low flow/high pressure requirement such as
found on certain hydraulic driven air seeders.

High Flow System (Optional) - 6 or 8 control
valves
Tractors equipped with the High Flow Plus system have
a supplementary third, piston/gear pump mounted on
the rear of the transmission case (2). The pump is
rated at 95 L/min (25 GPM) providing a total system
rating of 303 L/min (80 GPM).

The high flow system offers increased flow and triple
system capability which will allow for more efficient
operation of large individual hydraulic loads such as
dual orbit motors and remote cylinders.

WARNING: Hydraulic oil escaping under
pressure can penetrate the skin causing
serious injury.
• Use a piece of cardboard or paper, instead of your
hand, to search for leaks.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
connecting or disconnecting lines.
• Tighten all connections before starting the engine
or pressurizing lines.
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
attention immediately or gangrene may result.

435/485/535

F3-104

(Synchromesh transmission shown)

3-83
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Electro-Hydraulic Remote Control Valves
Remote control valves are available to operate external
hydraulic cylinders, motors, etc. The valves are located
at the rear of the tractor.
Tractors with a standard hydraulic system can be
equipped with four or six remote control valves.
Tractors with a high flow hydraulic system can be
equipped with six or eight remote control valves.
NOTE: The total system flow is not available to operate
any one single hydraulic circuit. The maximum
available flow from any one remote valve is 95 ± 8
L/min (25 GPM± 2 GPM).

F3-119

Electro-Hydraulic (EHR) Control Pods

The EHR valves are operated by finger controlled levers
located in the Control Pods (1) (two valves per pod).

Each control lever is identified by a color coded decal
(6) which corresponds with it’s color coded remote
valve.

N
N

The remote valve control levers have four positions:
neutral, extend, retract and float.
Pull the lever back from the neutral position (2) to
the “extend” (raise) position (3). From neutral, push
forward to the “retract” (lower) position (4). Push the
lever fully forward to the float position (5).

F3-108

4
5

F3-105

435/485/535

3-84
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Float will permit the cylinder to extend or retract
allowing equipment such as scraper blades to “float”
or follow the ground contour.
The “float” position is also used for retracting a singleacting cylinder and for the OFF position for hydraulic
motors.
NOTE: Do not hold the lever in the fully extend or
retracted position after a remote cylinder has reached the
end of its stroke. Doing so will overheat the oil and may
lead to failure of hydraulic pump driveline components.

2
3

F3-106

Engagement Switch
The control levers and remote valves will operate only
when the system is activated by the EHR engagement
switch. To activate the EHR system, depress the center
button (7) in the engagement knob (8) and pull the
knob up until it stops, then release the center button
and knob. The EHR system is operational whenever
the engine is running.
To turn off the remote electro-hydraulics, depress the
engagement switch knob (8) as shown.
IMPORTANT: The remote valve EHR engagement
switch is provided as an isolator stop switch. It can be
used to immediately stop operation of the rear remote
hydraulics by quickly depressing the knob. The stop
switch only controls the remote valves and has no
effect on the three point hitch link operation, thereby
isolating operation of the rear remote hydraulics from
the three point hitch link operation.

7
8

STOP

F3-111

STOP

F3-112

435/485/535

3-85
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Manual-Programmable Operation
Rocker switch (1) is used to select either the manual
or programmed operation for each of the remote
control levers.

Manual Operation
Manual operation is provided primarily for the operation
of continuous flow applications, such as hydraulic
motors. To operate the remote EHR valves in manual
mode, depress the top of rocker lever (1) as shown.
In the manual mode, the control lever (2) can be
operated in the four positions, neutral, extend, retract
and float. When the control lever is left in either the
extend, retract or float positions the control lever WILL
NOT automatically return to the neutral position and
shut the flow of oil off to the rear remotes regardless
if the system reaches maximum pressure. The control
lever must MANUALLY be returned to neutral.

1
F3-107

In manual operating mode there is no automatic
return to neutral. This allows for efficient operation
of motors without nuisance shut downs when the
remote valve inadvertently returns to neutral. When
operating hydraulic motors it is important to always
use the RETRACT position to activate the motor and
the FLOAT position to stop the motor. Using the float
position to stop the motor allows the motor to come
to a gradual stop preventing any damage to the motor
itself.
IMPORTANT: Never use the neutral position from the
extend or retract position to stop a hydraulic motor.
Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system can cause
extensive damage to the motor.
IMPORTANT: Do not operate the control levers in
the manual mode when operating remote cylinders.
When the cylinder has reached the end of its stroke
the control lever will not return to neutral and the
hydraulic system relief valve will be activated. This
will overheat the oil and may lead to failure of the
hydraulic and driveline components.
Programmable Operation
Programmable operation is provided primarily for
operation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature allows
the operator to program a time delay between when
the control levers are activated and when they will
automatically return to neutral. To operate the remote
EHR valves in programmed mode, depress the bottom
of rocker switch (1) as shown.

435/485/535

3-86
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
When the bottom of the switch is depressed, light (3)
in the switch will begin to flash. This is an indication
to the operator that a timed sequence must be
programmed into the EHR controller. The light will
continue to flash for ten seconds to allow time for the
operator to begin the programming sequence.
If a program is not started within this ten second
period, the controller will not accept any sequence and
the remote control lever (2) will not remain latched in
either the extend or retract positions.
To program the EHR system, first ensure that the
cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to the
appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor engine
and ensure the EHR engagement switch is up/on.
Set the tractor engine RPM’s at the normal operating
speed in which the cylinder is to be operated. This is
important as the programming of the control levers is
based on a time interval to correspond to the time it
takes the cylinder ram to extend as well as retract. Any
change in engine rpm will have an effect on hydraulic
flow (GPM) and therefore the time it takes the cylinder
to extend and retract. The control lever timed program
always remains the same regardless of oil flow (GPM)
until reprogrammed. Therefore consistent operation is
required for the system to operate correctly. Using the
corresponding color coded programming switch (1)
depress the bottom of the switch so light (3) begins to
flash. While the light is flashing use control lever (2)
to extend the cylinder. As soon as the control lever is
activated the programming light will go on solid. Hold
the lever until the cylinder is extended to the desired
position and then return the lever to the neutral
position. When the lever is returned to the neutral
position the programming light will once again begin
to flash indicating that the retract phase of the cycle
needs to be programmed.
Next use lever (2) to retract the cylinder. As soon as
the lever is activated the programming light will go
on solid. Hold the lever until the cylinder is retracted
to the desired position and then return the lever to
the neutral position. After the second phase has been
completed the programming light will go out indicating
that the programming has been memorized. The lever
timed operation is now programmed for the extend
and retract operation of the cylinder.
Repeat the above sequence to program the remaining
levers.

435/485/535

3
F3-109

Programming of the lever can be performed in either
sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend or one
sequence only, extend or retract. The program for the
individual lever (2) will remain the same even when
the engine is stopped and the ignition switch is in
the off position, as long as the programming switch
(1) remains in the program position as shown. The
maximum allowable time limit for any programmed
timed operation is two minutes.
Programming the lever with the engine and hydraulic
flow off is possible however accuracy of actual operation
will be marginal. Whenever a hydraulic application is
changed, the lever should be reprogrammed to suit
the new operation.
When operating in the timed programmed mode,
feathering of the hydraulic flow is possible by
moving the lever variably anywhere between the
neutral position and the fully opened position.
The timed operation sequence only begins once
the lever has been locked in the fully opened
position.
Should the lever be moved to the float position no
timed program is possible and the lever must be
returned back to neutral manually.

3-87
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Flow Control Adjustment
Each remote valve has a flow control knob (1) to meter
oil flow. The knob controls flow from 4 to 102 L/MIN
(1 to 27 GPM). Turn the knob so the higher vertical
decal stripe (2) is visible to increase the rate of oil
flow. Turn the knob so the lower vertical decal stripe,
(3) is visible to decrease the rate of oil flow.

2
1

WARNING:
Before
connecting
or
disconnecting hydraulic hoses at the
remote cylinders, relieve the pressure
in the circuit by first starting the engine
and then move the control switches fully
forward to the “float” position. Then stop
the engine.

F3-113

Make sure no one will be injured by moving
equipment when relieving pressure in the
system. Before disconnecting cylinders
or equipment, make sure the equipment or
implement is supported securely.
Never work under equipment supported
by a hydraulic device because it may drop
if the control is actuated (even with the
engine stopped) or in the event of hose
failure, etc. always use a secure support
for equipment which must be serviced
while in the raised position. Make sure that
oil contained within the remote cylinders
is clean and is of the correct grade.

NOTE: Connectors and couplers are available from
your Buhler Versatile authorized dealer.
F3-97

435/485/535

3-88
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Hydraulic Quick Couplers
Each remote valve section has a pair of hydraulic
quick couplers located at the rear of the tractor. These
are color-coded with the hydraulic control levers in
the cab. The couplers are self-sealing and leverless
and require no tools for connecting and disconnecting
hoses. The couplers also permit hoses to detach
themselves from the coupler should an implement
become disconnected from the tractor.

2
3

Coupler Connection
1. To connect couplers, wipe the outside of the coupler
and the tip of the implement to remove any dust
and minimize contamination.
2. Swing the dust cover (5) aside and insert the hose
into the coupler, making sure the hose is properly
seated.
3. Actuate the remote valve to supply hydraulic
pressure which will complete the hydraulic coupling
of the tractor and implement.
To ease removal and installation of the couplers,
relieve the pressure in the system. Securely support
the implement. Make sure no one will be injured by
moving equipment when relieving pressure in the
system. Move the control switch to the float position
with the engine running. This will relieve the pressure.
Turn the engine off with the control switch still in
float. After the engine is shut down return the control
switch to the neutral position. The couplers can now
be connected or disconnected with minimal pressure
and effort.

435/485/535

F3-96

3-89
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Connecting Single-acting Cylinders
Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to the
left extend/raise coupler on the remote control valve,
as previously described.
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the lever back
to the “extend” position.
Manually return the lever to the neutral position to
stop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allow
the valve to return to neutral automatically when
the cylinder reaches the end of its stroke and timed
operation.
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever
forward to the “retract” position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to lower
a single-acting cylinder. The “retract” position is for
double-acting cylinders only.

Connecting Double-acting Cylinders
Connect the feed hose from a double-acting cylinder
to the left extend/raise coupler on the remote control
valve and the return hose to the right retract/lower
coupler, as previously described. To extend a doubleacting cylinder, pull the lever back to the “extend”
position.
To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the lever
forward past neutral to the “retract” position.
Further forward movement of the lever will select
“float” which will allow the cylinder to extend or
retract freely. This feature is very helpful when carrying
out work with equipment such as scraper blades and
loaders.

Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic Equipment
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic
motors) should be connected to the 3RD remote control
valve couplers with the pressure hose connected to the
right retract coupler and the return hose connected to
the low pressure return circuit as described previously
in this section.

Use the flow control to regulate the motor speed. The
#1 flow control should be adjusted to regulate the orbit
motor speed. If the flow control is open too far, the
3-point hitch and other remote valves will slow down
or stop. This will ensure that the hydraulic system will
only supply the oil required by the motor. Extra pump
capacity will not be used except when other remote
valve sections are operated.
With the remote lever fully forward in the “float”
position, the motor will be stationary. The hydraulic
motor will operate if the lever is pushed forward to the
“retract” position. To stop the motor, move the lever
from the retract position to the float position. In the
float position the motor will be able to stop slowly,
which will not damage the motor.
IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow
equipment, the remote control valve lever must not
be moved rearward to the neutral or raise positions as
damage to the equipment may result.
Observe the following to further protect the tractor
and equipment.
• Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment or
motor. Use the flow control to regulate the rate of
flow or speed of the motor.
• Do not hold the remote control valve lever to
operate the equipment.
•

To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate
continuous flow equipment at the highest flow
setting (by use of the flow control) and lowest
engine speed that will give the required machine
performance and speed.

•

Do not use the #1 valve circuit to operate continuous
flow equipment that requires more than 137.90
bar (2,000 PSI). The #1 flow control may shut the
rest of the system down if the continuous pressure
is too high. Connect these loads to any other valve
section.

435/485/535

3-90
Section 3 - Operation
Hydraulic Operation - Electro-hydraulic
Hydraulic Motor Application
1. Use hydraulic motors designed for closed center or
pressure/flow load compensating hydraulic
systems only. Do Not use a hydraulic motor
designed for open center hydraulic systems
unless it is adapted for use by removing the inlet
restrictor.
2. Rating: Hydraulic motors up to 1.26 L/SEC
(20.0 GPM) @ 15.50 MPa (2248 PSI) can be
used.
3. Be sure the hydraulic motor does not have restrictors
in the ports or fittings.
4. Hydraulic motors less than 0.63 L/SEC
(10 GPM) may be equipped with 12.7 mm
(1/2") ID hoses and standard (ASAE/SAE/ISO)
couplers.
5. Hydraulic motors greater than 0.63 L/SEC
(10 GPM) should be connected with (3/4")
hoses and (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers to prevent
excessive restriction and heat generation.
6. It is recommended to use the low pressure return
line to reduce back pressure in the remote hydraulic
return line which will result in more efficient
hydraulic motor operation. The low pressure return
circuit can also be used in applications where low
return oil pressure is desired to improve implement
operation such as with orbit motor case drain lines,
or implement mounted hydraulic control valves.

435/485/535

Operating remote equipment simultaneously
or remote equipment and hydraulic lift
simultaneously
NOTE: Hydraulic pump output varies with engine
speed. Oil flow will be relatively constant in the
remote control valve circuits if the flow control is used
to provide reduced oil flow, thus providing constant
operating speed for hydraulic motors, etc. even if
engine speed varies. Maintain the engine speed above
the minimum required for simultaneous operation of
all required circuits and vary ground speed by selection
of the appropriate gear.
If operating two or more remote control valves
simultaneously or remote valves and hydraulic lift, all
the flow control knobs should be adjusted to provide
a partial flow. Otherwise, all the available flow may
be directed to the full flow circuit when the pressure
in that circuit is less than that of the other circuits in
use.

Bleeding Remote Cylinders
When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e. a new
cylinder, one that has been out of service or one that
has had the hoses disconnected, it will be necessary
to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
With the hoses connected to the remote control valve
couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the cylinder
with the hose end uppermost and extend and retract
the cylinder seven or eight times using the remote
control switch. Check the hydraulic oil tank level
before and after operating the remote cylinder.

3-91
Section 3 - Operation
Wheel Installation - Single

Wheels, Tires and Articulation Blocks

Wheel Installation
Determine the tire size and wheel configuration to be
used on the tractor and follow the proper installation
procedure from the methods detailed below.

CAUTION: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
REMOVING AND HANDLING WHEELS. USE A
CARRIER FOR HANDLING WHEELS.
CAUTION: STOP THE ENGINE AND ENGAGE THE
PARK BRAKE AND ARTICULATION LOCK BEFORE
WORKING ON TIRE INSTALLATION.
CAUTION: BLOCK THE WHEELS OF THE TRACTOR
WHEN JACKING UP THE AXLES.

F4-65

Single wheels
Tire configurations approved for single wheel use may
be positioned with the dish of the wheel inset or outset
depending upon the operator’s choice.

CAUTION: WITH THE WHEEL INSET, THE TRACTOR
WILL BE LESS STABLE ON HILLSIDES. FOR HILLY
TERRAIN, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE TIRES
BE OUTSET.
Torque the wheel mounting nuts (1).
Torque Value: 710 N·m (525 in-lbs.)
Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250")

Outset

Inset
F3-127

Single Wheel Configurations

435/485/535

3-92
Section 3 - Operation
Wheel Installation - Dual
Standard and Row Crop Drum Style Dual Wheels
a. Row crop drum duals have a longer drum on the
outer wheel to give proper spacing for 30" row
crops. Follow the listed procedure for both styles of
duals.

b. Put 51 mm - 76 mm (2" - 3") wood blocking under
the wheel to be dualed.
c. There are 20 nuts (1) that retain the inner wheel to
the planetary hub. Remove 18 of the 20 nuts from
the wheel, leaving 2 nuts (2) 180° apart on the
wheel as shown. This will retain the rim to the hub
and fit into the notches (3) on the outside duals rim.
Choose the two remaining nuts carefully so that
the valve stem of both wheels are accessable (4) for
easier tire inflation pressure maintenance later.
d. Using an appropriate lifting device, lift the outside
wheel rim and pilot it onto the planetary studs.
Make sure that the two (3) notches in the outer
wheel rim align with the two nuts remaining on the
inner wheel rim.

F4-65

DANGER: THE DRUM-STYLE DUAL WHEELS
ARE EXTREMELY HEAVY AND WILL EASILY TIP
TOWARD THE DRUM END OF THE WHEEL. USE
AN APPROPRIATE LIFTING DEVICE AND SAFETY
CHAINS WHEN HANDLING DRUM-STYLE WHEELS.
e. Reinstall the 18 nuts (1) removed in Step c.

F3-131

f. Torque the wheel nuts to 710 N·m (525 ft-lbs).
g. Repeat the above procedure for the other remaining
wheels.
h. Drive the tractor, steering lock to lock. Park the
tractor and recheck the torques on the wheel nuts
as described in Step f.

F3-128

Dual Wheel configuration

435/485/535

3-93
Section 3 - Operation
Wheel Installation - Triple
Standard Drum-Style Triple Wheels
a. For triple tire configuration, it is only permissible
to install the inner wheel with the rim inset (narrow
tread width).

b. Put a 51 mm - 76 mm (2"-3") wood block under
the wheel to be tripled.
c. There are 20 nuts (1) that retain the inner wheel
to the planetary hub. Remove 18 of the 20 nuts
from the wheel, leaving 2 nuts (2) 180° apart on
the wheel as shown. This will retain the rim to the
hub and fit into the notches (3) on the center wheel’s
rim. Choose the two remaining nuts carefully so that
the valve stem of both wheels are accessable (4) for
easier tire inflation pressure maintenance later.
d. Using an appropriate lifting device, lift the center
wheel rim and pilot it onto the planetary studs.
Make sure that the two slots in the center wheel
rim align with the two nuts remaining on the inner
wheel rim.

DANGER: THE DRUM-STYLE DUAL and triple
WHEELS ARE EXTREMELY HEAVY AND WILL EASILY
TIP TOWARD THE DRUM END OF THE WHEEL. USE
AN APPROPRIATE LIFTING DEVICE AND SAFETY
CHAINS WHEN HANDLING DRUM-STYLE WHEELS.

F4-65

NOTE: Do not mix up the center wheel with the outer
wheel. The center wheel has a dishwelded (5) in the
inner diameter to bolt the outside drum to.
NOTE: Install the wheels so that both inner and center
treads face the same direction.

F3-131

NOTE: Install the center wheel so that the valve stem
is in line with the inner and outer wheels.
e. Reinstall the 18 nuts (1) removed in Step c.
Torque the wheel nuts to 710 N·m (525 ft-lbs).
f.

Using an appropriate lifting device, lift the outer
wheel and pilot it into the center wheel. Line up
the holes in the center wheel dish with the holes in
the outer wheel drum.

435/485/535

3-94
Section 3 - Operation
Wheel Installation - Triple

6
Triple Wheel Configuration
NOTE: Install the wheels so that both center and outer
treads face the same direction.
g. Install the twenty cap screws (6), washers and nuts
through the wheel rims. Torque the nuts to
710 N·m (525 ft-lbs).
NOTE: The drums on the center and outer wheels have
large cutouts in them to assist in installing the drum
hardware.
h. Repeat the above procedure for the other three
sets of triple wheels.
i. Drive the tractor, steering from lock to lock. Park
the tractor and recheck the torques on the inner and
outer wheel nuts as detailed in Steps e and g.

435/485/535

F3-129

3-95
Section 3 - Operation
Tire Selection
Tire Selection

Factors Determining Best Tire Performance

Selecting the proper size and type of tires is important
in achieving maximum tractor efficiency. Various sizes
and types of tires are available for your tractor. Refer
to table below for approved tire sizes and articulation
block configurations for your tractor.

Good Performance

NOTE: If a specific size of tire or tire configuration is
not listed under a particular model, do not attempt to
install that size tire.

• Proper air pressure for the load
• Proper sidewall deflection
• 8%-15% wheel slip
• Proper tire size for expected load
• Less than 50% fill of liquid ballast

The tires selected for your tractor must be able to
support the weight of the tractor and equipment.
The tires must also be able to provide adequate tire
traction to utilize the tractor engine horsepower and
turn it into useful drawbar horsepower.

• Maintaining equal tire pressure in all tires on a
given axle

You will have to adjust the ballast, tire pressure and
tractor weight split between the front and rear axles
for various loads and conditions to achieve the best
ride and performance.

• Stiff sidewalls

Always maintain the proper air pressure in the tire to
carry the load. Do not over inflate radial or bias ply
tires. Radial tires will work with LOWER air pressures.
Radial tires will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or
bulge when properly inflated.

• Treating tires on an axle differently.

The force that enables the tires to drive the tractor
must be transmitted through the tire sidewalls. The
tires work best when all the tires on a given axle are
working at the same rate.
Think of them like a shock absorber; they must respond
the same way to share the load equally.

Poor Performance
• High or low air pressure
• High or low wheel slip
• Overloaded or underloaded tire
Refer to “Ballasting” later in this section for proper
tractor weight procedures once the tire size has been
selected.

Tire Configurations
Tire Size
20.8R42 R1W
520/85/42 R1W
520/85R46 R1W
620/70R42 R1W
650/65R42 R1W
650/85R38 R1W
710/70R38 R1W
710/70R42 R1W
800/70R38 R1W
850/60R38
900/50R42 R1W

Articulation blocks
Duals
Triples
None
38 deg
None
38 deg
None
38 deg
None
33 deg
None
33 deg
None
33 deg
None
N/A
None
N/A
38 deg
N/A
38 deg
N/A
38 deg
N/A

435/485/535

3-96
Section 3 - Operation
Articulation Blocks
Articulation Blocks
Each individual tire size requires a specific articulation
block to be used with that tire size.
Refer to the table opposite for the maximum
articulation angle allowed based on tire selection.
There are three possible articulation angles used on
the tractor. They are 42°, 38° & 33°. The following
information shows what each articulation block
configuration looks like. The articulation block
mounting plates are located on either side of the front
frame adjacent to the fuel tanks.
IMPORTANT: Install the proper articulation blocks on
the tractor before the dual or triple wheels are installed
on the unit to prevent any accidental damage from
occurring.
NOTE: Any tractor that is equipped with a PTO option
requires a 38° articulation block kit be installed on it.
If the tire size of the tractor requires a 33° articulation
kit, use those kits instead of the 38° kit for a PTO
option.

F2-6

WARNING: IMPROPER ASSEMBLY OF THE
ARTICULATION BLOCKS CAN CAUSE THE TRACTOR
WHEELS TO CONTACT THE FUEL TANK WHEN
TURNING. MAKE SURE THE ARTICULATION ANGLE
IS WITHIN LIMITS.
42° - The maximum turning angle allowed by the
steering cylinders is 42°. If your tractor tire size allows
an angle of 42°, no articulation blocks are required.

F3-99

435/485/535

3-97
Section 3 - Operation
Articulation Blocks
38° - To limit the articulation angle to 38°, use the
articulation blocks with the thick section toward the
outside (1).

F3-100

33° - To limit the articulation angle to 33°, use the
articulation blocks with the thick section to the inside
(2).

F3-101

435/485/535

3-98
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting

Ballasting
Basic Rules of Thumb for Ballasting
1. When using fluid, put equal amounts in each tire
on a given axle.

The extra 5% is to compensate for additional tire
distortion caused by weight transfer from the hitch.
If possible, remove ballast when not needed for lighter
loads.

2. Ballast tractors to a minimum amount as a starting
point.

Pull lighter loads at a faster speed to do more work
and increase efficiency. Do not overweight the tractor
to pull very heavy loads.

3. For light-duty application, weight distribution
front to rear is not as important as in heavier draft
applications.

If the implement cannot be pulled at the needed depth
at 7.2 KPH (4.5 MPH) or greater, the implement is
over matched for your tractor.

4. At maximum operating weight, the correct
recommended weight distribution of 55/45 (front/
rear) for drawbar applications and 65/35 (front/
rear) for 3-point hitch applications is essential.

The best guide to follow in ballasting is to not have the
full load wheel slippage fall below 12%.

5. Set tire inflation pressures based on weight carried
by each wheel. Do not go below 55 kPa (8 PSI) on
radial tires.

Application and Ballasting
Buhler Versatile 4WD tractors work in many different
conditions and operations. Therefore it is up to the
operator to ensure that the tractor is performing at its
peak in its specific operations.
Unlike crawler-type tractors, these tractors are
designed to operate at speeds of 7.2 KPH (4.5 MPH)
and higher. At these speeds, they are more productive
and are less likely to have mechanical breakdowns.
Many factors determine a tractor’s productivity.
Factors such as the size of the load, tractor wheel
slip, tire rolling resistance, tractor operating weight
and tractor weight distribution all must be taken
into consideration when operating this tractor.

Loads Matched to the Tractor
Do not operate the tractor with heavy implement loads
that need the use of gears in the lower ranges. The
tractor is made for continued field operation at the
rated HP and ground speed of 7.2 KPH (4.5MPH)
and faster with a load that is correctly matched to
the tractor. If you operate the tractor with too much
ballast and pull too heavy a load for a long period of
time in the low gears, you will cause damage to the
drivetrain and decrease tire life.
The best traction occurs when wheel slip is between
8% and 15% for drawbar work and 13% to 15% for
3-point hitch work.

435/485/535

This amount of slippage is your best protection against
overloading.

Wheel Slip
Wheel slippage is a vital consideration in any farming
operation. Too much slippage represents lost time
and wasted production. Too much wheel slippage is a
major cause of wheel traffic-induced soil compaction.
Too little can result in reduced reliability of the
drivetrain.
Strive for 8% to 15% wheel slippage on a 4WD.
Wheel slip is defined as the amount of tire rotation
“wasted” during one complete rotation of a tire.
Wheel slip is not a deterrent to tractor operation. It
is a necessary function of the tires and helps prevent
damage to the tractor drivetrain due to tractor
overload.
Every time a tractor wheel makes a revolution,
the wheel covers a certain distance. On a very firm
dry surface (i.e., asphalt), the distance covered in
one tire revolution will be very close to the actual
circumference of the tire. On a very loose surface (i.e.
sand), the distance covered in one tire revolution will
be significantly less than the actual circumference of
the tire. This “wasted” distance is referred to as wheel
slip.
Every tire contact on every surface will produce
some amount of wheel slip. If there were no wheel
slip, significant drivetrain wear would be present and
damage to the tractor may occur. Ballasting the tractor
and operating with the proper size and inflated tires
will maintain wheel slip at a manageable level (8%15%).

3-99
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting
Measuring Wheel Slip
One of the functions of the Tractor Performance Monitor
is to measure wheel slip automatically and inform the
operator if the wheel slip is at an unacceptable level
based on a pre-programmed value set by the operator.
For more information on the wheel slip feature, see
“Tractor Performance Monitor” earlier in this section.
If the tractor does not have the optional Tractor
Performance Monitor, wheel slip can be measured as
follows:
1. Put a reference mark on the side of the tractor rear
tire.
2. Operate the tractor with the implement in the
ground.
3. While the tractor is moving, have an assistant put
a marker on the ground outside the implement
width where the reference mark on the tire comes
down to the ground.

Revolutions of Wheel
9-1/2
9
8-1/2
8
7-1/2
7

Slip %
5
10
15
20
25
30

Too Little Ballast
1. Excessive wheel spin
2. Power loss
3. Tire wear
4. Excessive fuel consumption
5. Lower productivity
Too Much Ballast
1. Increased drivetrain load and power operating cost
2. Power loss

DANGER: MAKE SURE THE ASSISTANT IS CLEAR OF
THE IMPLEMENT AND TRACTOR DURING WHEEL
SLIP MEASUREMENTS.

3. Tire strain

4. Continue to move along with the tractor and
count ten wheel revolutions. Put a second marker
on the ground outside the implement width where
the reference mark on the tire comes down to the
ground for the tenth time.

5. Lower productivity, i.e., more power required
to move the overloaded tractor, allowing less power
available to pull the implement.

5. Lift the implement out of the ground. Put the
tractor in position next to the first ground marker
and put a new reference mark on the rear tire to
aligned with it.
6. Operate the tractor, with the implement raised, from
the first ground marker to the second ground marker.
Count the number of wheel revolutions between
the two ground markers.
7. The tire will require fewer revolutions to cover the
same distance because of less slip. The following
table will determine the percent of wheel slip from
the number of wheel revolutions:

4. Soil compaction

Rolling Resistance
The greatest loss of engine power occurs in the area
of traction factors such as rolling resistance and wheel
slippage. Those losses will occur in any and every
practical traction situation.
Therefore, choosing the right amount of weight is
the first step. Too little weight permits excessive
wheel slippage while too much weight increases soil
compaction and rolling resistance. Rolling resistance
is the power required to roll the tractor’s tires forward
with no load except weight.

When you have too much ballast installed on the
tractor, you will see the clear shape of the tire bar
in the ground which is an indication of no slippage.
With too little ballast, the tire barmarks will not show
because of the tire slippage.

435/485/535

3-100
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting
Tractor Weight Distribution

Calculation of Ballast

Although Buhler Versatile 4WD tractors are
manufactured with an approximate weight distribution
of 65% - 67% over the front axle and 33% - 35%
over the rear axle, the intent of the design is to have
the tractor operating in the field with an ideal 50/50
dynamic weight distribution.

The following information is provided as a guide for
proper ballasting:

The benefits of operating a tractor in the field under
the ideal 50/50 dynamic weight distribution are:
1. The work is divided equally between the axles,
allowing a more even distribution of work and
load.
2. Compaction is lessened since the axles are the
lightest force possible on the soil. If a 13,636
kg (30,000 lbs) tractor has a 50/50 split, each axle
exerts a force of 6,818 kg (15,000 lbs). A 60/40
split would create an 8,182 kg (18,000 lbs) force
under the heavier axle, increasing the compaction
by 1364 kg (3000 lbs).
3. Maximum traction, with the least rolling resistance,
is gained by distributing the load equally between
both axles.
4. With the total tractor weight equally divided (under
load) on all four wheels, you increase reliability by
spreading the torque output of the tractor equally
to all four wheels. The greatest torque always goes
to the wheels with the most weight.
NOTE: The tractor has a maximum axle weight
capacity:
Model

Maximum continuous weight per axle

435
485
535

27,000 lbs.
30.000 lbs.
32,000 lbs.

(Based on 100 lbs/hp x 60%)

435/485/535

Shipping Weight and Fore/Aft Ratio
The shipping weight of the tractor will be approximate
distributed at 65% - 67% on the front axle and 33%
- 35% on the rear axle.
Do not assume that every tractor will come from the
factory with this weight distribution.
Various options and wheel packages will significantly
change the weight of the tractor. Determine the
shipping weight BEFORE any ballast is added to the
tractor by weighing the tractor on a scale. This is the
most accurate method of determining actual tractor
weight and ballasting the unit correctly. Possible
locations of a scale of adequate size to weigh the
tractor would be a feed/fertilizer store, asphalt plant,
gravel quarry, grain elevator, etc.
NOTE: There is an additional method of calculating
the shipping weight of the tractor using calculated
weight from theoretical value charts located in the
Section 6 of this manual. Weighing the tractor on a
scale is preferred.
When weighing the tractor, pull the front axle on the
scale first. Make sure the inside wheels of the dual or
triple tires are fully on the scales and the outer tires
are off of the ground. Since most scales are less than
3 m (10") wide, driving the inner wheels up on wooden
blocks will accomplish this. Repeat this procedure for
the rear axle. Record the unballasted weight of each
axle. Add the weight recorded for each axle together to
get a total tractor shipping weight. Divide the individual
axle weights by the total tractor shipping weight to get
the front to rear weight distribution percentage.

3-101
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting
Example:
425, 485 & 535 Unballasted Shipping Weight
Front axle weight:

9,130 kg (20,130 lbs.)

Rear axle weight:

4,821 kg (10,630 lbs.)

Total tractor
shipping weight: 13,592 kg (30,758 lbs.)
Weight distribution
Front axle:

9,130÷13,952
(20,130÷30,758) = 65%

Rear axle:

4,820÷13,952
(10,628÷30,952) = 35%

NOTE: The above example is not an exact shipping
weight of a tractor. Weigh your specific tractor to get
accurate figures to work with.
For optimum performance the tractor requires
ballasting to obtained 50% balance of the load being
carried on each axle during field work. This makes
each axle pull its share of the load so that one axle is
not overworked.

Operating Weight and Fore/Aft Ratio
It has been determined that Buhler Versatile 4WD
tractors operate at top efficiency when ballasted to
45.3 Kg (100 lbs) per engine brake horsepower. This
is the total vehicle weight at which the tractor can
pull an implement and propel itself without causing
excess soil compaction. The following chart shows
recommended operating weights based on tractor
model by horsepower at 45.3 Kg (100 lbs) per
horsepower ballast.

Additional Ballast Requirements
Total ballast to be added can now be calculated by
subtracting the shipping weight of the tractor, from
the recommended operating weight, determined from
the chart.
Example:
Recommended Operating Weight:
485 (485 HP)
22,000 kg (48,500 lbs.)
Shipping Weight:
485 (485 HP)

13,952 kg (30.758 lbs.)

Total Ballast to be Added:

8,048 kg (17,742 lbs.)

The figure of 8,048 kg (17,742 lbs.) is the total
amount of ballast to be added to the tractor to get it
to 45.3 kg (100 lbs) per horsepower. This total ballast
figure now needs to be divided between the front and
rear axle.
To calculate the amount of ballast to be added to
each axle, first determine what type of implement the
tractor will be used with.
If the tractor is to be used with a drawbar pulltype implement, the field ready ballasted weight
distribution should be 55% on the front axle and
45% on the rear axle of the recommended operating
weight. Once the tractor is in the field operating with
the implement, the draft load imposed on the tractor
by the implement will balance the weight distribution
between the axles to a 50/50 dynamic ratio.
The following chart details an example of the correct
front to rear ballasting on a 485 tractor with a drawbar
application based on the previous calculations.

Model

Rated
Horsepower

Recommended Operating
Weight at 100 lbs/HP

435

19,750 kg (43,500 lbs.)

485

22,000 kg (48,500 lbs.)

535

24,267 kg (53,500 lbs.)

Total kg (lbs)

Front kg (lbs)

Rear kg (lbs)

Optimum
Operating
Weight &
Percentage
45.3kg x 485
(100 lb x 485)

22,000 kg
(48,500 lbs.)

Scaled
Shipping
Weight

13,952 kg
(30.758 lbs.)

7,673 kg
(48,500 lbs.)

6,279 kg
(48,500 lbs.)

Additional
Ballast
Required/Axle

8,048 kg
(17,742 lbs.)

4,426 kg
(9,757 lbs.)

3,622 kg
(7,985 lbs.)

435/485/535

3-102
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting

Ballasting Weights
Ballasting weight is to be added in the form of front,
upper or rear weight kits available from your Buhler
Versatile dealer.
The weight kits are suitcase in style allowing ballast
to be easily installed and removed, depending on the
varying needs.

Front weights
The front weight kit is available with a set of twelve,
twenty four or forty, 30 kg (67 lbs), suitcase style
weights (1). The bracket (2) and hardware, weighs
approximately 130 kg. (285 lbs). Most applications
will not require front weight packages.

Front weights can be removed by releasing one of the
tie rod nuts (3) and withdrawing the tie rod from the
weight package. Loosen the bolt (4) on the rear of the
bracket and remove the cast block (5). The weights
can now be lifted from the bracket.

The last four weights on the right and left hand side are
held in place by the cast block (5) installed through
the weight cut out. The remaining weights are held in
position by the tie rod.

NOTE: The upper weight kit is designed to add ballast
equally to the front and rear.

2
F3-130

Upper weights
The upper weight kit is available with a set of twelve,
twenty four or forty 30 kg (67 lb), suitcase style
weights (6). The bracket (7) and hardware weighs
approximately 342 kg. (755 lbs).

Upper weights can be removed by releasing the left
hand tie rod nuts (8) and withdrawing the tie rod fully
toward the opposite fender. Loosen the bolt (9) on the
rear of the bracket releasing the cast block (10).
NOTE: The last four weights on the right and left
hand side are held in place by the cast block installed
through the weight cut out. The remaining weights are
held in position by the tie rod.
Pry upward on the fifth weight (11) from the left and
remove it from the tractor. Starting with the sixth
weight from the left remove six additional weights
from the bracket. Slide the four remaining left hand
weights to the right and remove. Remove the cast
block (10). Slide the remaining weights to the left and
remove them from the bracket. This will expose the
right hand retaining block.

435/485/535

F3-132

3-103
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting
Remove the block and remove the remaining four
weights from the bracket together with the tie rod.
NOTE: When installing fewer weights make sure that
they are positioned in the center of the bracket.
NOTE: For details on the upper weight kit bracket see
page 4-25.

F3-133

Weight bracket removed for clarity

Rear weights
The rear weight kit is available with a set of twelve,
twenty four or forty two, 30 kg (67 lbs), suitcase style
weights (12). The bracket (13) and hardware, weighs
approximately 98 kg. (215 lbs).
NOTE: The rear weight kit cannot be installed on units
that have a PTO option or a 3-point hitch option. The
PTO or 3-point hitch is considered part of the rear axle
ballast.
Rear weights can be removed by releasing the left
hand tie rod nuts (14) and withdrawing the tie rod
fully toward the opposite fender. Loosen the bolt (15)
on the rear of the bracket releasing the cast block
(10).

15
F3-134

NOTE: The last four weights on the right and left
hand side are held in place by the cast block installed
through the weight cut out. The remaining weights are
held in position by the tie rod.
Pry upward on the fifth weight (16) from the left and
remove it from the tractor. Starting with the sixth
weight from the left remove six additional weights
from the bracket. Slide the four remaining left hand
weights to the right and remove. Remove the cast
block (10). Slide the remaining weights to the left and
remove them from the bracket. This will expose the
right hand retaining block.
Remove the block and remove the remaining four
weights from the bracket together with the tie rod.

F3-135

NOTE: When installing fewer weights make sure that
they are positioned in the center of the bracket.
NOTE: For details on the upper weight kit bracket see
page 4-25.

435/485/535

3-104
Section 3 - Operation
Ballasting
Ballasting C of G Calculation Table
Weight Added to Axle (lbs)
Calculated
Weight (lbs)
397.086
793.664
1587.328
2645.547

C of G

Front

Rear

Front Weight Bracket
Front Weights (12 X 30 kg)
Front Weights (24 X 30 kg)
Front Weights (40 X 30 kg)

Calculated
Weight (kg)
180.115
360
720
1200

-4403
-4786
-4786
-4786

626.479
1330.100
2660.199
4433.666

-229.393
-536.436
-1072.871
-1788.119

Rear Weight Bracket
Rear Weights (12 X 30 kg)
Rear Weights (24 X 30 kg)
Rear Weights (40 X 30 kg)
Rear Weights (42 X 30 kg)

100.624
360
720
1200
1260

221.838
793.664
1587.328
2645.547
2777.824

2235
2460
2460
2460
2460

-27.588
-144.488
-288.975
-481.625
-505.707

249.425
938.152
1876.303
3127.172
3283.531

Upper Weight Bracket
Upper Weights (12 X 30 kg)
Upper Weights (24 X 30 kg)
Upper Weights (40 X 30 kg)

163.288
360
720
1200

359.988
793.664
1587.328
2645.547

897
1073
1073
1073

78.736
137.772
275.544
459.240

281.252
655.892
1311.784
2186.307

435/485/535

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Contents

Section 4 Contents - Lubrication & Maintenance
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fueling the Tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Inspection Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Lubrication & Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Every 10 hours or Daily
1. Cleaning the Front Grill, Coolers & Radiator. . . . . 4-8
2. Check the Engine Coolant Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
3. Check Fan/Water Pump Belt Tension. . . . . . . . . 4-11
4. Check Alternator/AC Belt Tension. . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
5. Check Engine Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
6. Drain the Fuel Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
7. Drain the Auxiliary Fuel Filter (Optional). . . . . . 4-13
8. Check the Hydraulic Oil Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
9. Check Transmission Oil Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
10. Parking Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
11. Lubricate the Lower Articulation Pin. . . . . . . . . 4-15
12. Lubricate the Front Steering Cylinder Pins. . . . . 4-16
13. Lubricate the Rear Steering Cylinder Pins. . . . . 4-16
14. Lubricate the Upper Articulation Pins. . . . . . . . 4-16
15. Lubricate the Front Drag Link Pins. . . . . . . . . . 4-17
16. Lubricate the Rear Drag Link Pins. . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
17. Lubricate the Rear Axle Drive Shaft

Steady Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
18. Air Intake Piping/Charge Air Piping. . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Every 50 hours
19. Clean the Cab Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
20. Check the Differential Oil Level. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
21. Clean the Alternator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
22. Check the Tire Air Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
23. Check the Planetary Hub Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Every 250 hours
24. Change the Engine Oil and Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
25. Change the Fuel Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
26. Check the Engine Supplemental Coolant. . . . . . 4-23
27. Change the Transmission Oil Filter (CAT TA22). . 4-24
28. Optional (Change the Transmission Oil after

first 250 hours (CAT TA22). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
29. Clean the Transmission Breather (CAT TA22). . . . . 4-25
30. Check Air-conditioner Drain Hoses . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
31. Check Air-conditioner Sight Glass. . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
32. Check Weight Kit Hardware Torques. . . . . . . . . 4-27
33. Check Wheel Hardware Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Every 300 hours
34. Change the Transmission Oil Filter

(1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission) . . . . . 4-28
Every 500 hours
35. Clean the Battery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
36. Check the Battery Electrolyte Level. . . . . . . . . . 4-30
37. Check the Starter Battery Connections . . . . . . . 4-30
38. Check the Engine Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
39. Clean the Hydraulic Suction Screen . . . . . . . . . 4-32

40. Change the Hydraulic Filter - (Standard). . . . . .
41. Change the Hydraulic Filter - (High Flow) . . . . .
42. Change the Transmission Filter

(Synchromesh Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43. Clean the Hydraulic Tank Breather . . . . . . . . . .
44. Change the Auxiliary Fuel Filter (Optional). . . . .
45. Change the Differential Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46. Change the Planetary Hub Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47. Check the Axle Mount Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . .
48. Check the Drawbar Wear Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . .
49. Steam Cleaning the Tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Every 1000 hours
50. Change the Transmission Oil (CAT TA22). . . . . .
51. Clean the Transmission Suction Screen

(CAT TA22). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52. Change the Inner & Outer

Air Cleaner Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53. Change the Cab Air Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Every 1200 hours
54. Change the Transmission Oil

(1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission) . . . . .
Every 1500 hours or Yearly
55. Change the Coolant System Filter. . . . . . . . . . .
56. Change the Transmission Oil

(Synchromesh Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57. Clean the Transmission Suction Screen

(Synchromesh Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58. Check the Transmission Mounts

(All models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59. Change the Hydraulic Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60. Check the Engine Mounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61. Check the Engine Turbocharger Connections. . .
62. Check the Radiator and Heating

System Hoses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63. Check the Cab Mounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Every 2000 hours or 2 Yearly
64. Change the Engine Coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicated by warning light
65. Change the Air Cleaner Outer Element . . . . . . .
As Required
66 - 75. Lighting - Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . .
76. Rear Deck Panel Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77. Fuse Panel Relay Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78. Changing Fuses/Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79. Check the Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . .
80. Change the Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . .
81. Clean the Cab Floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82. Clean the Cab Seat and Upholstery. . . . . . . . . .
83. Change the Ether Canister. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84. Drain the Fuel Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85. Rear Fender Height Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .
86. Storing the Tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-37
4-37
4-38
4-40

4-41
4-42
4-43
4-43
4-44
4-45
4-45
4-46
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-50
4-52
4-56
4-56
4-57
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-60
4-61
4-61
4-62

435/485/535

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
General Information

General Information
Introduction
This section gives full details of the service procedures
necessary to maintain your tractor at peak efficiency.
The Lubrication and Maintenance Chart provides a
ready reference to these requirements. Each operation
is numbered for easy reference.
In addition to the regular maintenance operations
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or
daily during the first 50 hours of operation:
• Wheel hardware for tightness.
• Planetary hub and differential oil level
• Check for leaks, loose or damaged parts.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,
where applicable, extend all cylinders before checking
oil levels.

Safety Precautions
Read and observe all safety precautions listed in
Section 1, “Safety: Servicing The Tractor.”
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.
Consult local officials for proper procedures.

Preventing System Contamination
To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters,
etc., always clean the area around the filler caps, level
plugs, drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal.
Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil
contained within them is clean, has not degenerated
due to long storage, and is of the correct grade.
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess grease
from the fitting after greasing.

Flexible Maintenance Intervals
The intervals listed in the Lubrication and Maintenance
Chart are guidelines to be used when operating in
normal working conditions.
Adjust the intervals for environmental and working
conditions. Intervals should be shortened under
adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty) working
conditions.

Lubrication and Maintenance Chart
The chart lists the intervals when routine checks,
lubrication, service and/or adjustments should be
performed. Use the chart as a quick reference guide
when servicing the tractor. (The operations follow the
chart).

First 50–Hour Service
CAUTION: DO NOT CHECK, LUBRICATE, SERVICE
OR ADJUST THE TRACTOR WITH THE ENGINE
RUNNING.

435/485/535

At the first 50–hour service, ensure that the
maintenance operations listed on the “First 50–Hour
Service” checklist, located at the back of this manual,
are carried out.
IMPORTANT: Items listed in the first 50–hour check
are important. If not performed, early component
failure and reduced tractor life may result.

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Fueling the Tractor
Fueling the Tractor

Fuel Storage
Take the following precautions to ensure stored fuel is
kept free of dirt, water, and other contaminants.

• CAUTION: WHEN HANDLING DIESEL FUEL,
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
•

DO NOT SMOKE AROUND DIESEL FUEL.
UNDER
NO
CIRCUMSTANCES
SHOULD
GASOLINE, ALCOHOL, GASOHOL OR DIESELHOL
(A MIXTURE OF DIESEL FUEL AND ALCOHOL) BE
ADDED TO DIESEL FUEL BECAUSE OF INCREASED
FIRE OR EXPLOSION RISKS. IN A CLOSED
CONTAINER, SUCH AS A FUEL TANK, THEY ARE
MORE EXPLOSIVE THAN PURE GASOLINE.
DO NOT USE THESE BLENDS. ADDITIONALLY,
DIESELHOL IS NOT APPROVED DUE TO
POSSIBLE INADEQUATE LUBRICATION OF THE
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM.

•

Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized tanks,
as the zinc coating will react with the fuel and form
compounds that will contaminate the injection
pump and injectors.

•

Install bulk storage tanks away from direct sunlight
and angle them slightly so sediment in the tanks
will settle away from the outlet pipe. Check the fuel
storage tanks regularly for condensation by draining
from the tank bottom.

• To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,
provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
opposite the outlet pipe.
• If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
filler neck when refueling.

• CLEAN THE FILLER CAP AREA AND KEEP IT
FREE OF DEBRIS.

• Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels are
not held over and used in winter.

• FILL THE TANKS AT THE END OF EACH DAY TO
REDUCE OVERNIGHT CONDENSATION.

• Ground the storage tanks to prevent static
buildup.

• NEVER TAKE THE CAPS OFF OR REFUEL WITH
THE ENGINE RUNNING.

Fuel Requirements

• KEEP CONTROL OF THE FUEL NOZZLE WHILE
FILLING THE FUEL TANKS.
•

DON’T FILL THE TANKS TO CAPACITY. ALLOW
ROOM FOR EXPANSION. IF THE ORIGINAL
FUEL TANK CAPS ARE LOST, REPLACE THEM
WITH BUHLER VERSATILE CAPS AND TIGHTEN
SECURELY.

• WIPE UP SPILLED FUEL IMMEDIATELY.
•

USE ONLY INTERNALLY GROUNDED FUELING
HOSE FROM STORAGE TANK AND PUMP TO
TRACTOR FUEL TANK. IF IN DOUBT CHECK WITH
YOUR FUEL HOSE SUPPLIER. (AN ACCEPTABLE
FUEL HOSE WOULD BE ONE WITH AN INTERNAL
WIRE THAT CAN BE CHECKED USING A
CONTINUITY TESTER.)

•

WHEN REFUELING, MAKE SURE THE NOZZLE
IS IN CONTACT WITH THE FILLER NECK OF
THE TRACTOR FUEL TANK BEFORE FUEL
STARTS FLOWING AND DURING THE ENTIRE
TIME FUEL IS FLOWING.

The quality of fuel used is an important factor for
dependable performance and satisfactory engine life.
Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and noncorrosive
to fuel system parts. Be sure to use fuel of a known
quality from a reputable supplier.
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine
wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the
application and property requirements outlined in the
following “Diesel Fuel Selection Chart” on page 4-4.
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold-weather
conditions below 0° C (32° F) are encountered or when
continuously operating at an altitude above 1,524 m
(5,000’), use Number 1-D fuel.
Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.50%
requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the
maintenance schedule.
The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above
1.3% is not recommended.

435/485/535

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Fueling the Tractor
Diesel Fuel Selection Chart

General Fuel Class

Final Boiling

Temp. Range

Cetane (Min.)

Sulphur Content (Max.)

No. 1-D

288° C (550° F)

-7° C (20° F)
and below

40*

0.30%

No. 2-D

357° C (675° F)

-7° C (20° F)
and above

0.50%

*When continually operating at low temperatures or high altitude, a minimum cetane of 45 is required.
Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below 7°C (20°F). The cold temperatures will cause Number
2-D fuel to thicken, which may keep the engine from
running. (If this happens, contact your Buhler Versatile
dealer.)
For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D whenever
the temperature will permit.
To be sure a fuel meets the required properties,
enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The
responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier
as well as the fuel user.

Adding Diesel Fuel
Fuel can be added to either tank. The two tanks are
connected via a crossover tube. Total usable capacity
of the two tanks is 330 U.S. gallons (1249 L).

To add fuel to the tractor, follow the steps below:
1. Clean the area around the fuel cap(s) to prevent
debris from entering the fuel tank.
2. To remove the cap, turn handle in the center
of the cap counterclockwise until loose and pull
the cap from the tank. Place it in a clean area
during refueling.

NOTE: With the engine off, and the ignition
switch in the “RUN” position, the fuel fill mode
of the Electronic Instrument Control System will
be operational and will assist in refueling
procedures. Refer to “Electronic Instrument Control
System” in Section 3 for further information.

3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the
fuel cap.

Each fuel tank has a vent tube located on the rear
corner of the tank. The tube runs vertically inside the
cab frame and requires no maintenance.

CAUTION: DO NOT OVERFILL THE TANKS. EITHER
FILL TO BOTTOM OF FILLER NECK OR USE THE
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CONTROL SYSTEM TO
AID IN REFUELING. WHEN THE ALARM SOUNDS A
SOLID TONE, THE TANK IS FULL. ALLOW ROOM FOR
EXPANSION. FUEL EXPANSION OF OVERFILLED
TANKS CAN RESULT IN FUEL ENTRY TO ENGINE
CYLINDERS AND ACCOMPANYING HYDRAULIC
LOCK.
IF THE ORIGINAL FUEL TANK CAPS ARE LOST,
REPLACE THEM WITH BUHLER VERSATILE CAPS
AND TIGHTEN SECURELY.

435/485/535

F4-1

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Inspection Access

Inspection Access
Engine Access
In order to perform service, inspection and lubrication
operations to the tractor, it may be necessary to open
or remove various panels and shields.
IMPORTANT: After performing work on the tractor,
install all safety shields before operating the tractor.

Battery Access
The batteries are located on top of the right side fuel
tank. Release the latch (1) and lift the battery cover.
Make sure the cover is down and latched when
operating the tractor.

F2-13

Opening the Hood Panels
To provide easy access to the engine, each hood side
panel swings open vertically. There is an external latch,
(2) that releases the panel. Each panel is held open
by a single gas strut. Close the hood panels by pulling
downward from the side of it and keeping a steady
pressure on the panel. The gas strut will collapse and
the panel will go over center and latch. Do not force
the panel down against the gas strut.

F4-2

Removing the Hood Panels
The hood panels can be easily removed if greater access
is required for maintenance or service operations.
1. Remove the hairpin clips (3) from the front and rear
pivot studs retaining the hood panel hinge plates.
2. Disconnect the gas strut from the hood panel.
3. Slide the panel forward to clear the pivot studs and
lift clear.
4. Set the panel clear of the working area to prevent
damage.
To reinstall the panels, reverse the above procedure.

3
F4-3

435/485/535

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Lubrication & Maintenance Chart

Lubrication and Maintenance Chart
Service Interval
Every 10 hours or daily

No.

Operation

Front grille

Check

Clean
•

Hydraulic cooler

•

Transmission cooler

•

Air conditioner condenser

•

Intercooler

•

Radiator

•

Fuel cooler

Engine coolant level

•

Engine fan/water pump belt tension

•

Alternator/AC compressor belt tension

•

Engine oil level

•

Fuel filter

Auxiliary fuel filter (optional)

Hydraulic oil level

•

Lube

Change

•
•

Transmission oil level (all transmissions)

•

Brake adjustment

•

Lower articulation pin

•

Front steering cylinder pin, 2 off

•

Rear steering cylinder pin, 2 off

•

Upper articulation pin

•

Front drag link pin, 2 off

•

Rear drag line pin, 2 off

•

Rear axle drive shaft steady bearing

•

Air intake pipe

Cab air filter

Differential oil level

Alternator

Tire air pressure

•

Planetary hub oil

•

Engine oil and filter

Fuel filter

Engine supplemental coolant

Transmission oil filter (first startup (CAT TA22)

Transmission oil change* (CAT TA22)

Transmission breather (CAT TA22)

Air conditioner drain hoses

•

Air conditioner sight glass

•

Weight kit hardware (optional)

•

Wheel hardware

•

Every 300 hours

Transmission filter (1407 Twindisc)

Every 500 hours

Battery connections

Battery electrolyte level

•

Starter battery connections

•

Engine air pre-cleaner

•

Hydraulic suction screen

•

Hydraulic filter - standard flow

•

Hydraulic filter - high flow (optional)

•

Transmission filter (synchromesh only)

•

Every 250 hours

435/485/535

Drain

•

Every 50 hours

Adjust

•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Lubrication & Maintenance Chart

Service Interval

No.

Operation

Every 500 hours (cont)

Hydraulic tank breather

Auxiliary fuel filter (optional)

Differential oil

•

Planetary hub oil

•

Axle mount bolts

•

Drawbar wear block

•

Steam clean tractor

Transmission oil (CAT TA22)

Transmission suction screen (CAT TA22)

Engine inner/outer air element

•

Cab air filter

•

Every 1200 hours

Transmission oil (1407 Twindisc)

•

Every 1500 hours

Coolant system filter

•

Transmission oil (Synchromesh)

Transmission suction screen (Synchromesh)

Transmission mounts

Hydraulic oil

Engine mounts

•

Engine turbo connections

•

Radiator and heating system hoses

•

Cab mounts

•

Every 2000 hours

Engine coolant

•

Indicated by warning light

Engine air cleaner outer air element

•

As required

Front road light bulbs

•

Work light bulbs

•

Turn signal/hazard light bulbs

•

Brake/road light bulb

•

Extremity light bulbs

•

HID light bulbs - front

•

HID light bulbs - rear

•

Dome light bulbs

•

Right console light

•

Trouble light bulb

Rear deck covers

77/78

Fuses and relays

Every 1000 hours

Check

Clean

Lube

Change

Adjust

Drain

•
•

•
•
•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•

Windshield washer fluid

•

Windshield wiper blade

Cab floor

•

Cab seat and upholstery

•

Ether canister

Fuel tanks

Rear fenders

Storage

•

•
•
•
•

•

(* During the first 250 hours of operation.)

435/485/535

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily

Every 10 Hours
Operation 1
Clean the Front Grille, Hydraulic Cooler, Transmission
Cooler, Air-Conditioning Condenser, Charge Air Cooler
and Fuel Cooler
Access to the components can be gained by opening
the front grille screen. To open the front grille, lift the
latch (1) and swing the grille outward until it locks in
the fully open position.

The grille screen locking arm (2) must be released
before closing the grille.

F4-5

Lift the latch lever (3) upward and swing the fuel
cooler/condenser assembly outward using the crossbar
(4).

The condenser (5), fuel cooler (6), charge air cooler
(7), Hydraulic oil cooler (8) and grille screen (9) are
now exposed and can be thoroughly cleaned using
compressed air. Remove any chaff or debris that has
accumulated in the fins of the components.

Blowing compressed air in both directions through the
fins will clean the components completely. Make sure
that all perimeters of the components are cleaned.
Inspect the coolers for any sign of leakage or
damage.
NOTE: Never use a high-pressure washer to clean out
radiator fins. The fins will be bent over and the radiator
core rendered useless.

9
3
5

4
F4-6

435/485/535

4-
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily

Release the latch (1) and open the access doors on
either side of the radiator to gain access to the cavity
between the radiator and the intercooler/oil cooler (2).
Remove any chaff or debris that has accumulated in
the fins of the components and thoroughly clean using
compressed air.

1
CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE EYE INJURY,
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN USING
COMPRESSED AIR. DEBRIS PROPELLED BY HIGHPRESSURE AIR CAN ENTER THE EYES AND CAUSE
SERIOUS INJURY.

F4-7

Operation 2
Check the Engine Coolant Level
The level of coolant in the engine can be easily
checked without removing the radiator cap.
To check the coolant level, open the left engine
shield and look at the sight glass (3) located at the
top left corner of the radiator. Engine coolant should
completely fill the sight glass.

F4-8

435/485/535

4-10
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
If the engine coolant is low, add coolant through the
radiator cap (1) accessed on top of the hood.

1
CAUTION: THE COOLING SYSTEM OPERATES
UNDER PRESSURE WHICH IS CONTROLLED BY
THE RADIATOR CAP. IT IS DANGEROUS TO REMOVE
THE CAP WHILE THE SYSTEM IS HOT. ALWAYS
TURN THE CAP SLOWLY TO THE FIRST STOP
AND ALLOW THE PRESSURE TO ESCAPE BEFORE
REMOVING THE CAP ENTIRELY. WEAR GLOVES
WHEN REMOVING THE CAP.
The coolant added to the engine must meet specific
requirements. Use a low silicate antifreeze which meets
Engineering Standard GM 6038-M, or which contains
no more than 0.1% anhydrous alkali metasilicate and
meets either Engineering Standard GM 1825-M or
GM 1899-M, which are performance specifications.
NOTE: Factory fill is a fully formulated coolant mixture
(pink in color). Propylene or ethylene glycol can be
mixed in the cooling system.

F4-9

NOTE: Propylene glycol antifreeze protection levels
CANNOT be checked using the same hydrometer as
would be used with ethylene glycol antifreeze.
You must check the concentration level using a
refractometer. Both propylene and ethylene glycol
protection levels (of a mixture of both) can be measured
with the refractometer (P/N: CC2806).

Use soft water in the coolant mixture. Contaminants
in hard water neutralize the corrosion inhibitor
components. Water must not exceed 300 ppm
hardness, or contain more than 100 ppm of either
chloride or sulphate.

Antifreeze

F4-67

Antifreeze must be used in any climate for both
freeze and boiling point protection. Cummins Engine
Company, Inc. recommends a 50% concentration level,
40% - 60% range of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol
in most climates. Antifreeze at 68% concentration
provides the maximum freeze protection and must
never be exceeded under any condition. Antifreeze
protection decreases above 68%.

Ethylene Glycol

Propylene Glycol

40%

-23°C (-10°F)

-21°C (-6°F)

50%

-37°C (-34°F)

-33°C (-27°F)

60%

-54°C (-65°F)

-40°C (-56°F)

68%

-71°C (-90°F)

-63°C (-82°F)

435/485/535

Once the protection level of the coolant is decided
(ratio of water to antifreeze), the mixture must contain
one unit of Cummins DCA4 (dry chemical additive)
per gallon of coolant. A DCA unit is equal to 42.5
g (1.5 dry ounces) or120 ml (4 liquid ounces). Your
Buhler Versatile dealer can assist you in obtaining the
DCA4 additive.
IMPORTANT: Failure to maintain DCA4 in the cooling
system will cause cooling system corrosion and engine
failure.
IMPORTANT: The concentration of DCA4 should be
checked with a test kit, available from Cummins /
Fleetguard or through your Buhler Versatile dealer
(P/N: CC2602).
IMPORTANT: Do not add cold coolant to a hot engine.
Engine castings can be damaged. Allow the engine to
cool to below 50° C (120° F).

4-11
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Operation 3
Check the Fan/Water Pump Belt Tension
The engine fan and water pump share the same drive
belt (2). A self adjusting spring-loaded idler (1) keeps
a constant tension on the belt. If the belt is found to
be loose, check the pivot of the spring-loaded idler for
binding. If the spring-loaded idler is operating fine,
belt replacement maybe necessary.

If the belt requires replacement, install a square end
of a 19 mm (3/4") breaker bar into the slot of the idler
and release the spring tension by pushing down on the
wrench. Slip the old belt off the engine pulleys and
install a new belt. Release the wrench and allow the
spring-loaded idler to apply belt tension.

Replacement Fan/Water Pump Belt P/N: 86033867

Operation 4
Check the Tension on Alternator/A/C Compressor Belt

The alternator and AC compressor share the same
drive belt (4). A self adjusting spring-loaded idler (3)
keeps a constant tension on the belt. If the belt is
found to be loose, check the pivot of the spring-loaded
idler for binding. If the spring-loaded idler is operating
fine, belt replacement maybe necessary.
NOTE: The fan/water pump belt has to be removed
first to gain access - see above.
If the belt requires replacement, install a square end
of a 13 mm (1/2") breaker bar into the slot of the idler
and release the spring tension by pushing up on the
wrench. Slip the old belt off the engine pulleys and
install a new belt. Release the wrench and allow the
spring-loaded idler to apply belt tension.

F4-10

Replacement Alternator/A/C Compressor Belt
P/N: 86033868
NOTE: Drive belts are available from your Buhler
Versatile dealer.

2
4

NOTE: Refer to your Cummins Engine Manual for
more information regarding belt replacement, wear
guidelines, and pulley alignment.
Figure F4-24 shows the correct routing of the belts.
• Fan/water pump belt (2)
• Alternator/AC compressor belt (4)
F4-24

435/485/535

4-12
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Operation 5
Check the Engine Oil Level
Check the engine oil level using the dipstick located
on the left side of the engine. This should be done
after the engine has been turned off and oil in the
lubrication system has had time to drain back into the
oil pan.
Unscrew the dipstick handle (1) and pull the dipstick
from the tube. The dipstick is marked to show the
minimum (ADD) instead of (L) and maximum (FULL)
oil level for the engine. If additional oil is needed in
the engine, unscrew the filler cap handle (2) and add
oil as necessary.

F4-11

NOTE: The vehicle must be level when checking the
oil level.
IMPORTANT: Never operate the engine with the oil
level below the ADD mark or above the FULL mark.
Wait at least five minutes after shutting off the engine
to check the oil. This allows time for the oil to drain
to the oil pan.
NOTE: The engine is filled with 10W-30 oil at the
factory. This weight oil aids in coldweather starting at
the manufacturing facility. SAE 15W-40 oil as listed
is the preferred viscosity oil for normal operation.
Buhler Versatile and Cummins Engine Co. recommend
the use of a high quality SAE 15W-40 heavy-duty
engine oil with an API classification of CE or CF-4 for
most applications.
Additional information on engine oil use under extreme
conditions (hot or cold weather) can be found in the
Cummins Engine Manual provided with the tractor.

Operation 6
Drain the Fuel Filter
During operation, the fuel filter on the engine will
separate water that may be in the fuel system.
Accumulated water and contaminants must be drained
from the fuel filter by opening the small plastic valve
(3) on the bottom of the filter, and draining fluid out
into a suitable container until clean fuel runs from the
valve. Close the valve and hand tighten only.

3
435/485/535

F4-12

4-13
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Operation 7
Drain the Auxiliary Fuel Filter (Optional)

Tractors fitted with an auxiliary fuel filter (1) require
that the filter be drained of separated water. Visually
inspect the collection bowl (2) and drain off any water
and contaminants into a suitable container by opening
the small plastic valve (3) on the bottom of the filter
bowl (3). Drain until clean fuel runs from the valve.
Close the valve and hand tighten only.

F4-66

Operation 8
Check the Hydraulic Oil Level
The oil level in the hydraulic oil reservoir must be
maintained to ensure proper operation of the hydraulic
system.

The hydraulic oil reservoir tank located on the left side
of the engine compartment incorporates a sight gauge
(1) mounted on it’s front face. The sight gauge is
marked with an “ADD” and “FULL” line indicating oil
level. If additional hydraulic oil is required, remove the
cap (2) from the filler tube and add oil as necessary.
When checking oil level, take into consideration
the implement attached to the tractor. Depending
on whether the implement is in a raised or lowered
position, the tank level could be above or below the
optimum level.

F4-15

435/485/535

4-14
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Operation 9
Check the Transmission Oil Level

When checking the transmission oil, ensure the
following:
• Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a
level surface with the engine shut off.
•

With cold oil, the oil level should show in the sight
glass section designated as cold. Add oil if
necessary to bring the oil level to the bottom of the
cold section of the sight glass.

•

With hot oil, the oil level should show in the sight
glass section designated as hot. Add oil if necessary
to bring the oil level to the bottom of the hot section
of the sight glass.

F4-16

Synchromesh Transmission

The oil level for the Synchromesh transmission is easily
checked by looking at the sight gauge (1) located on
the rear lower left corner of the transmission case.
The sight gauge has an “ADD” and “FULL” line
indicated on it. If additional transmission oil is
required, remove the cap (2) from the filler tube and
add oil as necessary.
1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission
The oil level for the 1407 Twindisc Powershift
transmission is checked by looking at the sight gauge
located on the rear lower left corner of the transmission
case (3). If additional transmission oil is required,
remove the cap (4) from the filler tube and add oil as
necessary.

F4-17

1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission

CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission
The oil level for the CAT TA22 Powershift transmission
is checked by looking at the sight gauge located on the
rear lower right corner of the transmission case (5).
If additional transmission oil is required, remove the
cap (6) from the filler tube and add oil as necessary.
NOTE: Do not operate the transmission with oil levels
above or below the recommended settings. Either
condition can result in overheating or loss of power
and damage to the equipment.

435/485/535

F4-99

CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission

4-15
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Operation 10
Parking Brake Adjustment
The foot and parking brake unit is self-adjusting and
requires no maintenance.
Engaging and disengaging the parking brake lever
(1) several times will activate the self-adjusting
mechanism within the caliper and keep the brake in
proper adjustment. This will ensure a proper set point
for the brake to stop the tractor and hold it on an
incline when parked.

F4-18

Visually inspect the brake rotors front and rear (2) for
nicks or damage and the brake pads for wear. The
pads (3) must be replaced if they are worn to 1 mm
(1/32") or less. Consult your Buhler Versatile dealer for
assistance in replacement of the brake rotor or pads.

WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE BRAKES ARE IN
GOOD WORKING ORDER BEFORE OPERATING THE
TRACTOR.

2
2

F4-19

Operation 11
Lubricate the Lower Articulation Pin
Lubricate the grease fitting (4) until grease flows
from around the pin seals. This will purge any dirt
accumulated in the pivot pin area.
Start the unit and articulate from side to side to work
the grease into the joint.
Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

4
F4-20

435/485/535

4-16
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours
Operation 12

Lubricate the Front Steering Cylinder Pins
Lubricate the two grease fittings (1) (one on each side)
until grease flows from around the pin seals.
This will purge any dirt accumulated in the pivot pin
area.
Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

F4-20

Operation 13
Lubricate the Rear Steering Cylinder Pins
Lubricate the bottom two grease fittings (2) (one on
each side) until grease flows from around the pin
seals. This will purge any dirt accumulated in the
pivot pin area.
Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

2
F4-21

Operation 14
Lubricate the Upper Articulation Pin
Lubricate the grease fitting (3) until grease flows from
between the frame pieces. This will purge any dirt
accumulated in the pivot pin area.
Start the unit and articulate from side to side to work
the grease into the joint.
Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

3
F4-22

435/485/535

4-17
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Operation 15
Lubricate the Front Drag Link Pins
Lubricate the grease fittings (one on each side) (1)
until grease flows from around the pin seals. This will
purge any dirt accumulated in the pivot pin area.
Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

F4-22

Operation 16
Lubricate the Rear Drag Link Pins
Lubricate the top two grease fittings (2) remotely
mounted on the left rear frame, until grease flows
from around the pin seals. This will purge any dirt
accumulated in the pivot pin area.

Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

F4-21

Operation 17
Lubricate the Rear Axle Drive Shaft Steady Bearing

Lubricate the grease fitting (3) until grease flows from
the bearing area. This will purge any dirt accumulated
in this area.
Use Moly base grease (NLGI 1 Lithium, Moly).

F4-23

435/485/535

4-18
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 10 Hours or daily
Operation 18
Air Intake Piping / Charge Air piping

Inspect the air intake piping, daily, for cracked hoses,
loose clamps, or punctures that could damage the
engine with particular attention to the two connections
(1&2) between the air cleaner and turbocharger.
Tighten or replace parts, as necessary, to make sure
the air intake system does not leak.
Torque Value: 8.5 N·m (75 in-lbs)
Check for corrosion of the intake system piping
under the clamps and hoses. Corrosion can allow
corrosive products and dirt to enter the intake system.
Disassemble and clean as required.

F4-13

F4-14

Inspect the two charge air pipes (3) and four connection
hoses (4) for cracks, loose clamps, or punctures that
could damage the engine.

Tighten or replace parts, as necessary, to make sure
the charge air system does not leak.
Torque Value: 7.35 N·m (65 in-lbs)

F4-98

435/485/535

4-19
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 50 Hours
Operation 19
Clean the Cab Air Filter
The cab air filter (1) located on the underside of cab
roof above the rear window. It must be cleaned to keep
the cab air system operating at maximum efficiency.
Note: In humid conditions, such as occur on most
early mornings, do not switch on the blower prior to
servicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into the filter
may be difficult to remove without washing.

Note: The filter is made of specially treated paper with
a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper surface.
Do not damage the element during removal.
To remove the cab air filter, unscrew the knob (2).
This will release the filter frame (3) allowing it to
swing down sufficiently to remove the filter. Remove
the filter element and check the seal (4) around it’s
perimeter for nicks or cracks. Replace the element if
any damage is found.

F4-25

The filter element may be cleaned using either method
A or B depending on the condition of the element.
Method A
Clean the element with compressed air not exceeding
2 bar (30 PSI). Hold the nozzle at least 300mm (12")
from the filter to prevent damage to the paper pleats.
Direct the compressed air through the filter opposite
the normal air flow.

4
2

WARNING: Wear eye protection and a face
mask when carrying out this operation.
Method B

1. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm water
containing a mild detergent.
2. Rinse the filter with running water below 1.4 bar
(20 PSI).
3. Shake off excess water and allow to air dry.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter with heat
or compressed air and do not install until thoroughly
dry as the filter may rupture. It is recommended that
a new filter is installed at this service and the washed
one put aside for installation at a subsequent service.
Store the spare filter in a dry place and wrap it to
prevent dust contamination or damage.

F4-26

435/485/535

4-20
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 50 Hours
NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently when
operating in extremely dusty conditions.
NOTE: Replace the filter when holes or tears are
visible.
NOTE: The element may be washed a maximum of 10
times.
Reinstall the filter into its frame. Lift the assembly in
to place and lock in position using the knob (2).

WARNING: The cab air filter is designed
to remove dust from the air but will
not exclude chemical vapor. Follow the
chemical
manufacturers
directions
regarding protection from dangerous
chemicals.

Operation 20
Check the Differential Oil Level
Differential oil level must be maintained to provide
adequate lubrication and cooling to the differential
components.
Check the differential oil level in both axles when the
tractor is on a level surface and has been stationary
for one hour to allow the oil in each of the axles and
planetary hubs to level out.
Each axle housing has a convenient sight gauge (5)
located on the right half of the axle when facing the
differential input. The oil level in the gauge should
be even with the center of plug (6). If additional
differential oil is required, remove the plug (6) and
add oil as necessary.
Torque Value: 61-75 N·m (45-55 ft-lbs)
Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250")
Buhler Versatile recommends 85W140 GL5 oil be used
in temperatures above or 80W90 GL5 in temperatures
below 0°C (32°F).

435/485/535

F4-27

4-21
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 50 Hours
Operation 21

Clean the Alternator
Clean the fine dust accumulated in the alternator (1)
with compressed air.

Warning: Wear appropriate eye and face
protection when using compressed air.
Flying dirt and debRis can cause personal
injury.

Operation 22
Check the Tire Air Pressure

F4-41

It is extremely important that tires (singles, duals, or
triples) are kept at proper inflation pressures, based
on the load being carried by the tires.
A special tire gauge capable of measuring low pressure,
0 to 1.4 bar (0 to 20 PSI) is required.
NOTE: If the tires are ballasted with a calcium
chloride/water solution, check pressure with the valve
stem at the top of the tire.
See the “Tire Load and Inflation Tables” in Section 6
of this manual for the proper inflation pressures.

Operation 23

Check the Planetary Hub Oil Level
The oil in the four planetary hubs (two on each axle)
must be maintained at the proper level to provide
lubrication for the outboard planetaries.
To check the planetary hub oil level, rotate the tire
so that the plugs (2 & 3) are in the 3 or 9 o’clock
position. Remove the drain plug (3) and see if oil runs
out or is level with the plug opening. If no oil runs
out, the hub requires oil. Remove the fill plug (2) and
add oil until it runs out of the check plug (3). Replace
both plugs.
Torque Value: 61-75 N·m (45-55 ft-lbs)
Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250")
Check the differential oil level when the tractor is on
a level surface and has been stationary for one hour
to allow the oil in the axle and planetary hubs to level
out.

F4-28

Buhler Versatile recommends 85W140 GL5 oil
be used in temperatures above 0°C (32°F) or
80W90 GL5 in temperatures below 0°C (32°F).

435/485/535

4-22
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 250 Hours

Every 250 Hours
Operation 24
Change the Engine Oil and Filter
To change the engine oil and filter, operate the engine
until the coolant temperature reaches 60° C (140° F).
Shut off the engine.
There are two oil plugs (3) located on the bottom of
the oil pan. Either plug can be removed to drain the
oil. Drain the oil completely to make sure all the oil
and suspended contaminates are removed from the
engine.

NOTE: All model tractors use one single oil filter
mounted on the right-hand side of the engine.
Clean the area around the oil filter head (4). Unscrew
the old filter (5) and discard.
F4-37

Clean the sealing surface of the filter head. The O-ring
may stick on the filter head. Make sure it is removed.
NOTE: Fill the new filter with clean engine oil. (The
lack of lubrication during the delay until the filter is
charged with oil is harmful to the engine). Apply a
light film of oil to the gasket sealing surface before
installing the new filter.
Install the new filter on the filter head. Tighten the
filter until the gasket contacts the filter head surface.
Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn.
NOTE: Over-tightening can distort the threads or
damage the filter element seal. Do not use tools to
tighten the filter.
Clean and check the oil drain plug threads and the
sealing surface. Install and tighten the oil drain plug.
Torque Value: 47 N·m (35 ft-lbs)
Wrench size: 3/4"
Fill the engine with high quality 15W-40 multiviscosity oil to the proper level as indicated by the
dipstick. The oil change capacity (oil pan and filter
filled to capacity) is 45.4 L (12 Gal).
NOTE: The engine is filled with 10W-30 oil at the
factory. This weight of oil aids coldweather starting at
the manufacturing facility. SAE 15W-40 oil as listed
is the preferred viscosity oil for normal operation.
Operate the engine at idle speed and inspect for leaks
at the filters and drain plugs.

435/485/535

5
F4-29

NOTE: Engine oil pressure must be indicated on the
EIC display within 10 seconds after starting. If oil
pressure is not registered within 10 seconds, shut
off the engine immediately to avoid engine damage.
Confirm the correct oil level in the oil pan.
Shut off the engine. Wait approximately five minutes
to let the oil drain from the upper parts of the engine.
Check the oil level again.
Add oil as necessary to bring the oil level to the (FULL)
mark on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT: Discard used engine oil according to
local laws and regulations.

4-23
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 250 Hours
Operation 25
Change the Fuel Filter

3
WARNING: FUEL IS FLAMMABLE. KEEP ALL
CIGARETTES, FLAMES, PILOT LIGHTS, WELDING
EQUIPMENT, AND SWITCHES OUT OF THE WORK
AREA AND AREAS SHARING VENTILATION TO
AVOID SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
WHEN WORKING ON THE FUEL SYSTEM.

Clean the area around the fuel filter head and filter
(3). Disconnect the wiring harness from the water-infuel sensor (4).
Unscrew and discard the old fuel filter (5).
Use a clean, lint-free towel to clean the filter head
gasket surface.
Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the gasket
surface and the O-ring in the center of the fuel filter.

4
F4-12

CAUTION: Mechanical overtightening of the
filter can distort the threads or damage
the filter element seal.
NOTE: The engine is equipped with a priming pump
and does not require the fuel filter to be filled prior
to the installation if the following filling procedure is
followed.
Install the new filter onto the filter head. Tighten the
filter until the gasket contacts the filter head surface.
Tighten the filter an additional 3/4 of a turn after the
gasket contacts the filter head surface, or as specified
by the filter manufacturer.

Operation 26
Check the Engine Supplemental Coolant
The SCA protection additive level must also be checked
whenever coolant is added or the cooling system filter
is changed.
A test kit, complete with instructions, to check the
concentration level is available from your Cummins
dealer.
Follow the instructions in the kit to maintain proper
SCA protection level.

NOTE: If the filter is equipped with a water-in-fuel
sensor, rotate the sensor to desired location, and reconnect the wiring harness.
To prime the fuel filter, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position and leave for two minutes. The engine
can then be started.
NOTE: The engine will, perhaps, run rough for several
minutes until the air is out of the system.
Replacement fuel filter element P/N: 86034027

435/485/535

4-24
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 250 Hours
Operation 27

The transmission filter is a spin-on type and is removed
by turning it counterclockwise.
NOTE: Dispose of used oil filters in accordance with
federal, provincial, state, local laws and environmental
regulations.

1
®

The transmission filter (1) is located behind the
transmission.

Donaldson

Change the Transmission Oil Filter (CAT TA22)

To install the new filter, lubricate the O-ring on top of
the new filter with clean transmission oil. Install the
filter to the filter head, hand-tightening until the seal
contacts the filter head. Tighten the filter an additional
1/2 to 3/4 turn.

F4-100

NOTE: Some oil, approximately 2 L (4 qt.), may be
lost when the filter changed. Be sure to replenish the
lost oil.
Start the engine and check for leaks at the filter.
Replacement transmission filter P/N: 86034346
NOTE: Do not operate the transmission with oil levels
above or below the recommended levels. Either
condition can result in overheating or loss of power
and damage to the equipment.

Operation 28
Optional - Change the Transmission Oil after first
250 hours of operation (CAT TA22)

Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level
surface with the engine shut off.
Operate the tractor a sufficient amount of time to
warm up the transmission oil. Remove the drain plug
(2) from the transmission housing and allow the oil to
drain into a pan.
Clean the drain plug with a none flammable cleaning
solvent.
Replace the drain plug and torque to 108 N.m
(80 ft-lbs ± 5%). Refill the transmission with new oil
through the fill tube (3) to the proper level as indicated
by the sight gauge (4).

F4-101

NOTE: 3.8 L (1 US gal) of transmission oil will raise
the level in the sight gauge 10 mm (0.4 inch).
Visually inspect the transmission for leaks. Check for
leaks under the transmission and around the drain
plug.

435/485/535

F4-99

4-25
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 250 Hours
Operation 29
Clean the Transmission Breather (CAT TA22 only)

The transmission breather (1) is located on the upper
rear side of the transmission. Unscrew and remove the
breather.
Clean the breather in clean, nonflammable solvent.
Re-install the breather.

F4-102

Operation 30
Check the Air-Conditioner Drain Hoses
A/C drain hoses are routed down inside the front cab
door posts (two per side) and exit below the front
frame.
Withdraw the hoses and inspect the dust valves (2)
fitted to the end of each tube. Ensure that they are
sealing properly and that condensation from the
A/C can drain away. Clean when necessary. If the dust
valves are missing, replace. Refit drain tubes between
the fender and frame.
NOTE: Blocked drain tubes can lead to the A/C unit
filling with condensation and leaking into the roof
headliner causing damage to electrical components.

2
F4-32

435/485/535

4-26
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 250 Hours
Operation 31
Check the Air-Conditioner Sight Glass

The air-conditioner sight glass should be checked to
see if the system is functioning properly.
The receiver/drier (1) is located on the rear, left hand
hood support. Check the sight glass (2) on the top of
the receiver tank every 250 hours. If clear, the system
is in good condition; if bubbles flow across the sight
glass with the engine running, the system may be low
on refrigerant. If the glass is cloudy, it is an indication
that the system is contaminated with moisture. When
moisture is present, the dryer will have to be replaced
by a qualified air-conditioning service technicians.
Contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

WARNING: NEVER LOOSEN, OR DISCONNECT
ANY OF THE HOSES IN THE AIR-CONDITIONING
SYSTEM.
THE AIR-CONDITIONER HOSES ARE UNDER
PRESSURE AT ALL TIMES, EVEN WHEN THE
TRACTOR IS NOT RUNNING.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM. IT IS POSSIBLE
TO SUFFER SEVERE FROSTBITE OR INJURY
FROM
ESCAPING
REFRIGERANT.
SPECIAL
EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS ARE REQUIRED
TO SERVICE THE AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
WHICH USES R134A REFRIGERANT. SEE YOUR
AUTHORIZED BUHLER VERSATILE DEALER

435/485/535

F4-31

4-27
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 250 Hours
Operation 32
Check the Weight Kit (Optional) Hardware Torques

Check the hardware securing the front, upper rear and
rear weight brackets and weights to the tractor.
Front weight kit - Check the ten flanged nuts (1)
securing the bracket to the tractor and torque to
633 N·m (467 ft-lbs).
Check the weight mounting bolts (2) securing the
weights to the weight bracket and torque to 480 N·m
(354 ft-lbs).

Check the tie rod nuts (3) and torque to 633 N·m
(467 ft-lbs).

1
F4-32

Rear weight kit
Check the eight bolts (4) securing the bracket to the
tractor and torque to 633 N·m (467 ft-lbs).
The rear weights are mounted using the same
procedure as the front weight kit. Check the weight
mounting bolts (2) securing the weights to the weight
bracket and torque to 480 N·m (354 ft-lbs).

Check the tie rod nuts (3) and torque to 633 N·m
(467 ft-lbs).

F4-68

Upper rear weight kit (not shown)
Check the six bolts (5) securing the bracket to the
tractor and torque to 633 N·m (467 ft-lbs).
The upper rear weights are mounted using the
same procedure as the front weight kit. Check the
weight mounting nuts (2) securing the weights
to the weight bracket and torque to 480 N·m
(354 ft-lbs).

Check the tie rod nuts (3) and torque to 633 N·m
(467 ft-lbs).
Wrench size: 30 mm

Operation 33
Check the Wheel Hardware Torque
All wheel mounting hardware must be checked for
proper torque. The following chart shows wheel
torques, based on wheel configuration.
Wrench size: 30 mm
NOTE: For identification of particular hardware
components, see Operation 75 later in this section.

F4-69

Configuration

Torques

Singles

Wheel to Hub Nuts
710 N·m (525 ft-lbs.)

Standard and Special
Row Crop Drum Duals

Wheel to Hub Nuts
710 N·m (525 ft-lbs.)

Drum Style Triples

Wheel to Hub Nuts
710 N·m (525 ft-lbs.)
Center Wheel to Outer
Wheel Nuts
710 N·m (525 ft-lbs.)

435/485/535

4-28
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 300 Hours
Operation 34
Change the Transmission Oil Filter
(1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission Only)
The transmission filter (1) is located inside the front
frame on the right side of the tractor directly below
the engine.
The transmission filter is a spin-on type and is removed
by turning it counterclockwise.
NOTE: Dispose of used oil filters in accordance with
federal, provincial, state, local laws and environmental
regulations.
To install the new filter, lubricate the O-ring on top of
the new filter with clean transmission oil. Install the
filter to the filter head, hand-tightening until the seal
contacts the filter head. Tighten the filter an additional
1/2 to 3/4 turn.
NOTE: Some oil, approximately 0.95 L (1 qt.), may be
lost when the filter is unscrewed from the filter head.
Be sure to replenish the lost oil.
Start the engine and check for leaks at the filter.
Replacement transmission filter P/N: 86029162

435/485/535

1
F4-55

4-29
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 35
Clean the Battery Connections

The battery connections must be cleaned and tightened
to maintain proper operation of the electrical system
of the tractor.
Remove the three battery ground cable connections,
(1) first, and then the three positive cable connections,
(2) before cleaning. Each connection has a rubber
boot covering it for protection. The connections are
loosened by turning the nut counterclockwise and
pulling the connection from the battery mounting
stud.
Clean the battery stud, battery cable and mounting
nut thoroughly with a brush and reinstall the cables.
Attach the positive cables first and the ground cables
last.

F4-39

(Battery cover omitted for clarity)

CAUTION: WHEN SERVICING THE BATTERIES,
DISCONNECT THE NEGATIVE (BLACK) CABLES
BEFORE THE POSITIVE (RED) CABLES. WHEN
CONNECTING THE CABLES, CONNECT THE
POSITIVE CABLE FIRST, THEN THE NEGATIVE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE POSSIBILITY OF SPARKING
AND BATTERY EXPLOSION.

WARNING: ALL BATTERIES GENERATE HYDROGEN
GAS, WHICH IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. IF
IGNITED BY A SPARK OR FLAME, THE GAS MAY
EXPLODE VIOLENTLY CAUSING A SPRAY OF ACID,
FRAGMENTATION OF THE BATTERY, AND POSSIBLE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY, PARTICULARLY TO
THE EYES.
THEREFORE, AS A SAFETY PRECAUTION:
• WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND GOGGLES.
• DO NOT SMOKE OR EXPOSE THE BATTERY TO
OPEN FLAME.
• DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT LIVE
CIRCUITS.
If the batteries require removal, disconnect the cables
as previously detailed. Loosen the wing nuts (3) and
lower the clamps (4) downward. Lift the battery to be
removed from the battery tray.

435/485/535

4-30
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 36

Check the Battery Electrolyte Level
To check the battery electrolyte level, clean the top of
the batteries with a damp cloth.
Remove the six fill plugs (5) from each battery. Check
that the electrolyte level is 6 mm (1/4") below the
filler neck of each cell. Add distilled or demineralized
water as required. Do not overfill.
Replace all fill plugs.
Check for loose cable connections. Tighten as
required.

F4-40

WARNING: BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC
ACID. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH SKIN, FLUSH THE
AFFECTED AREA WITH WATER FOR FIVE MINUTES.
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.
WARNING: AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES
OR CLOTHING. WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN
WORKING NEAR BATTERIES.

Operation 37
Check the Starter Battery Connections

Check to be sure that the battery cable connection
(1) and the ground connection (2) are tight and clean
where they attach to the engine starter. Clean and
tighten as necessary.
The starter is located on the left side of the engine.

1
WARNING: DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES AT
THE BATTERY BEFORE WORKING ON THE BATTERY
CABLE CONNECTIONS AT THE STARTER.

435/485/535

F4-38

4-31
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 38

Clean the Engine Air Precleaner
The engine air precleaner must be checked to be
sure that debris is not causing any obstruction at the
precleaner inlet.

To inspect the inlet to the precleaner, loosen the two
hose clamps (1) attaching boot (2) to the air cleaner
tube (3) and the precleaner (4).

2
4
F4-34

Slide the boot toward the front of the tractor on the
tube. Inspect the inlet (5) of the precleaner, and
remove any debris accumulated in this area.
After the precleaner is cleaned, reinstall the boot and
tighten the hose clamps securely.

5
F4-35

Loosen the clamp (6) and disconnect the aspirator
hose (7) where it connects to the precleaner aspirator
tube.

7
6

Inspect by looking down inside the precleaner aspirator
tube and remove any accumulated debris. Check that
the flapper door (8) is operating properly.

8
F4-34

435/485/535

4-32
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 39
Clean the Hydraulic Suction Screen
The hydraulic suction screen (1) is located in the rear
of the hydraulic oil reservoir tank.
Remove the drain plug (2) and drain the hydraulic oil
from the hydraulic oil reservoir tank before removing
the suction screen.

1
3
PO

ING
RN
WA SSIBLE H

n
ing
RD
OID
AV RY O by shortngine can
U
he
e
.E
INJ
ngin inals ove w ed.
ss
rt e
m
sta er term can by-pa
e
rt
not
Do ss sta achin itch is
r’s
o
m
rato and
acr and fety sw
ope utral
rt
sta
g sa
from in ne
rtin
n
nly
sta
d
e o issio
ngin ansm applie
rt e
tr
Sta t with g brake
sea parkin
the

To remove the suction screen, first clean the top of the
tank where the hydraulic hose attaches to the suction
screen port.

T
EA

Unscrew and remove the hose (3).
Unscrew and remove the suction screen (1).
Cover the open fitting (4) to prevent contaminants
entering the tank.

F4-46

Use a cleaning solvent to wash any debris from the
suction screen.
Reinstall the suction screen (1) into the tank and
tighten securely. Reinstall the hose (3) into suction
screen and tighten securely.

Refit the drain plug (2) tighten securely.
Torque Value: 81 N·m (60 ft-lbs)
Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250")
Refill the hydraulic oil reservoir tank to the correct
level.

F4-45

3
1
4

F4-47

435/485/535

4-33
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 40
Change the Hydraulic Oil Filter - (Standard Flow)

The Standard Flow hydraulic filter (1) is located inside
the front frame on the right side of the tractor directly
below the engine.
The hydraulic filter is a spin-on type and is removed
by turning it counterclockwise.
NOTE: Dispose of used oil filters in accordance with
federal, provincial, state, local laws and environmental
regulations.
To install the new filter, lubricate the O-ring on top
of the new filter with clean hydraulic oil. Install the
filter to the filter head, hand-tightening until the seal
contacts the filter head. Tighten the filter an additional
1/2 to 3/4 turn.

F4-55

NOTE: Some oil, approximately 1.9 L (2 qts.), may be
lost when the filter is unscrewed from the filter head.
Be sure to replenish the lost oil.
Start the engine and check for leaks at the filter.
Replacement hydraulic filter - standard P/N: 86033080

Operation 41

Operation 42

Change the Hydraulic Oil Filter - (Vehicle fitted with
High Flow option)

Change the Transmission Oil Filter
(Synchromesh Transmission Only)

The High Flow hydraulic filter (2) is located inside
the front frame on the right side of the tractor directly
below the engine.

The transmission filter (3) is located inside the front
frame on the right side of the tractor directly below
the engine.

The hydraulic filter is a spin-on type and is removed
by turning it counterclockwise.

The transmission filter is a spin-on type and is removed
by turning it counterclockwise.

NOTE: Dispose of used oil filters in accordance with
federal, provincial, state, local laws and environmental
regulations.

To install the new filter, lubricate the O-ring on top
of the new filter with clean hydraulic oil. Install the
filter to the filter head, hand-tightening until the seal
contacts the filter head. Tighten the filter an additional
1/2 to 3/4 turn.

NOTE: Some oil, approximately 1.9 L (2 qts.), may be
lost when the filter is unscrewed from the filter head.
Be sure to replenish the lost oil.

NOTE: Some oil, approximately 0.95 L (1 qt.), may be
lost when the filter is unscrewed from the filter head.
Be sure to replenish the lost oil.

Replacement hydraulic filter - high flow P/N: 86029146

Start the engine and check for leaks at the filter.
Replacement transmission filter P/N: 86029162

435/485/535

4-34
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 43
Clean the Hydraulic Tank Breather

The hydraulic tank breather (1) is located on the left
side of the engine above the hydraulic tank.
Remove the breather by loosening the mounting bolt
(2) and slide the breather mounting bracket clear.
Unscrew the breather from its hose (3). Clean the
breather using low pressure air, 1.7 bar (25 PSI) or
less.
Reinstall the breather using the reverse procedure.

1
3

Operation 44
Change the Auxiliary Fuel Filter (Optional)

F4-42

5
WARNING: FUEL IS FLAMMABLE. KEEP ALL
CIGARETTES, FLAMES, PILOT LIGHTS, WELDING
EQUIPMENT, AND SWITCHES OUT OF THE WORK
AREA AND AREAS SHARING VENTILATION TO
AVOID SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
WHEN WORKING ON THE FUEL SYSTEM.

Clean the area around the fuel filter cover (4).
Unscrew the T-handle (5) and remove the cover (6).
Remove the filter element by pulling upward on
the handles (7) with a twisting motion. Discard the
element.
Fit new filter element into filter body.
Remove the old O-rings from the cover (8) and
T-handle (9) and refit with new seals (supplied with the
new element). Lubricate the seal with a thin coating of
clean engine oil or diesel fuel before installation.
Replace the cover and tighten T-handle, by hand only.
Do not use tools.
NOTE: The engine is equipped with a priming pump
and does not require the fuel filter to be filled prior
to the installation if the following filling procedure is
followed.
To prime the fuel filter, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position and leave for two minutes. The engine
can then be started.
NOTE: The engine will, perhaps, run rough for several
minutes until the air is out of the system.

F4-66

5
9
6
8
7

Replacement auxiliary fuel filter P/N: 86033134
Start the engine and check for leaks at the filter.

435/485/535

F4-70

4-35
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 45
Change the Differential Oil

Before changing the differential oil, operate the tractor
a sufficient amount of time to warm up the oil in the
differentials. Loosen the check plug (1) and remove
the drain plug (2) allowing the oil to drain completely
from the differential housings.
Replace the drain plug (2) and tighten it to 74 N·m
(55 ft-lbs). Make sure the sealing surface on the plug
is in good condition.
Refill the differentials through the check plug (1) to
the proper level as indicated by the sight gauge (3).
Buhler Versatile recommends that 85W140 GL5 oil
be used in temperatures above 0°C (32°F) or 80W90
GL5 in temperatures below 0°C (32°F).

F4-44

NOTE: Oil will flow from the differential to the
planetary hubs. Change the oil with the tractor on a
level surface and allow the differential and planetary
hub oil to level out.

Operation 46
Change the Planetary Hub Oil
To drain the planetary hub oil, rotate the tire so that
the drain plug (4) is at the 6 o’clock position. Loosen
the fill plug (5) to allow all of the oil to drain from
the planetary hub. Make sure that the plug (4) is
retightened, and then refill the hub as detailed in
operation 23.
Torque Value: 61-75 N·m (45-55 ft-lbs)
Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250")
Buhler Versatile recommends that 85W140 GL5 oil
be used in temperatures above 0°C (32°F) or 80W90
GL5 in temperatures below 0°C (32°F).
NOTE: Oil will flow from the differential to the
planetary hubs. Change the oil with the tractor on a
level surface and allow the differential and planetary
hub oil to level out.

Operation 47
Check the Axle Mount Bolt Torque

4
F4-43

62
7

Check the axle mount bolts for proper torque.
Torque the nuts (6) and (7) to 1335 N·m
(1000 ft-lbs). There are four sets of nuts on each end
of both axles. Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250").
F4-48

435/485/535

4-36
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 500 Hours
Operation 48
Check the Drawbar Wear Blocks

Inspect the stop wear blocks (1) for excessive wear. If
there is wear on the blocks, rotate them 90° to provide
a new wear surface for the drawbar to ride against.

Measure the clearance between the top bridge plate
(2) and the drawbar support (3). If there is 3 mm
(1/8") or less clearance, replace the wear block under
the bridge plate.

Remove the stop wear blocks (1).
Support the drawbar (4) and remove the bridge plate
bolt (5). Lift off the top bridge plate (2). Replace the
wear block and reassemble the bridge plate. Torque
the bridge plate bolt (5) to 952 N·m (702 ft-lbs).
Replace the stop wear blocks (1).

1
F4-49

NOTE: The wear block under the bridge plate
is attached to the plate with four cap screws.
Be sure to reinstall the wear block cap screws during
reassembly.

Operation 49
Steam Cleaning the Tractor
If mud or debris is allowed to build up on the tractor,
it can cause a safety hazard as well as detract from
the appearance of the tractor.
Using a steam cleaner or high pressure washer, clean
the tractor from end to end, paying particular attention
to the underside and wheel area.

CAUTION: ALWAYS SHUT THE TRACTOR OFF WHEN
CLEANING OR SERVICING.

435/485/535

IMPORTANT: Never spray cold water on a hot tractor
engine. The sudden temperature change may cause
cracking of the cast iron components. The cold water
hitting the injection pump can cause the components
rotating inside the pump to seize due to the sudden
temperature change.
IMPORTANT: Do not use caustic soaps that can cause
damage to the paint finish on the tractor. Read the
manufacturer’s instructions carefully on the soap
package.
IMPORTANT: Do not spray high pressure water into
the cooler/radiator area of the front grille. Damage to
the cooling fins will result.

4-37
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1000 Hours
Operation 50
Change the Transmission Oil
(CAT TA22 Transmission)
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level
surface with the engine shut off.
Operate the tractor a sufficient amount of time to
warm up the transmission oil. Remove the drain plug
(1) from the transmission housing and allow the oil to
drain into a pan.
Replace the drain plug and torque to 108 N.m
(80 ft-lbs ± 5%). Refill the transmission with new oil
through the fill tube (2) to the proper level as indicated
by the sight gauge (3).

1
F4-101

NOTE: 3.8 L (1 US gal) of transmission oil will raise
the level in the sight gauge 10 mm (0.4 inch).

Visually inspect the transmission for leaks. Check for
leaks under the transmission and around the drain
plug.

Operation 51
Clean the Transmission Suction Screen
(CAT TA22 Transmission)
The CAT TA22 transmission has a removable sump
screen located on the right hand side/front of the
transmission case. To remove the suction screen,
proceed as follows:

F4-99

NOTE: It is not necessary to drain the transmission oil
before removing the suction screen.
Remove four bolts (4) and cover plate (5) from the
transmission housing.
Remove the O-ring (6) from the inside face of the
cover plate. Inspect the O-ring for condition before
refitting into the the groove on the inside face of the
cover plate. Replace the O-ring if it is damaged.

Remove the the suction (7) screen from the
transmission housing and clean with a none flammable
cleaning solvent.
Re-install the suction screen into the housing ensuring
that it seats properly.
Reinstall the cover plate (2) with four bolts (1) and
torque to 75 N.m (55 ft-lbs).

F4-103

435/485/535

4-38
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1000 Hours
Operation 52
Change the Engine Inner and Outer Air Cleaner
Elements
The engine air cleaner consists of a large outer element,
smaller safety element, and an exhaust aspirated
precleaner. The precleaner removes dirt from the air
and discharges it through the exhaust muffler.
IMPORTANT: When servicing the air cleaner, wear a
mask when changing the air filters. Do not breath in
dust.
To access the inner and outer elements, remove
the large wing nut (1) on the outside of the cover.
Remove the cover (2) from the air cleaner canister.

F4-50

Remove the outer element (3) by removing the wing
nut (4) and pulling the element from the canister.
Discard the old element.

F4-51

Remove the inner element (5) by removing the wing
nut (6) and pulling the element from the canister.
Discard the old element.
Clean the inside of the air cleaner body with a lint-free
towel before installing the element.

F4-52

435/485/535

4-39
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1000 Hours
Inspect the seal (1) on both new elements before
installing. Cracks or chips in the element sealing
rubber indicate that the element is defective and
must be replaced.

1
F4-53

Install the elements into the canister. Be sure that
the seal on the end of the filters fully contacts the air
cleaner body. The wing nuts (2) have a small seal (3)
on the inner face which should be in good condition
before the wing nuts are tightened. If the seals (3)
are damaged, replace them. Tighten the wing nuts
securely.

Replacement outer (Primary) element P/N: 86034042
Replacement inner (Safety) element P/N: 86034041
NOTE: Replacement elements can be obtained from
your Buhler Versatile dealer.

3
F4-54

435/485/535

4-40
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1000 Hours
Operation 53
Change the Cab Air Filter
The cab air filter (1) located on the rear of the cab
must be changed periodically to keep the cab air
system operating at maximum efficiency.

F4-25

To remove the cab air filter, unscrew the knob (2). This
will release the filter frame (3) allowing it to swing
down sufficiently to remove the filter.
Hold a light on one side of the new element and check
for ruptures. A pinpoint of light indicates a rupture
in the element paper. If this occurs, the element is
defective and must be replaced.
Install the new element into the frame and check
the seal (4) around the perimeter of the element for
nicks or cracks. Replace the element if any damage
is found.
Reinstall the filter into its frame. Lift the assembly
into place and lock in position using the knob (2).

4
2

Replacement cab air filter P/N: 86032161
NOTE: Replacement elements can be obtained from
your Buhler Versatile dealer.
F4-26

WARNING: The cab air filter is designed
to remove dust from the air but will
not exclude chemical vapor. Follow the
chemical
manufacturers
directions
regarding protection from dangerous
chemicals.

435/485/535

4-41
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1200 Hours
Operation 54

Change the Transmission Oil
(1407 Powershift Transmission Only)

To drain the transmission oil, use the following
procedure based on the type of transmission the
tractor is equipped with.
Operate the tractor a sufficient amount of time to
warm up the transmission oil. Remove the drain
plug (1) from the lower left hand rear location on the
transmission housing and allow the oil to drain into a
pan.
Replace the drain plug and torque to 108 N.m
(80 ft-lbs ± 5%). Refill the transmission with new oil
through the fill tube (2) to the proper level as indicated
by the sight gauge (3).

F4-17

435/485/535

4-42
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1500 Hours or Yearly
Operation 55

Change the Coolant System Filter
The coolant system filter must be changed to ensure
the proper level of DCA4 (dry chemical additive) is
maintained in the engine cooling system to provide
maximum protection against corrosion. To change the
filter, proceed as follows:

Turn the coolant shutoff valve (1) to the “OFF” position.
Remove the radiator cap. Unscrew and discard the
old coolant filter (2). Clean the gasket surface on
the filter head. Apply a light film of lubricating oil to
the gasket sealing surface before installing the new
coolant filter.
NOTE: All model tractors have one single coolant
system filter with a shut off valve mounted on the
right-hand side of the engine.

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE RADIATOR CAP
FROM A HOT ENGINE. HOT STEAM WILL CAUSE
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY. REMOVE THE
COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE CAP AND CLOSE
THE SHUTOFF VALVES BEFORE REMOVING THE
COOLANT FILTER. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY FROM HEATED COOLANT
SPRAY.
NOTE: Do not allow oil to get inside the filter. Oil will
adversely affect the DCA4.
Install the new filter on the filter head. Tighten the
filter until the gasket contacts the filter head surface.
Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn.
NOTE: Over-tightening can distort the threads or
damage the filter head. Do not use tools to tighten
the filter.
Turn the coolant shutoff valve to the “ON” position.
Operate the engine, and check for coolant leaks. After
the air has been purged from the system, check the
coolant level again.

435/485/535

OFF

F4-30

4-43
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1500 Hours or Yearly
Operation 56
Change the Transmission Oil
(Synchromesh Transmission Only)

To drain the transmission oil, use the following
procedure based on the type of transmission the
tractor is equipped with.
Synchromesh Transmission - Operate the tractor a
sufficient amount of time to warm up the transmission
oil. Remove the drain plug (1) from the transmission
housing and allow the oil to drain into a pan.
Replace the drain plug and torque to 108 N.m
(80 ft-lbs ± 5%). Refill the transmission with new oil
through the fill tube (2) to the proper level as indicated
by the sight gauge (3).

2
1

F4-16

Synchromesh Transmission Only

Operation 57
Clean the Transmission Suction Screen
(Synchromesh Transmission Only)
The synchromesh transmission has a removable sump
screen located under the suction tube that will require
cleaning periodically. To remove the suction screen,
proceed as follows:

Drain the transmission oil (see operation 49).

Loosen and remove the four cap screws (7) that mount
the suction tube block (8) to the rear face of the
transmission. Push the tube out of the way to access
the suction port.
Remove the suction screen (9) from the port and
clean it in a suitable solvent. Replace the screen into
the suction port.
Remove the O-ring (10) from the front face of the
suction tube block (8). Check that it is in good
condition before refitting into the suction tube block.
Replace the O-ring (10) if it is damaged. Reinstall the
suction tube block bolts (7) and torque to 75 N.m
(55 ft-lbs).

7
F4-71

Synchromesh Transmission Only

IMPORTANT: The 1407 Twindisc powershift
transmission has a non-removable suction screen that
does not require maintenance.

435/485/535

4-44
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1500 Hours or Yearly
Operation 58
Check the rubber transmission mounts and mounting
hardware for condition and torque on both the
Synchromesh and powershift transmissions.

Check the Transmission Mounts

Synchromesh transmission
The Synchromesh transmission is held in the front
frame of the tractor by four bottom mounts (1) and two
top mounts (2). Inspect the mounts for deterioration
and wear. Torque the lower mounting bracket bolts
(3) to 224 N.m (165 ft-lbs) and the upper mounting
bracket bolts (4) to 397 N.m (293 ft-lbs). Torque the
mount bolts (5) to 280 N.m (205 ft-lbs).

5
1

F4-89
F4-89

1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission

The 1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission is held
in the front frame of the tractor by four bottom
mounts (6) and two top mounts (7). Inspect the
mounts for deterioration and wear. Torque the lower
mounting bracket bolts (8) and the upper mounting
bracket bolts (9) to 224 N.m (165 ft-lbs). Torque the
mount bolts (10) to 280 N.m (205 ft-lbs).

8
6
10

F4-90

CAT TA22 Powershift transmission

15 14 12

The CAT TA22 Powershift transmission is held in the
front frame of the tractor by four bottom mounts (11)
and two top mounts (12). Inspect the mounts for
deterioration and wear. Torque the lower mounting
bracket bolts (13) and the upper mounting bracket
bolts (14) to 224 N.m (165 ft-lbs). Torque the
mount bolts (15) to 280 N.m (205 ft-lbs).
If the transmission mounts require replacement,
contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

F4-90

13
11
15

F4-104
F4-104

435/485/535

4-45
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1500 Hours or Yearly
Operation 59
Change the Hydraulic Oil
To drain the hydraulic oil from the hydraulic reservoir,
use the following procedure:
Run the tractor to warm up the hydraulic system, and
collapse all external remote cylinders or 3-point hitch
lift cylinders to decrease the amount of oil remaining
in the hydraulic system when the oil is drained.

Remove the drain plug (1) from the bottom of the
hydraulic reservoir tank under the front frame of the
tractor. Allow all the oil to drain from the reservoir into
a suitable container.

F4-45

Replace the plug and tighten. Refill the reservoir to the
proper level as indicated on the sight gauge. Restart
the tractor. Extend any remote mounted cylinders and
3-point hitch lift cylinders and recheck the oil level.
Add oil as necessary.
Torque Value: 81 N·m (60 ft-lbs)
Wrench size: 1¼" (1.250")

Operation 60
Check the engine mounts
The engine is mounted in stationary rubber mounts at
the two rear corners and the front center of the engine
in the front frame of the tractor. The front center
mount is a double rubber mount assembly.
Check the front mounts (2) for wear or deterioration
and torque the mount bolts and nuts (3) to 280 N.m
(205 ft. lbs.). Torque the bolts (4) mounting the
bracket to engine to 260 N.m (190 ft-lbs).
Check the two rear mounts (5) for wear or deterioration
and torque the mount bolt and nut (6) to 280 N.m
(205 ft. lbs.). Torque the mounting bracket to engine
bolts (7) to 260 N.m (190 ft-lbs).

3
4

F4-72

5
F4-73

435/485/535

4-46
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 1500 Hours or Yearly
Operation 61
Check the Engine Turbocharger Connections

Check the exhaust pipe to turbo outlet clamp (1).
Torque the clamp to 9 N.m (80 in. lbs.). Torque
the lower oil drain line cap screws (2) to 27 N.m
(239 in-lbs). Tighten the upper oil supply line fitting
(3) to 20 N.m (177 in-lbs)
Tighten the four nuts that mount the turbocharger
to the exhaust manifold of the engine to 61 N.m
(45 ft-lbs). (Not shown).

1
Operation 62
Check the Radiator and Heating System Hoses

F4-74

Check the upper (4) and lower (5) radiator hoses for
deterioration due to heat or contact with other engine
components. Inspect the fill hose (6) for similar wear
or damage.
If any hoses in the engine cooling system or tractor
heating system require replacement, contact your
Buhler Versatile dealer.

F4-77

F4-75

Operation 63

Check the Cab Mounts
The cab is mounted on four rubber mounts in each
corner of the cab.
Check the mounts for wear or deterioration and torque
the mount nut and bolts (7) to 217 N.m (160 ft-lbs).
Torque the nut and bolts (8) that hold the mounts to
the frame to 97 N.m (72 ft-lbs).

If the mounts require replacement, contact your
Buhler Versatile dealer.

F4-57

435/485/535

4-47
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 2000 Hours or 2 Years
Operation 64
Change the Engine Coolant
WARNING: BEFORE DRAINING THE COOLING
SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE ENGINE TEMPERATURE
IS BELOW 50°C (120°F) BEFORE REMOVING THE
RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP. FAILURE TO DO SO
CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY FROM HEATED
COOLANT SPRAY.
The cooling system must be clean to work correctly.
Drain the system, and flush with clean water. If the
system shows mineral buildup, scale, rust, or oil,
clean with a heavy-duty engine coolant cleaner and
follow the manufacturer’s directions.

To drain the cooling system, first turn the temperature
control knob in the cab to the maximum heat position.
Make sure the heater valve (1) on the rear/right of the
engine is fully open.

F3-21

Remove the radiator cap (2) from the top of the
radiator.

WARNING: THE COOLANT SYSTEM OPERATES
UNDER PRESSURE WHICH IS CONTROLLED BY
THE RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP. IT IS DANGEROUS
TO REMOVE THE PRESSURE CAP WHILE THE
SYSTEM IS HOT. WHEN THE SYSTEM HAS COOLED,
USE A THICK CLOTH AND TURN THE CAP SLOWLY
TO THE FIRST STOP AND ALLOW THE PRESSURE
TO ESCAPE BEFORE FULLY REMOVING THE CAP.

F4-9

COOLANT SHOULD BE KEPT OFF THE SKIN.
ADHERE TO THE PRECAUTIONS OUTLINED ON
THE ANTIFREEZE AND INHIBITOR CONTAINERS,
WHERE USED.
To drain the radiator, open the petcock (3) located at
the bottom center of the radiator.
Drain all the coolant into a suitable container and
follow all local laws and regulations for disposal.

F4-76

435/485/535

4-48
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 2000 Hours or 2 Years
To remove the coolant in the engine block, disconnect
the lower radiator hose (4) from the base of the radiator.
This will drain whatever coolant is in the water jacket
of the engine.

Drain all the coolant into a suitable container and
follow all local laws and regulations for disposal.
Turn off the coolant filter shutoff valve so the filter is
isolated from the cooling system during cleaning and
flushing operations.
IMPORTANT: Failure to isolate the cooling system
filter by closing the shutoff valve will contaminate
the cooling system filter, and the filter will have to be
replaced whether its change interval has been reached
or not.

F4-75

Flushing the Cooling System
Refer to page 8-25 of the Cummins QSX15 engine
operation and maintenance manual supplied with the
tractor for the correct coolant system flushing schedule
and procedure.
After the cooling system is cleaned, retighten the
petcock (3) and reinstall the lower radiator hose (4).
Open the cooling system filter shutoff valve (5).

435/485/535

OFF

F4-30

4-49
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Every 2000 Hours or 2 Years
The coolant added to the engine must meet specific
requirements. Use coolant from one of the following
sources:
NOTE: Factory fill is a fully formulated coolant mixture,
(pink in color). Propylene and ethylene glycol can be
mixed in the cooling system.
Refill the cooling system using a low silicate
antifreeze which meets Engineering Standard
GM 6038-M, or which contains no more than 0.1%
anhydrous alkali metasilicate and meets either
Engineering Standard GM 1825-M or GM 1899-M,
which are performance specifications.
Use soft water in the coolant mixture. Contaminants
in hard water neutralize the corrosion inhibitor
components. Water must not exceed 300 ppm
hardness or contain more than 100 ppm of either
chloride or sulphate.
Antifreeze must be used in any climate for both
freeze and boiling point protection. Cummins
Engine Company, Inc. recommends a 50%
concentration level, 40% - 60% range of ethylene
glycol or propylene glycol inmost climates.
Antifreeze
at
68%
concentration
provides
the maximum freeze protection and must never
be exceeded under any condition. Antifreeze
protection decreases above 68%,

40%
50%
60%
68%

Ethylene Glycol
-23°C (-10°F)
-37°C (-34°F)
-54°C (-65°F)
-71°C (-90°F)

Propylene Glycol
-21°C (-6°F)
-33°C (-27°F)
-40°C (-56°F)
-63°C (-82°F)

Once the protection level of the coolant is determined
(ratio of water to antifreeze), the mixture must contain
one unit of Cummins DCA4 (dry chemical additive)
for every gallon of mix. A DCA unit is equal to 42.5
g (1.5 dry ounces) or 120 ml (4 liquid ounces). Your
Buhler Versatile dealer can assist you in obtaining the
DCA4 additive.
IMPORTANT: Failure to maintain the DCA4 in the
cooling system will cause cooling system corrosion
and engine failure.
IMPORTANT: Check the concentration of DCA4 with
a test kit, available from Cummins and Fleetguard
through your Buhler Versatile dealer.
IMPORTANT: Do not add cold coolant to a hot engine.
Engine castings can be damaged. Allow the engine to
cool to below 50°C (120°F).
Start and run the engine until normal operating
temperature is reached. Stop the engine and allow the
coolant to cool.
NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is pumped
around the system.
Remove the radiator cap and add coolant to the
radiator to bring the coolant level to the bottom of the
filler neck. Install the radiator cap.
NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated
immediately following the coolant and filter change,
run the engine for one hour to ensure that the chemical
conditioner within the system is dispersed into the
cooling system.
The coolant capacity for the 435, 485 and 535 tractor
is 72 L (19 Gal).

NOTE: Propylene glycol antifreeze protection levels
CANNOT be checked using the same hydrometer as
would be used with ethylene glycol antifreeze.
You must check the concentration level using a
refractometer. This tool is available from your Buhler
Versatile dealer under P/N CC2806. Both propylene
and ethylene glycol protection levels (of a mixture of
both) can be measured with the refractometer.

435/485/535

4-50
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Indicated by Warning Light
Operation 65
Change the Engine Air Cleaner Outer Element
If the restriction indicator warning light illuminates
on the EIC display, it is necessary to change the
outer air filter element. This may occur outside the
set maintenance schedule due to adverse working
conditions.
IMPORTANT: When servicing the air cleaner:
• Wear a mask when cleaning the air filter. Do not
breath in dust.
To access the outer element, remove the large wing
nut (1) on the outside of the cover. Remove the cover
(2) from the air cleaner canister.

F4-50

Remove the outer element (3) by removing the wing
nut (4) and pulling the element from the canister. the
element.

F4-51

435/485/535

4-51
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
Indicated by Warning Light
Clean the air cleaner body with a lint-free towel before
installing the element.
Inspect the element seal (1) before installing. Cracks
or chips in the element sealing rubber indicates a new
element must be installed.
Install the air filter back into the canister. Be sure
the seal on the end of the filter fully contacts the air
cleaner body. The wing nut (2) has a small seal (3)
on the inner face, and the seal should be in good
condition before the wing nut is tightened. If the seal
is damaged on the wing nut, replace it. Tighten the
nut securely.

1
F4-58

3
F4-54

435/485/535

4-52
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 66
Road lights - High/Low Beam Bulb Replacement
To replace a road light bulb, remove the two screws
(1) retaining the lamp unit to the body work and
withdraw the lamp unit. Unplug the connector (2) and
remove the rubber cover (3). Remove the bulb (4) by
releasing the spring clip (5). Replace the bulb using
the reverse procedure taking care not to touch the new
bulb glass.

5
3
4

Replacement bulb, P/N: 9626307

F4-78

Operation 67

Work Lights Bulb Replacement
To replace a work light bulb, remove the two screws
(6) retaining the surround (7) and lift the lamp unit
(8) away from the casing. Release the spring clip (9)
and remove the bulb (10) from the lamp unit. Unplug
the connector (11). Replace the bulb using the reverse
procedure taking care not to touch the bulb glass.
Replacement bulb, P/N: 9703399

Replacement bulbs can be purchased from your
Buhler Versatile dealer.

435/485/535

F4-79

4-53
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 68

Turn Signal/Hazard Lights Bulb Replacement (Roof)
To replace a roof turn signal/hazard light bulb, remove
the two retaining screws (1) and remove the lens cover
(2). Remove the bulb (3). Replace the bulb using the
reverse procedure.
Replacement bulb, P/N: 529068

Operation 69
Brake/Road Lights Bulb Replacement (Fender)
To replace a brake/road light bulb, remove the two
retaining screws (1) and remove the lens cover (2).
Remove the bulb (3). Replace the bulb using the
reverse procedure.

Replacement bulb, P/N: 86537133

F4-80

Operation 70
Extremity Lights
To replace an extremity light bulb, remove the two
retaining screws (4) and remove the lens cover (5).
Remove the bulb (6). Replace the bulb using the
reverse procedure.
Replacement bulb, P/N: 529068

Operation 71
HID Work lights (Front)

To replace a front HID work light bulb, remove the
two screws (7) and withdraw the lamp unit from the
body work. Disconnect the plug (8) by turning anticlockwise. Remove the three screws (9) and the
retaining ring (10). Remove the bulb (11). Replace
the bulb using the reverse procedure taking care not
to touch the bulb glass.

F4-81

Replacement bulb, P/N: 86032753

Warning: This lamp unit operates at high
voltage and should be isolated before
maintenance is carried out.
Replacement bulbs can be purchased from your
Buhler Versatile dealer.

F4-82

435/485/535

4-54
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 72

HID Work lights (Rear)

To replace a rear HID work light bulb, remove the four
screws (1) retaining the lamp unit (2) to the casing
and withdraw the lamp unit. Disconnect the plug (3).
Remove the three screws (4) and the retaining bracket
(5). Remove the bulb unit (6). Replace the bulb using
the reverse procedure taking care not to touch the
bulb glass.

Warning: This lamp unit operates at high
voltage and should be isolated before
maintenance is carried out.

Replacement bulb, P/N: 86034812

Operation 73
Dome Lights

4
F4-84

To replace a rear dome light bulb, push in the spring
clip (7) and release the lamp unit from the surround.
Remove the bulb (8) from the lamp unit. Replace the
bulb and refit the lamp unit into the surround.
Replacement bulb, P/N: 9849911

Replacement bulbs can be purchased from your
Buhler Versatile dealer.

435/485/535

F4-83

4-55
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 74
Right Console Light

To replace the right console light unit, remove the five
screws (1) retaining the overhead console unit and lift
the unit away. Locate the console light connector block
and disconnect. Pull the lamp unit (2) out from the
roof lining. Replace the lamp unit using the reverse
procedure.
Replacement bulb, P/N: 86033164

MP
AUTO TE

ROL
CONT

2
F4-59

Operation 75
Trouble Light
To replace the trouble light bulb, Remove the glass (3)
from the lamp unit (4). Remove the bulb (5). Replace
the bulb unit using the reverse procedure.
Replacement bulb, P/N: 9.9CP, GE232 or equivalent

Replacement bulbs can be purchased from your
Buhler Versatile dealer.

F4-87

435/485/535

4-56
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 76
Rear Deck Panel Covers Removal

The rear deck panel covers (1) can be removed to gain
access to the right side console controls and VMM unit.
Remove the two 10 mm nuts (2) remove the covers.
The covers are joined together with Velcro for easy
removal and re-installation. (Seat not shown for
clarity).

1
F4-62

Operation 77
Fuse and Relay Cover Removal
The fuse and relay panel is located above the right
console. The cover (3) is removed for service by
releasing the two latches (4) and sliding the cover
away. To replace the cover, slide the cover back into
position and re-latch.

4
ON

STOP

F4-88

435/485/535

4-57
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 78
Changing Fuses and Relays

R10

F11
F12
F13
F14

F15
F16

REAR
FENDER

TRAILER

F38
F39

R20
SW

15A
7.5A
5A
7.5A
10A
10A
10A
20A

RH
CNSL

5A
R14

KAM
VMM

F1 F2

30A

TRAILER

10A

F37

MOD
SW

20A

15A
5A
30A
R19

FRONT
FENDER

F36

F21

EXTREMITY

TRAILER

R15

F1
F2

R17

TRAILER

F40

R18
REAR
DECK

F41

TRAILER

R19

F42

LOW
BEAM

15A

F10

FRONT
GRILL

F35

FRT
CNSL

F29

15A

R18

CAB
ROOF

F34

F20

F30

15A

TAIL
MARKER

F33

RH
CNSL

F31

15A

REAR
DECK

F32

F19

R13

EXTREMITY

F31

F18

F32
F33
F34
F35

F36
F37
F38
F39

10A

R9
HIGH
BEAM

R17

RH
FRT MOD
CNSL CNSL SW

F29
F30

10A

15A
5A

R8
LOW
BEAM

20A

HIGH
BEAM

15A

LOW
BEAM

25A
TRAILER
PLUG

30A

R7
TRAILER

15A

REAR
FENDER

30A

F16

R6
REAR
FENDER

15A

F15

FRONT
FENDER

10A

F14

FRONT
GRILL

REAR
DECK

20A

F13

R5
FRONT
FENDER

15A

F12

CAB
ROOF

25A

F11

TAIL
MARKER

15A

F10

REAR
DECK

10A

B
TRAILER

10A

15A
5A
20A
15A
25A
30A
15A
30A
15A

R10

10A
HIGH
BEAM

20A

15A

LOW
BEAM

25A

15A

R7
TRAILER
PLUG

R26

FRONT
GRILL

10A

R6
REAR
FENDER

REAR
DECK

F2
F3

10A

FRONT
FENDER

15A

R15

15A

R25

CAB
ROOF

F1 F2

15A

TRAILER

VMM

15A

EXTREMITY

FRONT
GRILL

10A
R14

R24

TAIL
MARKER

R26

REAR
DECK

R12

KAM

20A

R13

R25

CAB
ROOF

RH
FRT MOD
CNSL CNSL SW

15A

TRAILER

15A

EXTREMITY

20A

R23

TAIL
MARKER

RH
CNSL

15A

R24

R11

20A

EXTREMITY

MOD
SW

10A

R12

F21

F17

20A

R22

TRAILER

FRT
CNSL

15A

TRAILER

R23

F20

15A

REAR
DECK

15A

10A

R21

10A

RH
CNSL

10A

86032241
EXTREMITY

F19

20A

R11

10A

R22

F18

TRAILER

F17

7.5A

R21

20A

10A

86032241

7.5A

A decal of this panel layout is located inside the fuse/
relay cover.

10A

The fuse and relay panel houses all the fuses and
relays that are used in the electrical system and is
clearly marked for all electrical functions. There are
no circuit breakers on Buhler Versatile 4WD tractors.

HIGH
BEAM

R20
SW

EXTREMITY

TRAILER

EXTREMITY

TRAILER

B
TRAILER

TRAILER

F40
F41

TRAILER

F42

+12V

F4-63

435/485/535

+12V

REAR
DECK

4-58
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Relays
R1 Hvac and Windhield Wiper/washer

(see fuses no. 13 and 14)

F9 (15 amps) 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 2) Work Lamp

(See relay no. 7)
F10 (10 amps) Road Lamps - Low Beam (See relay no. 8)

R2 Marker Lights (See fuse no. 4)

F11 (20 amps) Road Lamps - High Beam (See relay no. 9)

R3 Cab Roof Work Lamps (See fuse no. 5)

F12 (15 amps) Horn/beacon/cigarette Lighter

R4 Front Grill Work Lamps (See fuse no. 6)
R5 Front Fender Work Lamps (See fuse no. 7)

F13 (25 amps) Hvac (See relay no. 1)
F14 (15 amps) Windshield Wiper/washer (See relay no. 1)

R6 Rear Fender Work Lamp (See fuse No. 8)

F15 (10 amps) Transmission Control Module

(See relay no. 12)

R7 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 2) Work Lamp

(See fuse no. 9)

F16 (10 amps) Radar (See relay no. 25)

R8 Road Lamps - Low Beam (See fuse no. 10)
R9 Road Lamps - High Beam (See fuse no. 11)
R10 Spare - Not Used (See fuse no. 42)
R11 Rear Deck - Power Plug Switched Power (Pin 1)

(See fuse no. 3)
R12 Transmission Control Module (See fuse no. 15)

F17 (15 amps) Seat (See relay no. 25)
F18 (7.5 amps) Radio (See relay no. 25)
F19 (5 amps)

Right Hand Console (See relay no. 13)

F20 (7.5 amps) Front Console (See relay no. 13)
F21 (10 amps) Control Modules - Key Switch Signal

(See relay no. 13)

R14 Electro-hydrulics (See fuse no. 33)

F22 (10 amps)

R15 Differential Lock (See fuse no. 24)

F23 (10 amps) Right Hand Console Power Socket

R13 Power Console Switches

(See fuses no. 19, 20 and 21)

R16 Accessory Function No. 1 (See fuse no. 28)
R17 Accessory Function No. 2 (See fuse no. 28)
R18 Engine Key Switch Fuelling Signal

(See fuse no. 25)
R19 Starter Relay Signal (See fuse no. 22)
R20 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 7) +12v Key

Switched Power (See fuse no. 39)

Key Switch Power
See...
ACC = relays no. 11 and 25
RUN = relays no. 12, 13 and 20
START = relay no.19

F24 (20 amps) Differential Locks (See relay no. 15)
F25 (5 amps)

Engine Key Switch Fuelling Signal
(See relay no. 18)

F26 (10 amps) Keep Alive Memory
F27 (20 amps) VMM Control Module
F28 (30 amps) Accessory Function No. 1 And 2

(See relays no. 16 and 17)

R21 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 3) Left Hand

Signal Lamp (See fuse no. 30)

F29 (15 amps) Extremity Left Hand Signal

(See relay no. 22)

R22 Extremity Left Hand Signal (See fuse no. 29)

F30 (15 amps) 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 3) Left Hand

Signal Lamp (See relay no. 21)

R23 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 5) Right Hand

Signal Lamp (See fuse no. 32)
R24 Extremity Right Hand Signal

(See fuse no. 31)
R25 Radar/seat/radio (See fuses no. 16, 17, and 18)

F31 (15 amps) Extremity Right Hand Signal

(See relay no. 31)
F32 (15 amps) 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 5) Right Hand

Signal Lamp (See relay no. 23)

R26 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 4) Stop Lamp

(See fuse no. 37)

F33 (20 amps) Electro-hydraulics (See relay no. 14)

Fuses

F35 (15 amps) Engine Ecm Power 2 Of 2

F1 (15 amps) Rear Deck - Power Plug Live Power

(Pin B)

F36 (15 amps) Diagnostics Connector Power (Pin 1)

F2 (5 amps)

Dome Lamp

F3 (20 amps) Rear Deck - Power Plug Live Power

(Pin 1) (See relay no. 11)

F34 (15 amps) Engine Ecm Power 1 Of 2

F37 (10 amps) 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 4) Stop Lamp

(See relay no. 26)
F38 (10 amps) Backup Alarm

F4 (15 amps) Marker Lamps (See relay no. 2)

F39 (20 amps) 7-pin Trailer Plug (Pin 7) +12v Key

Switched Power (See relay no. 20)

F5 (25 amps) Cab Roof Work Lamps (See relay no. 3)

F40 (10 amps) Rear Deck - Power Socket

F6 (30 amps) Front Grill Work Lamps (See relay no. 4)

F41 (----) 1407 Transmission Diagnostics

F7 (15 amps) Front Fender Work Lamps (See relay no. 5)

F42 (----)

F8 (30 amps) Rear Fender Work Lamps (See relay no. 6)

435/485/535

Not Used

4-59
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 79
Check the Windshield Washer Fluid
The front and (rear-optional) windscreen washers are
fed from a single reservoir located behind the right
hand fuel tank.

Remove the lid (1) on the reservoir and add fluid as
necessary.

F4-91

Operation 80
Change the Windshield Wiper Blades
The front and rear windshield wiper blades can be
changed using the following procedure:
Pivot the wiper arm outward away from the window.
Remove the blade bolt (2) from the center of the
blade. Install the new blade and reinstall the center
bolt.

The front and rear windshield wiper blade is 713 mm
(28") long.
Replacement wiper blade (front & rear)
P/N: 86032440

F4-92

Operation 81

Operation 82

Clean the Cab Floor

Clean the Cab Seat and Upholstery

Keep the cab floor free of dirt and debris that may
cause an obstruction or safety hazard, especially
around the brake and clutch pedal area.

When the soft trim material and seat become dirty,
they should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and wring out as much of the
water as possible. Wipe the interior material with the
damp cloth.

The cab floor should be kept clean by periodically
vacuuming or sweeping, and washing.
The floor mat can be removed from the cab floor by
rolling it away from the walls of the cab and pulling
it upward and away from the floor. The floor mat is a
two-piece rubber mat that can be washed using a mild
detergent.

The interior molding inside the cab can be cleaned
with a water/detergent solution as needed.

435/485/535

4-60
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 83
Change the Ether Canister
The cold start solenoid is mounted on the left side of
rear hood support.
Remove the protective yellow cap (1) or unscrew the
empty ether canister anti-clockwise from the top of
the solenoid valve (2), making sure that the gasket
remains in place. Lubricate the gasket with a light film
of clean oil.

1
2

Remove the protective cap from the new ether
canister.

F4-93

Lower the ether canister (3) into the top of the solenoid
valve (2) and screw it in clockwise.
Tighten the ether canister hand tight only.
Once the ether canister is screwed into the solenoid
valve, secure the canister firmly by attaching the
clamp (4) around the canister. Tighten the clamp.

NOTE: The ether bottle is not shipped as standard
equipment from the factory and should be sourced
locally.

CAUTION:
STARTING
FLUID
IS
HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE. DO NOT USE NEAR FIRE, SPARKS,
OR FLAMES. BE SURE ALL OPERATORS READ THE
CAUTIONARY INFORMATION ON THE CANISTER.

CAUTION: THE ETHYL ETHER USED AS COLD
START FLUID IS EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE, TOXIC,
AND FATAL IF SWALLOWED. AVOID CONTACT WITH
EYES OR SKIN. AVOID BREATHING THE FUMES.
IF SWALLOWED, DO NOT INDUCE VOMITING. CALL
DOCTOR IMMEDIATELY.
IF COLD START FLUID ENTERS EYES OR FUMES
IRRITATE EYES, WASH EYES WITH LARGE
QUANTITIES OF CLEAN WATER FOR 15 MINUTES.
CONTACT A DOCTOR, PREFERABLY AN EYE
SPECIALIST, IMMEDIATELY.

435/485/535

F4-94

4-61
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 84
Drain the Fuel Tanks
The fuel tanks can be drained by opening the petcock,
(1) located on the bottom, rear inside corner of each
fuel tank. Drain all the fuel from the tanks into
suitable containers and retighten the petcock. Dispose
of the fuel (if necessary) according to local laws and
regulations.

1
F4-95

Operation 85
Rear Fender Height Adjustment
Rear fender height can be adjusted by removing the
four bolts (2) that attach each fender support to the
rear frame. Move the fender to the desired height
and reinstall the bolts. Torque the bolts to 165 N.m
(125 ft-lbs.).

F4-96

435/485/535

4-62
Section 4 - Lubrication & Maintenance
As Required
Operation 86

Removal from Storage

Storing the Tractor

Remove the protective covering from the tractor tires
and seals from the air intake filter, muffler, fuel tank
and engine crankcase breather.

NOTE: Storage refers to periods of approximately three
months or greater.
Preparation
Change the hydraulic oil.
Change the transmission oil.

Remove the blocks. Lower the tractor onto the tires.
Correct any leaks.
Inflate the tires to the recommended pressure.

Change the engine coolant.

Install fully charged batteries. Tighten the battery
connections.

Drain and flush the oil from the differentials and
planetary housings. Fill with new oil.

Tension the alternator, compressor, water pump and
fan belt.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Check the fluid level of the engine crankcase,
differentials, planetaries, transmission, hydraulic
reservoir, brake cylinder reservoir and engine cooling
system.

Start the engine. While the engine is warming up,
operate the transmission, hydraulic system, steering
and differentials to distribute new lubricant to
components. Warm engine to at least 70°C (160°F).
Stop the engine.
Clean the tractor of all debris, dirt, and accumulated
grease.

If the fuel filter is changed during or after storage, be
sure that the filter, pump and lines are primed.
Drain sediment from the fuel tanks.

Drive the tractor to the storage location.

Refer to the Cummins operator’s manual for more
engine related preparations.

Relieve tension on the alternator, compressor, water
pump, and fan belt.

Initial Engine Start-up

Coat all exposed hydraulic cylinder shaft areas with
grease or a rust preventive.
Fill the fuel tanks with fuel.
Refer to the Cummins operator’s manual for more
engine related preparations.
Storing
Use plastic bags or tape to seal the following openings:
muffler, fuel tank breather, air intake filter, and engine
crankcase breather.
Touch up all scratches or chips.

Initial engine start-up after long periods of storage
can place abnormal loads on the cranking system.
Do not crank the engine longer than 30 seconds.
Allow at least two minutes between cranking cycles
to permit the starting motor to cool and the batteries
to recover.
IMPORTANT: On initial start of engine, do not increase
speed above 1000 RPM, unless necessary to prevent
stalling, until the engine oil pressure is normal.
See “Engine Starting” and “Cold-Weather Starting”
in Section 3.

Block up the tractor to remove weight from the tires.

If the engine does not start after 30 seconds, prime
the fuel system using the following procedure:

Cover the tires if they will be exposed to heat or direct
sunlight.

Remove the fuel filter and fill it with clean filtered
fuel.

If the tractor is to be stored outside, cover it with a
waterproof canvas or other protective material.

IMPORTANT: Fuel poured directly into the filter will
not be cleaned by the filter and will go directly into the
fuel pump. Be sure that the fuel is clean.

Remove the batteries from the tractor and store them
in a cool, dry, weatherproof area. Do not store on a
concrete floor.

435/485/535

Start the engine. If the engine still does not start,
consult your Buhler Versatile dealer.

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Contents

Section 5 Contents - Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting charts in this section list possible problems, their causes, and corrective actions.

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Synchromesh Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Engine

Engine
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Engine will turn over but
will not start, or starts
hard

Incorrect starting procedure.

Review starting procedures.

Low or no fuel.

Check fuel level.

Air in fuel lines.

Bleed fuel system.

Incorrect engine oil viscosity.

Use correct viscosity oil.

Incorrect fuel for operating
temperature.

Use correct type fuel for
temperature conditions.

Contaminated fuel system.

Clean system/replace filter element.

Clogged fuel filter.

Replace filter element.

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s).

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Malfunctioning fuel solenoid.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Clogged air filter.

Clean or replace air filter.

Clogged fuel filter.

Replace filter.

Clogged air filter.

Clean or replace air filter.

Engine cylinder temperature too
low for clean fuel burn.

Refer to “Cold-Weather Starting”
(Section 3).

Contaminated fuel system.

Clean system replace filter element.

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s).

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Engine overloaded.

Shift to lower gear or reduce load.

Air cleaner restricted.

Service air cleaner.

Clogged fuel filter.

Replace filter.

Incorrect type of fuel.

Use correct fuel.

Engine overheated.

See “Engine Overheats” (later
in this chart).

Low engine operating temperature.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Implement incorrectly adjusted.

See implement operator’s manual.

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s).

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

High idle speed is low.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Engine Power Derate

Refer to EICS operation (Section 3).
Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Cruise control set too low

Disengage cruise control or reset to
higher speed.

Engine runs rough and/
or stalls

Engine does not appear
to develop full power

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Engine

Engine
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Engine knocks

Low oil level.

Add correct grade and amount of oil.

Low oil pressure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Engine overheated.

See “Engine Overheats” (later in this
chart).

Engine temperature gauge faulty.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Malfunctioning thermostat(s).

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Tractor used on very light loads.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Low oil level.

Add oil as required.

Oil pressure gauge faulty.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Wrong grade or viscosity oil.

Drain and refill with correct grade
and viscosity oil.

Engine component failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Engine oil level too high.

Reduce oil level.

Incorrect viscosity oil.

Use correct viscosity.

External oil leaks.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Plugged breather tube vent filter.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Engine component failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Restricted cooling system fins.

Clean radiator, cooler and front grill.

Excessive engine load.

Shift to a lower gear or reduce load.

Low engine oil level.

Add oil as required.

Low coolant level.

Fill cooling system. Check for leaks.

Faulty radiator cap.

Replace cap.

Loose or worn fan belt.

Check automatic tensioner. Replace
belt if worn.

Cooling system plugged.

Flush cooling system.

Malfunctioning thermostat(s).

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Hose connection leaking.

Tighten hose connection.

Malfunctioning temperature gauge.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Clogged air filter.

Clean or replace filter.

Aspirator malfunction.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Low engine operating
temperature

Low oil pressure

Excessive oil
consumption

Engine overheats

Air filter restricted

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Engine

Engine
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Excessive fuel
consumption

Incorrect type of fuel.

Use correct fuel.

Clogged or dirty air cleaner.

Service air cleaner.

Engine overloaded.

Shift to lower gear or reduce load.

Implement incorrectly adjusted.

See implement operator’s manual.

Low engine temperature.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Excessive ballast.

Adjust ballast.

Fuel injection nozzles dirty.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

External leaks.

Repair leaks.

Fuel pump calibration changed.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Transmission

Synchromesh Transmission
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Tractor does not move

Transmission out of oil.

Check oil level and fill as necessary.

Failure of input driveline or engine
coupler.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Park brake engaged.

Disengage parking brake.

Clutch cable stuck.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Transmission out of oil.

Check oil level and fill as necessary.

Defective sensor circuit.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Restricted transmission filter.

Replace filter.

Pressure sender failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

Filter is restricted.

Replace filter.

Extremely cold temperature.

Run tractor at low idle for 30
minutes to warm up system. If light
is still illuminated, contact Buhler
Versatile dealer.

Sensor circuit failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Sensor failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Fault Code

Description

Correction

F387

Low Transmission Oil Pressure
Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

F388

Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor
Short To Ground

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

F392

Transmission Filter Plugged

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Low transmission lube
pressure

Transmission lubrication
filter bypass

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Transmission

1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission
The following list of fault codes may appear in the gear display of the EIC if a transmission fault is present.
If the cause of the fault cannot be corrected by the measures suggested, contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

Fault code
E00

Description
Input power has dropped below 0.4
volts for more than 0.1 seconds

Correction
Low battery voltage
Loose connection
Bad ground
Bad power relay contacts
Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E01, E02, E05,
E04, E05

Internal control problem

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E06

Output speed signal missing
transmission shifts to neutral if clutch
pedal depressed - 1st engaged when
clutch is released

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E08

Range selector switch combination
invalid

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E09

Clutch pedal signal out of range or
bottom pedal switch error

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E11

Engine load signal out of proper range

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E12

Input speed sensor circuit shorted or
open

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

E13

Output speed sensor circuit shorted or
open

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

S1, S2, S3, S4,
S5, S6, S7, S8, S9

Designated solenoid shorted or open

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

F387

Low Transmission Oil Pressure Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

F388

Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor Short
To Ground

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

F392

Transmission Filter Plugged

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

NOTE: Repairs and adjustments to the 1407 twindisc powershift control system require special service tools and
procedures to be performed by qualified technicians only; contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Transmission

CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission
The following fault codes may appear in the gear display of the EIC if a fault occurs in the CAT TA22 Powershift
transmission. Contact your Buhler Versatile dealer for assistance in correcting the fault.
F722

Transmission clutch #2 solenoid open circuit

F723

Transmission clutch #2 solenoid short to
ground

F724

Transmission clutch #3 solenoid short to
+battery

Low Transmission Oil Pressure Warning

F725

Transmission clutch #3 solenoid open circuit

F388

Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor Short To
Ground

F726

Transmission clutch #3 solenoid short to
ground

F389

Transmission oil temperature sensor short to
ground

F727

Transmission clutch #4 solenoid short to
+battery

F390

Transmission oil temperature sensor open
circuit / short to +battery

F728

Transmission clutch #4 solenoid open circuit

F392

Transmission Filter Plugged

F729

Transmission clutch #4 solenoid short to
ground

F702

Transmission output speed sensor #1 bad
component

F730

Transmission clutch #5 solenoid short to
+battery

F703

CAT data link not communicating

F731

Transmission clutch #5 solenoid open circuit

F704

J1939 data link not communicating

F705

Transmission clutch #7 solenoid short to
+battery

F732

Transmission clutch #5 solenoid short to
ground

F706

Transmission clutch #7 solenoid open circuit

F733

Transmission clutch #6 solenoid short to
+battery

F707

Transmission clutch #7 solenoid short to
ground

F734

Transmission clutch #6 solenoid open circuit

F708

Transmission clutch #8 solenoid short to
+battery

F735

Transmission clutch #6 solenoid short to
ground

F736

Upshift switch inputs incorrect

F709

Transmission clutch #8 solenoid open circuit

F737

Downshift switch inputs incorrect

F710

Transmission clutch #8 solenoid short to
ground

F738

5 Volt sensor power supply above normal

F739

5 Volt sensor power supply below normal

F711

Transmission clutch #9 solenoid short to
+battery

F740

5 Volt sensor power supply short to +battery

F712

Transmission clutch #9 solenoid open circuit

F741

5 Volt sensor power supply short to ground

Transmission clutch #9 solenoid short to
ground

F742

10 Volt sensor power supply above normal

F713

F348

Inching pedal position sensor signal out of
range low

F349

Inching pedal position sensor signal out of
range high

F386

High Transmission Oil Temperature Shutdown

F387

F743

10 Volt sensor power supply below normal

F744

Transmission lever position sensor signal out of
range high

F714

Inching pedal switch inputs incorrect

F715

Inching pedal switch improper response

F716

Inching pedal position sensor signal abnormal

F745

F717

Transmission output speed sensor #2 bad
component

Transmission lever position sensor signal out of
range low

F746

F718

Transmission clutch #1 solenoid short to
+battery

Transmission lever position sensor signal
abnormal

F747

Auto mode switch incorrect

F719

Transmission clutch #1 solenoid open circuit

F748

F720

Transmission clutch #1 solenoid short to
ground

Transmission oil pressure sensor open circuit or
short to +battery

F749

Transmission overspeed

F721

Transmission clutch #2 solenoid short to
+battery

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Electrical System

Electrical System
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Electrical system is
inoperative

Loose or corroded battery
connections.

Clean and tighten connections.

Sulfated batteries.

Check each battery open circuit
voltage for 12.6 volts minimum.
Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity.

Fuse or relay failure.

Check fuse panel.

Ignition switch failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Loose or corroded connections.

Clean and tighten connections.

Low battery output.

Check each battery open circuit
voltage for 12.6 volts minimum.
Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity of each battery.

Incorrect viscosity engine oil.

Use correct viscosity oil for
temperature conditions.

Defective starter.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Transmission speed lever in gear.

Place shift lever in neutral.

Clutch pedal not depressed.

Depress clutch pedal when starting.

Loose or corroded connections.

Clean and tighten loose connections.

Dead batteries.

Charge or replace batteries.

PTO (option) switch on.

Turn switch off.

Incorrect ignition operation.

Turn ignition to “OFF,” then to
“START” position.

Starter speed low and
engine cranks slowly

Starter inoperative

Neutral start switch or PTO switch
malfunction.

Charge indicator lamp
stays on with engine
running

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

Fuse or relay failure.

Check fuse panel.

Ignition switch failure.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Low engine idle speed.

Increase idle speed.

Loose belt.

Check automatic belt tensioner.

Malfunctioning battery(ies).

Check each battery open circuit
voltage for 12.6 volts minimum.
Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity.

Malfunctioning alternator.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

435/485/535

5-
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Electrical System

Electrical System
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Tractor runs for a short
time and shuts off

Automatic shutdown mode activated.

Check audio and visual indicators for
cause of shutdown. Contact Buhler
Versatile dealer.

Partially restricted fuel line.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Loose or corroded terminal
connections.

Clean and tighten connections.

Shorted out electrical system.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Sulfated batteries.

Check each battery open circuit
voltage for 12.6 volts minimum.
Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity.

Loose or worn belt.

Check alternator belt tension.
Replace belt if required.

Loose or corroded terminal
connections.

Clean and tighten connections.

One or more batteries defective or
sulfated.

Check each battery open circuit
voltage for 12.6 volts minimum.
Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity.

Loose or worn belt.

Check alternator belt tension.
Replace belt if required.

Electrical system high/
low voltage

Batteries will not charge

435/485/535

5-10
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Hydraulic System

Hydraulic System
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Complete hydraulic
system does not operate

Low oil level.

Fill system.

Restricted hydraulic filter.

Replace hydraulic filter.

Restricted reservoir suction screen.

Clean screen.

Malfunctioning hydraulic system.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Blown fuse - faulty relay*

Replace fuses and or relay*

Oil level low or high.

Adjust oil level.

Oil cooler or radiator plugged.

Clean oil cooler and radiator.

Blocked oil filter element.

Replace filter.

Flow control improperly adjusted.

Adjust flow control to lower flow
position.

Hydraulic load or orbit motor system
not matched to tractor.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Hoses will not uncouple

Hoses being pulled at 15° angle or
greater.

Pull straight back on hoses.

Hoses will not couple

Lines are still pressurized.

Place hydraulic system into float

Incorrect male connectors.

Replace connectors with ISO-(1/2")
standard connectors available from
your Buhler Versatile dealer.

Equipment exceeds detent pressure
settings.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

High pressure standby set too low.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer

Detent release pressure set too low

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Incorrect time set on electric valve.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Remote attachment
operates too fast or too
slow

Flow control not properly adjusted.

Adjust flow control.

Incorrect oil viscosity

Change oil to correct specification.

Hydraulic filter bypass
warning light on

Clogged filter.

Replace filter.

Remote attachment
does not operate

Hoses not completely connected.

Attach hoses correctly.

Load exceeds system capacity.

Reduce load or increase cylinder size.

Lever lock restricts control lever
movement.

Reposition lock.

Hydraulic oil overheats

Detent disengages
prematurely

* Applies to optional the Electro-hydraulics (EHR) system

435/485/535

5-11
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Hydraulic System

Hydraulic System - Electro-Hydraulic
Faults occurring in the EHR system (optional) will be
indicated by a code flashed in the left hand, timed
detent switch (1) in each of the EHR control pods.
Faults for both sections in the pod will be indicated.
Section

Pod

Section

1A+1B, 2A+2B

5A+5B, 6A+6B

3A+3B, 4A+4B

7A+7B, 8A+8B

Description of Error

Pod

No. of
Flashes

F3-107

Corrective Action

EERPOM inconsistent

Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Solenoid 1A open

Check wiring harness connection to Solenoid on implement valve 1A /
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Solenoid 1B open

Check wiring harness connection to Solenoid on implement valve 1B /
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Solenoid 2A open

Check wiring harness connection to Solenoid on implement valve 2A /
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Solenoid 2B open

Check wiring harness connection to Solenoid on implement valve 2B /
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 pot open or short to ground

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 pot short to power

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 active switch open or short to
GRND

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 active switch short to power

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 full flow switch short to PWR

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 float switch open or short to
GRND

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 1 float switch short to power

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 pot open or short to ground

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 pot short to power

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 active switch open or short to
GRND

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 active switch short to power

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 full flow switch short to PWR

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 float switch open or short to
GRND

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

Lever 2 float switch short to power

Check wiring harness connection to Lever 1 and 2
Contact Buhler Versatile Dealer

435/485/535

5-12
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Brake System

Brake System
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Park brake inoperative

Worn brake pads.

Replace brake pads.

Broken park brake cable.

Replace broken cable.

Brake out of adjustment.

Operate park brake lever several
times to automatically adjust brakes.
If there is no improvement, contact
your Buhler Versatile dealer.

Brake piston seal leaking.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Worn brake pads.

Replace brake pads.

Brake bleed screw not sealing.

Tighten bleeder.

Leakage in brake valve.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Air in system.

Bleed brake system.

Brakes out of adjustment.

Operate brake pedal several times to
automatically adjust. If there is no
improvement, contact your Buhler
Versatile dealer.

Malfunctioning master control valve.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Pedal bottoms out or
feels mushy

435/485/535

5-13
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Cab

Cab
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Dust enters the cab

Improper seal around filter element.

Check seal condition.

Plugged filter.

Clean or replace filter.

Defective filter.

Replace filter.

Excessive air leak(s) in cab floor,
windows, or door.

Seal air leak(s).

Plugged filter.

Clean or replace filter.

Heater core or evaporator core
plugged.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Excessive moisture in cab air system.

Position air vents toward windows.

Pressurizer air flow low

Cab windows fog up

Use air-conditioner system and
recirculation control along with the
heating system to dehumidify cab air.
Check air-conditioner drain hoses for
restriction.
Heating system does not
heat

Air-conditioner does not
cool

Defective engine thermostats.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Heater core plugged.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Heater valve shut off at engine.

Turn on heater valve at engine and
adjust temperature control knob to
the heat position.

Cab heater valve not functioning.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Condenser plugged.

Clean radiator, oil cooler, and
condenser.

Low refrigerant.

Check sight glass for bubbles.
Contact your Buhler Versatile dealer.

Compressor belt slipping or damaged.

Check belt tension and belt condition

Heater control turned on.

Turn temperature control knob fully
counterclockwise for maximum
cooling. Shut off heater hose valve
at engine.

Fuse or relay defective.

Replace fuse or relay.

435/485/535

5-14
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Operation

Operation
Problem

Possible Cause

Correction

Tractor rides rough

Incorrect seat adjustments.

Adjust seat ride and dampener.

Faulty seat suspension.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Incorrect ballast.

Ballast tractor correctly.

Tire inflation pressure too high.

Inflate tires correctly.

Implement mismatched with tractor.

Remove implement from tractor.

Implement adjusted incorrectly.

Adjust implement per implement
operator’s manual.

Incorrect ballast.

Ballast tractor correctly.

Incorrect tire pressure.

Inflate tires correctly.

Incorrect tire size, configuration
or type.

Contact Buhler Versatile dealer.

Tractor “hops” or
bounces during
operation

435/485/535

5-15
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Fault Codes

Fault Codes
The following charts detail a complete list of fault
codes, their cause and remedy. If necessary, contact
your Buhler Versatile authorized dealer and quote the
fault code number.

In the event that a fault occurs within the tractor
electrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol
“READ YOUR MANUAL,” will flash on and off and a
fault code will be stored. To view fault codes as they
occur, see “Turning active fault display on/off” on
page 3-42
Key to
Warning Lamps

B
W

C
Y

For viewing and clearing fault codes see:
section 3 - Operation, page 3-40.
E

Fault
Codes

Warning
Lamp

Cause

Action

F200

Sensor 5V supply failed HIGH

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F201

Output circuit SHORT

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F207

Brakes engaged while moving

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F208

Sensor 5V supply failed LOW

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F210

Module unexpectedly reset

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F211

CAN bus interference detected

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F212

CAN bus failure detected

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F213

EEPROM data corrupted (bad checksum)

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F214

EEPROM data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F215

Digital input system failure

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F216

Analog input system failure

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F217

Hydraulic oil temperature high

Check Hydraulic Oil Level/Check and Replace
Hydraulic Oil Filters as required
Clean oil cooler and front grill
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F387

Transmission oil pressure low

Check Transmission Oil Level
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F388

Transmission oil pressure sensor - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F391

Hydraulic oil filter restriction

Check Hydraulic Oil Filter
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F392

Transmission oil filter restriction

Check Transmission Oil Filter
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F400

Engine Coolant Temperature High – Critical

Clean Radiator and front grill
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F401

Engine Oil Pressure Low – Critical

Check Engine Oil Level
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F406

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F407

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F408

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

435/485/535

5-16
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Fault Codes
Fault
Codes

Warning
Lamp

Cause

Action

F417

Engine air filter restriction

Check Air Filter/
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F418

C&E

Engine Coolant Level Low - Critical

Check Engine Coolant Level/
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F419

Alternator not charging

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F440

B&G

Intake Manifold Temperature
Sensor #1 Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F441

B&G

Intake Manifold Temperature
Sensor #1 Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F442

C&G

Intake Manifold Temperature
#1 High - Critical

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F443

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor
#1 Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F444

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor
#1 Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F445

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor Circuit
- data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F454

Engine Speed High - Critical

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F500

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Supply
Voltage Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F501

Accelerator Pedal and Speed/Position
Sensor #1 Supply Voltage Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F502

Engine Speed/Position Sensor
#2 (Camshaft) Supply Voltage

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F503

Hand Throttle Idle Validation Circuit
- data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F504

Hand Throttle Idle Validation Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F505

Hand Throttle Idle Validation Circuit
- out of calibration

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F506

Sensor Supply Voltage #1 Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F507

Sensor Supply Voltage #1 Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F508

Auxiliary Temperature Sensor Input
# 1 Circuit – shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F509

Auxiliary Temperature Sensor Input
# 1 Circuit – shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F510

Auxiliary Pressure Sensor Input
# 2 Circuit – shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F511

Auxiliary Pressure Sensor Input
# 2 Circuit – shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F512

Injector Metering Rail
#2 Pressure Sensor Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

435/485/535

5-17
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Fault Codes
Fault
Codes

Warning
Lamp

F513

Cause

Action

Injector Metering Rail
#2 Pressure Sensor Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F514

Injector Metering Rail
#2 Pressure Malfunction

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F515

Injector Metering Rail
#2 Pressure High - Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F516

Injector Metering Rail #2 Pressure Low
- Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F517

Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit
- data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F518

Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit
- tampering has been detected

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F519

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F520

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F521

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit
- invalid frequency

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F522

SAE J1939 Multiplexing Accelerator Pedal
Sensor System Error

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F523

OEM Alternate torque validation switch
- data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F524

Fuel Delivery Pressure Sensor Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F525

Fuel Delivery Pressure Sensor Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F526

Fuel Pressure High - Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F527

Fuel Pressure Low - Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F528

Water in Fuel Sensor Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F529

Water in Fuel Sensor Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F530

Water in Fuel Indicator High – Maintenance

Check for Water in Fuel Filter/
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F531

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit - data
incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F532

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F533

Engine Oil Pressure Low - Warning

Check Engine Oil Level/
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F534

Low Oil Level in the Centinel makeup oil
tank

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F535

Fuel Supply Pump Inlet Pressure Sensor
Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F536

Fuel Supply Pump Inlet Pressure Sensor
Circuit – shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

435/485/535

5-18
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Fault Codes
Fault
Codes

Warning
Lamp

F537

Cause

Action

Fuel Supply Pump Inlet Pressure Low
- warning level

Check Fuel Level/Check Fuel Filter/
Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F538

Turbocharger #1 Speed High
- warning level

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F539

Engine Hot Shutdown

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F540

Engine Shutdown Commanded by J1939

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F541

Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Circuit
- data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F542

Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Circuit
– shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F543

Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Circuit
– shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F544

Sensor Supply Voltage #2 Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F545

Sensor Supply Voltage #2 Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F546

B&E

Engine Coolant Level Sensor Circuit
- data incorrect

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F547

Power Lost without Ignition Off

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F548

Engine Control Module – Internal failure

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F549

Engine Control Module – data lost

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F550

Engine Control Module
- Warning Software error

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F551

Fuel Shutoff Valve Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F552

Fuel Shutoff Valve Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F553

Fuel Shutoff Valve - stuck open

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F554

Fueling Actuator #1 Circuit - open circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F555

Fueling Actuator #1 Circuit
- grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F556

Timing Actuator #1 Circuit - open circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F557

Timing Actuator #1 Circuit
- grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F558

SAE J1939 datalink - cannot transmit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F559

SAE J1939 Multiplexing PGN
Timeout Error

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F560

SAE J1939 Multiplexing Configuration
Error

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F561

Fan Clutch Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F562

Injector Solenoid Valve Cylinder #1 Circuit
– grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F563

Injector Solenoid Valve Cylinder #2 Circuit
– grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F564

Injector Solenoid Valve Cylinder #3 Circuit
– grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

435/485/535

5-19
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Fault Codes
Fault
Codes

Warning
Lamp

F565

Cause

Action

Injector Solenoid Valve Cylinder #5 Circuit
– grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F566

Injector Solenoid Valve Cylinder #6 Circuit
- grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F567

Injector Metering Rail #1 Pressure Sensor
Circuit - shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F568

Injector Metering Rail #1 Pressure Sensor
Circuit - shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F569

Injector Metering Rail #1 Pressure
Malfunction

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F570

Injector Metering Rail #1 Pressure High
- warning level

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F571

Turbocharger #1 Wastegate Control Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F572

Cylinder Power Imbalance between
cylinders

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F573

Electrical Charging System Voltage Low
- Critical Level

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F574

Electrical Charging System Voltage High
- Warning level

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F575

Electrical Charging System Voltage Low
- Warning Level

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F576

Battery #1 Voltage High - Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F577

Battery #1 Voltage Low - Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F578

Engine Oil Temperature High - Critical

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F579

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F580

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F581

Engine Speed/Position Sensor Circuit - lost
both of two signals from the magnetic
pickup sensor

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F582

Engine Speed/Position Sensor Circuit
- lost one of two signals from the magnetic
pickup sensor

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F583

Auxiliary Input/Output #2 Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F584

Transmission Output Shaft (Tailshaft)
Speed High – Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F585

Transmission Output Shaft (Tailshaft)
Speed Low – Warning

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F586

Auxiliary Input/Output #3 Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

435/485/535

5-20
Section 5 - Troubleshooting
Fault Codes
Fault
Codes

Warning
Lamp

F587

Cause

Action

Additional OEM/Vehicle Diagnostic Codes
have been logged. Check other ECM’s for
DTC’s.

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F588

Foot Throttle Pedal Position Sensor Circuit
- shorted high

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F589

Foot Throttle Pedal Position Sensor Circuit
- shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F590

SAE J1939 Multiplexing Remote Throttle
Data Error

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F591

Engine Speed/Position #2 - Cam sync error

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F592

Fueling Actuator #2 Circuit - open circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F593

Fueling Actuator #2 Circuit
- grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F594

Timing Actuator #2 Circuit - open circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F595

Timing Actuator #2 Circuit
- grounded circuit

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F596

Engine Oil Burn Valve Solenoid Circuit
– shorted low

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

F597

Real Time Clock - Power Interrupt

Contact Buhler Versatile Inc (BVI) Service Center

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Contents

Section 6 Contents - Specifications
General Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Heights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Overall Widths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Wheel Tread Widths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Turning Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Maximum Tractor Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tractor Shipping Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Air Intake and Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Drivelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Axles & Differentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Hydraulic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Drawbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Electrical System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Air-Conditioning & Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Lubricants & Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Speed Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Tire Load & Inflation Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
High Usage Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Hardware Torques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Delivery Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
First 50 Hour Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
General Dimensions / Overall Height
The specifications on the following pages are given for your information and guidance. For further information
concerning the tractor, consult your authorized Buhler Versatile dealer.
Our policy is one of continuous improvement, and the right to change prices, specifications, or equipment at any
time without notice is reserved.
All data given in this book is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are approximate only.
For exact information about any particular tractor, please consult your authorized Buhler Versatile dealer.

General Dimensions
435, 485, 535
Wheelbase - Center of axle to center of axle 3900 mm (153.5")
Overall Length - Front nose to end of drawbar (no weight kits) 7606 mm (299.4").
With weight kit 817.9 mm (321.7)
Distance from center of front axle to nose of tractor (no weight kit) 2361 mm (93.0")
Distance from center of rear axle to end of drawbar 1345 mm (53.0")

Overall Heights
The overall height of the tractor will be determined by the tire size chosen. Single, dual, or triple tire configuration
will not affect height. The following dimensions are for all model tractors based on tire size.
Tire Size

Overall heights
Top of Exhaust

Top of Cab

Top of Drawbar

20.8 R42 R1W Radial

3897mm (153.4")

3658mm (144.0")

513mm (20.2")

520/85 R42 R1W Radial

3889mm (153.1")

3651mm (143.7")

506mm (19.9")

520/85 R46 R1W Radial

3943mm (155.2")

3704mm (145.8")

559mm (22.0")

620/70 R42 R1W Radial

3897mm (153.4")

3658mm (144.0")

513mm (20.2")

650/65 R42 R1W Radial

3872mm (152.4")

3633mm (143.0")

488mm (19.2")

650/85 R38 R1W Radial

3923mm (154.4")

3684mm (145.0")

539mm (21.2")

710/70 R38 R1W Radial

3877mm (152.6")

3638mm (143.2")

493mm (19.4")

710/70 R42 R1W Radial

3940mm (155.1")

3701mm (145.7")

556mm (21.8")

800/70 R38 R1W Radial

3928mm (154.6")

3689mm (145.2")

544mm (21.4")

850/60 R38 Radial

3917mm (154.2")

3678mm (144.8")

533mm (20.9")

900/50 R42 R1W Radial

3895mm (153.2")

3656mm (143.9")

511mm (20.1")

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Overall Widths / Wheel tread Width

Overall Widths
The overall width of the tractor will be determined by the tire size chosen. Single, dual, or triple tire configuration
will also affect machine widths. The following chart details overall widths by tire size and configuration for
435,485 and 535 tractor models. Width is outside of outer tire to outside of outer tire.
Tire Size

Overall Width
Single

Dual

Triple

20.8 R42 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

3996mm (157.3")

5395 (212.4")

520/85 R42 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

3985mm (156.9")

5383 (211.9")

520/85 R46 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

3994mm (157.2")

5398 (212.5")

620/70 R42 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

4351mm (171.3")

5910 (232.7")

650/65 R42 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

4376mm (172.3")

5935 (233.7")

650/85 R38 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

4629mm (182.2")

6047 (238.1")

710/70 R38 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

4689mm (184.6")

N/A

710/70 R42 R1W Radial

3180mm (125.2")

4720mm (185.9")

N/A

800/70 R38 R1W Radial

3230mm (127.2")

5118mm (201.5")

N/A

850/60 R38 Radial

3332mm (131.2")

5299mm (208.6")

N/A

900/50 R42 R1W Radial

3429mm (135.0")

5485mm (216.0")

N/A

Wheel Tread Width
The wheel tread width of the tractor will be determined by the tire size chosen. Single, dual, or triple tire
configuration will also affect wheel tread width. The following chart details overall width by tire size and
configuration for 435,485 and 535 tractor models. Tread width is shown from center of inner wheel to center
of inner wheel, and center of outer wheel to center of outer wheel. (Center of middle wheel to center of middle
wheel also shown for triple option.)
Tire Size

Tread Width (to tire centerlines)
Single

Dual

Triple

20.8 R42 R1W Radial

2049 (80.7")

3447mm (135.7")

4845 (190.7")

520/85 R42 R1W Radial

2049 (80.7")

3447mm (135.7")

4845 (190.7")

520/85 R46 R1W Radial

2048 (80.7")

3454mm (136.0")

4860 (191.3")

620/70 R42 R1W Radial

2154 (84.8")

3726mm (146.7")

5298 (208.6")

650/65 R42 R1W Radial

2154 (84.8")

3726mm (146.7")

5298 (208.6")

650/85 R38 R1W Radial

2278 (89.7")

3979mm (156.7")

5397 (212.5")

710/70 R38 R1W Radial

2278 (89.7")

3979mm (156.7")

N/A

710/70 R42 R1W Radial

2166 (85.3")

4004mm (157.6")

N/A

800/70 R38 R1W Radial

2240 (88.2")

4240mm (166.9")

N/A

850/60 R38 Radial

2350 (92.5")

4450mm (175.2")

N/A

900/50 R42 R1W Radial

2400 (94.5")

4600mm (181.1")

N/A

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Turning Geometry / Maximum Tractor Weight / Tractor Shipping Weight

Turning Geometry
Turnaround diameter is measured from the center point of the front axle and is a measurement of how far a
tractor will move with each turn. The turnaround diameter is based solely on articulation angle and is not a
function of tire size or configuration.
Articulation Angle

Turnaround Diameter

42° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 m (394")
38° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19 m (441")
33° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.33 m (514")

Maximum Tractor Weight
The following table shows the maximum allowable weight of each tractor model.
Model

Recommended Operating Weight lbs.

435
485
535

45,000 lbs. (100 lbs. per HP)
50,500 lbs. (100 lbs. per HP)
54,000 lbs. (100 lbs. per HP)

Tractor Shipping Weight
Shipping weight of a tractor can be calculated based on the standard equipment and options ordered (or dealer
installed) before any liquid ballast is added to the tractor. To calculate the shipping weight, pick the appropriate
front, rear, and total weight values from the following tables (A-F). Once the shipping weight is found, the tractor
can be ballasted and the tire air pressure set. See “Ballasting” in Section 3.
Example: Tractor: 485 tractor with 1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission, 710/70 x R42 R1 drum-style duals,
high flow hydraulic pump and 100 gallon tank of fuel (378.5 L).
Table Info

Front Axle Weight kg (lbs.)

Rear Axle Weight kg (lbs.)

Total Weight kg (lbs.)

9130 (20,130)

4821 (10,630)

13592 (30,758)

2428 (5354)

4857 (10,708)

N/A

300 (660)

168 (370)

453 (1000)

52 (115)

38 (85)

91 (200)

184 (407)

133 (294)

317 (701)

Totals

12094 (26,662)

7588 (16,728)

19292 (42,531)

NOTE: The weights shown in tables A-F are calculated values. Exact weights are only obtainable by putting the
tractor on a scale.

A. Base Tractor Weight
A base tractor is considered to be fitted with synchromesh transmission, no tires or rims, a standard drawbar,
no fuel in the fuel tanks, no operator, no special added equipment, and no ballast.

Front Axle Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9130 kg (20,130 lbs.)
Rear Axle Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4821 kg (10,630 lbs.)

Total Base Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13592 kg (30,758 lbs.)

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Tractor Shipping Weight
B. Tire Weights
The following chart lists the weight of the tire, tube and rim by tire size and wheel configuration.
Buhler Versatile offers a choice of tires. The chart is based on an average tire weight of the brand offered for a
particular tire size. The weights shown are for front and rear axle and overall weight by configuration.

Configuration

Front Axle kg (lbs.)

Rear Axle kg (lbs.)

Total tire Weight kg (lbs.)

20.8 R42 R1W Radial

Singles

798.3 (1760)

1596.6 (3520)

520/85 R46 R1W Radial

Singles

965.2 (2128)

1930.5 (4256)

620/70 R42 R1W Radial

Singles

973.4 (2146)

1946.8 (4292)

650/65 R42 R1W Radial

Singles

1037.8 (2288)

2075.6 (4576)

650/85 R38 R1W Radial

Singles

854.5 (1884)

1709.1 (3768)

710/70 R38 R1W Radial

Singles

979.7 (2160)

1959.5 (4320)

710/70 R42 R1W Radial

Singles

1143.0 (2520)

2286.1 (5040)

800/70 R38 R1W Radial

Singles

1277.3 (2520)

2554.6 (5632)

850/60 R38 Radial

Singles

1303.6 (2874)

2607.2 (5748)

900/50 R42 R1W Radial

Singles

1343.5 (2962)

2687.1 (5924)

20.8 R42 R1W Radial

Duals

1731.8 (3818)

3463.6 (7636)

520/85 R46 R1W Radial

Duals

1970.4 (4344)

3940.8 (8688)

620/70 R42 R1W Radial

Duals

2033.9 (4484)

4067.8 (8968)

650/65 R42 R1W Radial

Duals

2033.9 (4484)

4325.4 (9536)

650/85 R38 R1W Radial

Duals

2162.7 (4768)

3688.6 (8132)

710/70 R38 R1W Radial

Duals

1844.3 (4066)

4385.3 (9668)

710/70 R42 R1W Radial

Duals

2428.5 (5354)

4857.1 (10708)

800/70 R38 R1W Radial

Duals

2753.3 (6070)

5506.6 (12140)

850/60 R38 Radial

Duals

2806.8 (6188)

5613.7 (12376)

900/50 R42 R1W Radial

Duals

2932.9 (6466)

5865.9 (12932)

20.8 R42 R1W Radial

Triples

2854.0 (6292)

5708.0 (12584)

520/85 R46 R1W Radial

Triples

3286.7 (7246)

6573.5 (14492)

620/70 R42 R1W Radial

Triples

3349.3 (7384)

6698.6 (14768)

650/65 R42 R1W Radial

Triples

3542.5 (7810)

7085.1 (15620)

650/85 R38 R1W Radial

Triples

3310.3 (7298)

6620.6 (14596)

710/70 R38 R1W Radial

Triples

N/A

710/70 R42 R1W Radial

Triples

N/A

800/70 R38 R1W Radial

Triples

N/A

850/60 R38 Radial

Triples

N/A

900/50 R42 R1W Radial

Triples

N/A

Tire Size

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Tractor Shipping Weight
C. Weight Packages
Adding a front or rear weight package to a tractor affects the weight distribution per axle as well as the total
tractor weight. In addition, the actual weight effect applied to the axle is amplified by the distance the weight is
hung away from the axle center line. The following chart shows the gross weight of each weight kit and the net
result of adding the kit on the front and rear axle.
Total Weight of Kit
kg (lbs.)

Effect on Front Axle
kg (lbs.)

Effect on Rear Axle
kg (lbs.)

Front Weight Kit
130 kg (397 lbs.) bracket
40 x 30 kg (67 lbs.) weights

1396 (3077)

Adds
2387 (5262)

Removes
991 (2185)

Upper Rear Weight Kit
342 kg (360 lbs.) bracket
40 x 30 kg (67 lbs.) weights

1379 (3040)

Adds
303 (669)

Adds
1075 (2371)

Rear Weight Kit
98 kg (222 lbs.) bracket
42 x 30 kg (67 lbs.) weights

1377 (3036)

Removes
220 (486)

Adds
1598 (3522)

Total effect of putting a
complete Front, Upper Rear and
Rear Weight Kit on the Tractor

4152 (9153)

Adds
2470 (5445)

Adds
1682 (3708)

Multiply every pound of weight added to the front weight kit by 1.71 and add this figure to the front axle.
Multiply every pound of weight added to the front weight kit by 0.71 and subtract this figure from the rear axle
weight. The total effect on the tractor should be the sum of the front rear and should equal the weight added.
Multiply every pound of weight added to the upper rear weight kit by 0.78 and add this figure to the rear axle.
Multiply every pound of weight added to the upper rear weight kit by 0.22 and add this figure from the front
axle weight. The total effect on the tractor should be the sum of the front effect less the rear effect and should
equal the weight added.
Multiply every pound of weight added to the rear weight kit by 1.16 and add this figure to the rear axle. Multiply
every pound of weight added to the auxiliary rear weight kit by 0.16 and subtract this figure from the front axle
weight. The total effect on the tractor should be the sum of the front effect less the rear effect and should equal
the weight added.

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Tractor Shipping Weight
D. Optional Transmission and Axle Weights
Adding an axle or Powershift transmission option to the tractor will effect the weight on the front and rear axle.
The following chart shows the effect on the axle by option and model.
NOTE: 1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission is only fitted on 435 tractor models up to serial No: 700478
Model

Option

Effect on Front Axle
kg (lbs.)

Effect on Rear Axle
kg (lbs.)

Total Weight Change
kg (lbs.)

435

1407 Twindisc
Powershift Transmission

Adds 300 (660)

Adds 168 (370)

Adds 453 (1000)

435,485, 535

CAT TA22
Powershift Transmission

Adds 575 (1266)

Adds 383 (844)

Adds 957 (2110)

435, 485, 535

Heavy Duty Axles

Adds 77 (170)

Adds 154 (340)

E. Optional Equipment
Adding an option to the tractor will effect the weight on the front and rear axle.
The following chart shows the effect on the axle by option and model.
Model

435, 485, 535

Option
High Flow
Hydraulic Pump

Effect on Front Axle
kg (lbs.)

Effect on Rear Axle
kg (lbs.)

Total Weight Change
kg (lbs.)

Adds 52 (115)

Adds 38 (85)

Adds 91 (200)

F. Diesel Fuel
Fuel added to the fuel tanks has to be factored in to the base tractor weight. To do this, use the following
equation:

liters of fuel x 0.84 kg/L = fuel weight (kg)
(Gallons of fuel x 7.01 lbs./gal.) = fuel weight (lbs.)

The effect on the front and rear axle must also be calculated. Multiply the total fuel weight by 0.58 for the
front axle and 0.42 for the rear axle.
Example:
100 L fuel added
100 L x 0.84 kg/L = 84 kg
84 kg x 0.58 = 49 kg added to front axle
84 kg x 0.42 = 35 kg added to rear axle
100 gal. fuel added
100 gal. x 7.01 lbs./gal. = 701 lbs.
701 lbs. x 0.58 = 407 lbs. added to front axle
701 lbs. x 0.42 = 294 lbs. added to rear axle

435/485/535

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Engine - Air Intake & Exhaust

Engine
435

485

Manufacturer

Cummins Engine Co.

Engine Model

QSX15

Maximum Horsepower Rating kW
(BHP @ 2100 RPM) SAE J 1995
Type

324 (435)

535

362 (485)

399 (535)

6-cylinder, 4-cycle, In-Line, Overhead 4 Valve per cylinder Diesel Engine

Aspiration

Turbocharged & Air to Air Intercooled

Bore x Stroke

137x170 mm, (5.39 x 6.70 in.)

Displacement

15 L (915 (in3)

Compression Ratio

17:1

Firing Order

1-5-3-6-2-4

Lubrication System:
Pressure @ Idle

69 kPa (10 PSI)

Pressure @ Rated Speed

248 kPa (35.9)

Maximum Fuel Consumption: @
Maximum Rated Output & Speed*

210 gm/kwShr (0.345 lbs/hp-hr)

Low Idle Speed

875

High Idle Speed

2225

Engine Torque @ Rated Speed
(2100 RPM) (ft-lbs.)

1475 (1088)

1645 (1213)

1814 (1338)

Peak Engine Torque @ listed
Engine Speed - N·m (ft-lbs.) @ RPM

1992 (1469)
@1400

2219 (1637)
@1400

2449 (1806)
@1400

35%

8469 - SC2

2825 - SC2

485

535

Torque Rise
CPL # (Control Parts Listing)

* 1 Liter of diesel fuel weighs approximately 0.84 Kg.
1 gallon (US) of diesel fuel weighs approximately 7.01 lbs.

Air Intake & Exhaust
435
Air Intake - Precleaning

Exhaust Aspirated w/ Precleaner

Air Filter Configuration

Primary (Outer) Secondary (Inner)

Air Flow - L/S (CFM) @ 2100 RPM
Exhaust Outlet - Muffler Type
Air Flow - L/S (CFM) @ 2100 RPM

435/485/535

580 (1230)

595 (1260)

612 (1296)

Perforated tube and center plug with venturi for intake.
Precleaner aspiration.
1260 (2670)

1359 (2880)

1444 (3060)

6-
Section 6 - Specifications
Fuel System - Cooling System

Fuel System
435

485

Fuel Tanks:
Total Capacity

1325 L (350 gal.)

Usable Capacity

1249 L (330 gal.)

Vented

Both Tanks

Fuel Filter
Ether Cold Start Aid
Fuel Flow

535

Single Element
Measured 4.8 cc shot of fluid at each switch activation.
Thermoguard protected above 27°C (81°F)
Drawn from left tank, passes through the engine fuel system. Return
fuel goes through the fuel cooler back to the right tank.
Crossover pipe between the two tanks. Separate fill spout and drain
on each tank.

Cooling System
435

485

Coolant Capacity

72 L (19 gal.)

Radiator Core Size (L x W) - mm (in.)

1128 x 1170 mm (44.4 x 46.1 in.)

Fins per Inch
Number of Rows
Fan Diameter - mm (in.) x Blade
Pitch Width - mm (in.)
Number of Blades
Pressure Cap Setting

9
5

838 x 89
(33 x 3.50)

914 x 96
(36 x 3.78)

965 x 96
(38 x 3.78)

8
97 kPa (14 PSI)

Thermostat Opens

82°C (180°F)

Thermostat Full Open

91°C (195°F)

Type of System

535

Pressurized recirculating full flow bypass with filter and corrosion inhibitor.

435/485/535

6-10
Section 6 - Specifications
Transmission

Transmission
Synchromesh Transmission
Number of speeds
Shift type
Gear shifting
Range shifting

12 forward speeds; 4 reverse speeds
4 synchronized gears in each of 3 forward ranges
Double cone style synchronizer on the top shaft
Sliding collars on the bottom shaft

Lubrication

Self-contained pump, reservoir providing pressurized lubrication to
bearings and gears

Clutch type

Hydraulically actuated wet clutch on the input shaft

Clutch diameter
Number of clutch plates
Clutch brake
Filter

280 mm (11")
8 friction, 8 separator
Hydraulically actuated on second shaft 140 mm (5.5") diameter,
3 plates (1 separator, 2 friction)
10-micron w/344 kPa (50 PSI) with bypass relief

1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission
Number of speeds
Shift type

12 forward speeds; 2 reverse speeds
Electrically actuated - valve activates 3 (out of 8) clutch packs to
provide the selected gear ratio

Type of gear

Constant mesh spur

Clutch type

Wet clutch pack: hardened steel plates and organic fiber
friction plates

Lubrication

Self-contained pump, reservoir providing pressurized lubrication to
bearings and gears

Clutch brake

Electronically controlled by activating opposing clutches

Filter

10-micron w/344 kPa (50 PSI) with bypass relief

CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission
Number of speeds
Shift type

16 forward speeds; 4 reverse speeds
Electrically Actuated – Valve activates 2 (out of 9) clutch-packs to
provide the selected gear ratio

Type of gear

Constant mesh countershaft

Clutch type

Wet clutch pack; friction disc and steel plates

Lubrication

Self-contained pump, reservoir providing pressurized lubrication to
bearings and gears

Filter

435/485/535

5 micron w/276 kPa (40 PSI ) with bypass relief

6-11
Section 6 - Specifications
Drivelines - Axles & Differentials

Drivelines
Component

435

Torsional Coupler @ Engine Torque Rating

485

535

1412 N·m (12,000 (in-lbs.)

Engine to Transmission Drive Shaft
Size

7C (8.5C optional
with HD Axles)

8.5C

Cross and Bearing Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

Slip Yoke Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

8C (8.5C optional
with HD Axles)

8.5C

Cross and Bearing Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

Slip Yoke Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

8C (8.5C optional
with HD Axles)

8.5C

Cross and Bearing Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

Slip Yoke Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

8C (8.5C optional
with HD Axles)

8.5C

Cross and Bearing Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

Slip Yoke Lube - Interval Hrs.

N/R

Transmission to Front Axle Drive Shaft
Size

Articulation Drive Shaft
Size

Rear Axle Drive Shaft
Size

N/R - Not Required

Axles & Differentials
435

485

535

Differential Make

Eaton Okubo (optional)

Okubo

Differential Series

23000

Differential Reduction

4.88

Differential Spiral Direction
Front Axle
Rear Axle

LH
RH

Differential Shot Peened

Yes

Planetary Hub Reduction

5.285

Planetary Sun Gear Shot Peened

435/485/535

6-12
Section 6 - Specifications
Hydraulic System - Drawbar - Brake System

Hydraulic System
Type of System
Nominal Pressure
High (standby)
Low (standby)
Flow at Rated Engine Speed
High Flow option
Pump
Suction Filter
Main Filter
Remote control valve
Detent pressure
Flow Control
Couplers
Number
Type

Closed center load sensing
19.3 - 19.7 mPa (2800 - 2850 PSI)
2.07 - 2.24 kPa (300 - 325 PSI)
208 L/min (55 GPM)
303 L/min (80 GPM)
Dual Variable Displacement Piston
30-mesh Screen
10-micron w/344.8 kPa (60 PSI) Bypass Relief
4, 6 or 8 Section
15.5 mPa (2250 PSI) or timed for EHR
Individual Adjustment in Cab (only first 4 sections on manual valve)
4, 6 or 8 Sets
Leverless Quick Disconnect

Drawbar
Hitch

51 mm (2") Class 4 - 38 mm, (1-1/2") optional

Type

One-Piece 5-Position w/ Replaceable Wear Block

Clevis

Bolt-On Quick Hitch
Bolt-On Bottom lowers Hitch Point 140 mm (5.5")

Clevis Throat Opening
Height to Top of Drawbar
Maximum Offset

90 mm (3.5")
488 mm to 559 mm (19.2" to 22")
405 mm (15.9")

Brake System
Type

Dry disc - two

Disc Diameter

508 mm (20")

Disc Thickness

19 mm (0.75")

Service Brake

Hydraulic-Actuated Foot Pedal

Park Brake
Caliper

Cable Operated Mechanically actuated
Single W/Dual pads - two

NOTE: The tractor has a maximum towing capacity of permisable implement weight before t

435/485/535

6-13
Section 6 - Specifications
Steering System - electrical System

Steering System
Pump

Variable Displacement Pump

Maximum Pressure

17.2 Bar (2500 PSI)

Flow at Rated Engine Speed

114 L/min (30 GPM)

Cylinder Diameter
Cylinder Stroke
Maximum Articulation Angle (no blocks)
Steering Column
Tilt
Telescope
Steering Wheel
Diameter
Turning effort (Engine Idle)

89 mm (3.5")
535 mm (21.1")
42º
45º
100 mm (3.88")
406 mm (16")
1.7 N·m (1.25 ft. lbs.)

Electrical System
Batteries
Power (SAE Group 31)
Qty
Alternator
Starter
Lights
Qty
Optional
HID (Optional) Front
Rear
Extremity Lights
Safety

12V Low Maintenance
950 CCA
3
12V - 130 - amp Maximum Voltage - 13.8 V
12V Negative Ground
55W Quartz Halogen Sealed Beam
6 - 100 x 160 mm Oval, 4 - 120 x 180 mm Oval
4 - 100 x 160 mm Oval
2 - 120 x 180 mm Oval
2 - 100 x 160 mm Oval
2 - Extendable Mounted
4 - Amber Roof Mounted Flashers
2 - Stop/ Tail Rear Fender Mounts

435/485/535

6-14
Section 6 - Specifications
Air Conditioning & heating System - Capacities

Air-Conditioning & Heating System
Refrigerant

R-134A

Refrigerant Charge

2880 grams (6.35 lbs.)

Cooling Capacity

24,000 btu/hr

Heating Capacity

23,250 btu/hr

Fan Volume

14.2 mm3/min (500 cfm)

Filter Area

2012 cm2 (312 in2)

Compressor
Oil capacity
Number of pistons
Displacement
Clutch

300 ml (10.1 oz)
7
154.9 cc per rev (9.5 cu in per rev)
Electromagnetic actuation

Capacities
435

485

Fuel Tanks
Total Capacity
Usable Capacity

1325 L (350 gal)
1249 L (330 gal)

Hydraulic
Reservoir
Total System

113.6 L (30 gal)
155.2 L (41 gal)

Axle/Differential
Differential Housing (before S/N 700495)
Differential Housing (after S/N 700494)
Planetary Hubs (each)
Total System (one axle) (before S/N 700495)
Total System (one axle) (after S/N 700494)

55 L (14.5 gal)
37 L (9.8 gal)
10 L (2.6 gal)
75 L (19.8 gal)
57 L (15.1 gal)

Engine
Engine Crankcase
Oil Filter

44 L (11.6 gal)
3.8 L (1.0 gal)

Cooling System
Air-Conditioning System
Refrigerant
Refrigerant Oil Capacity
Windshield Washer
Reservoir
Transmission (System capacity)
Synchromesh
1407 Twindisc Powershift
CAT TA22 Powershift

435/485/535

83 L (22 gal)
2.88 kg (6.35 lbs.)
300 ml (10.1 oz)
3.8 L (4 qt)
37.9 L (10 gal)
47.4 L (12.5 gal)
64.0 L (16.9 gal)

535

6-15
Section 6 - Specifications
Lubricants & Fluids

Lubricants & Fluids
Specification

Components
Engine Oil

10W - 30 API CL.4

Transmission Oil
Synchromesh
1407 Twindisc Powershift
CAT TA22 Powershift

(See Note 1 below)
(See Note 1 below)
(See note 2 below)

Hydraulic Oil

See Note 1 below

Differential Oil

85W140 GL5 -- ABOVE 0°C (32°F)
80W90 GL5 -- BELOW 0°C (32°F)

Planetary Hub Oil

85W140 GL5 -- ABOVE 0°C (32°F)
80W90 GL5 -- BELOW 0°C (32°F)

Grease

Lithium Base EP High Temperature

Engine Coolant (Includes DCA4 Additive)

Factory Filled - Fully Formulated (Pink in Color)

Fuel

2-D -- ABOVE --7°C (20°F)
1-D -- BELOW --7°C (20°F)

A/C Refrigerant

R134A

Note 1. Lubricant brand equivalency chart for the transmission/hydraulic system.
Brand

Imperial Oil
Esso

Shell

Texaco

Amoco

Petro-Canada

Exxon Mobil

Specification

Hydraul 56

Donax TD

TDH

2016 (USA)
01055 (Can)

Duratran

424

Note 2. Lubricant brand equivalency chart for the transmission/hydraulic system CAT TA22 transmission
Brand

Imperial Oil
Esso

Caterpillar

Specification

Hydraul 56

MTO 10W30

435/485/535

6-16
Section 6 - Specifications
Speed Chart

Speed charts
Speeds at 2100 engine rpm - km/h (mph)

Synchromesh Transmission
Tire
Group
A
B
C
D

Low Range

Medium Range

High Range

Reverse

3.1

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.6

6.5

7.6

9.9

11.5

13.4

15.7

18.3

4.0

4.6

5.4

6.3

3.2

3.7

4.4

5.0

5.8

6.8

7.9

10.3

12.1

14.1

16.4

19.1

4.2

4.9

5.7

6.6

3.3

3.9

4.5

5.2

6.1

7.1

8.3

10.8

12.6

14.7

17.1

20.0

4.3

5.1

6.0

7.0

3.5

4.2

4.8

5.5

6.5

7.6

8.8

11.5

13.4

15.6

18.2

21.3

4.6

5.4

6.4

7.5

Typical Tire Groups
A

24.5 X 32 R1
30.5 X 32 R1
20.8 X 38 R1

30.5 X 32 R2
18.4 X 42 R1
20.8 X 38 R2
710/70 X 38 R1

20.8 X 42 R1
710/70 X 38 R1
850/60 X 38 R1
900/50 X 42 R1

800 X 38 R1
710/70 X 42 R1

1407 Twindisc Powershift Transmission
Tire
Group
A
B
C

Low Range
6
7
8
9.1
10.7
12.8
(5.7)
(6.7)
(8.0)
9.6
11.2
13.4
(6.0)
(7.0)
(8.4)
9.9
11.7
14.1
(6.2)
(7.3)
(8.8)
Typical Tire Groups
B

24.5 X 32 R1
30.5 X 32 R1
20.8 X 38 R1

30.5 X 32 R2
18.4 X 42 R1
20.8 X 38 R2

1
3.7
(2.3)
4.0
(2.5)
4.1
(2.6)

2
4.5
(2.8)
4.6
(2.9)
5.0
(3.1)

3
5.3
(3.3)
5.6
(3.5)
5.8
(3.6)

4
6.4
(4.0)
6.7
(4.2)
7.0
(4.4)

5
7.7
(4.8)
8.0
(5.0)
8.3
(5.2)

9
15.2
(9.5)
15.8
(9.9)
16.6
(10.4)

10
18.2
(11.4)
19.0
(11.9)
19.8
(12.4)

11
31.9
(13.7)
23.0
(14.4)
24.0
(15.0)

12
25.9
(16.2)
27.2
(17.0)
28.3
(17.7)

Reverse
1
2
4.6
8.0
(2.9)
(5.0)
4.9
8.5
(3.1)
(5.3)
5.1
8.8
(3.2)
(5.5)

C
20.8 X 42 R1
710/70 X 38 R1
850/60 X 38 R1

CAT TA22 Powershift Transmission
Tire
Group
A
B

Forward gears
8 9 10

15 16

Reverse
2 3

(2.1) (2.6) (3.3) (4.2) (5.0) (5.7) (6.4) (7.2) (8.1) (9.1) (10.2) (11.5) (13.7) (17.4) (20.5) (23.0) (1.7) (4.0) (4.5) (11.0)
(2.2) (2.8) (3.5) (4.5) (5.3) (6.0) (6.8) (7.6) (8.6) (9.6) (10.9) (12.2) (14.6) (18.5) (21.8) (24.4) (1.8) (4.3) (4.8) (11.6)

NOTES: 1. Based on 2100 engine RPM, 26/1 axle ratio, radial tires

2. 15th gear limited to 1950 engine RPM

3. 16th gear limited to 1725 engine RPM
NOTE: To calculate ground speed at an engine speed
other than 2100 RPM, use the following formula:

Desired
Engine speed
2100 RPM

435/485/535

X chart speed = ground speed

Typical Tire Groups
A

(Approx. 226"-230" L.R.C.)
900 X 42
520 X 42
710 X 38

(Approx. 240"-244" L.R.C.)
800 X 38
710 X 42
520 X 46

L.R.C. = Loaded Rolling Circumference

6-17
Section 6 - Specifications
Tire Load and Inflation Tables

Tire Load and Inflation Tables
Use the following chart and guidelines to determine the proper inflation pressure for tires on a given axle.
Divide the axle weight by the number of tires on an axle to determine the load to be carried by each tire.
U.S. Measure
Inflation
Pressure (PSI)

Singles - lbs.

3740

4800

5680

7600

Duals - lbs.

3290

4220

5000

6690

Triples - lbs.

3070

3720

4660

6230

20.8 R42

520/85 R46
Singles - lbs.

4080

4940

5680

6600

7400

8250

9100

Duals - lbs.

3590

4350

5000

5810

6410

7260

8010

Triples - lbs.

3350

4050

4660

5410

6070

6770

7460

Singles - lbs.

4540

5360

6400

7150

8050

9100

9900

Duals - lbs.

4000

4720

5630

6290

7980

8010

8710

Triples - lbs.

3720

4400

5250

5860

6600

7460

8120

620/70 R42

650/65 R42
Singles - lbs.

4400

5360

6150

7150

8050

8800

9350

Duals - lbs.

3870

4720

5410

6290

7080

7740

8230

Triples - lbs.

3610

4400

5040

5860

6600

7220

7670

Singles - lbs.

Duals - lbs.

Triples - lbs.

Singles - lbs.

5360

6400

7400

8550

9650

10700

11700

Duals - lbs.

4720

5630

6510

7520

8490

9420

10300

Triples - lbs.

4400

5250

6070

7010

7910

8770

9590

650/85 R38

710/70 R38

710/70 R42
Singles - lbs.

5520

6600

7850

8800

9900

11000

12300

Duals - lbs.

4860

5810

6910

7740

8710

9680

10820

Triples - lbs.

4530

5410

6640

7720

8120

9020

10090

Singles - lbs.

6400

7600

9100

10200

11700

12800

14300

Duals - lbs.

5630

6690

8010

8980

10300

11260

12580

Triples - lbs.

5250

6230

7460

8360

9590

10500

Singles - lbs.

Duals - lbs.

Singles - lbs.

5680

6800

7850

9100

10200

11400

12300

Duals - lbs.

5000

5980

6910

8010

8980

10030

10820

800/70 R38

850/60 R38

900/50 R42

435/485/535

6-18
Section 6 - Specifications
Tire Load and Inflation Tables
U.S. Measure (continued)
Inflation
Pressure (PSI)

Singles - lbs.

Duals - lbs.

Singles - lbs.

5680

6800

7850

9100

10200

11400

12300

Duals - lbs.

5000

5980

6910

8010

8980

10030

10820

850/60 R38

900/50 R42

NOTE: For shipping purposes, tire inflation pressures may be increased to 30 psi (210 kPa). Inflation pressure
must be adjusted to correct operating inflation before operation.
At higher transport speeds (above 20 mph) and lower pressures (less than 12 psi) increased inflation pressure
may be required for vehicle stability.
When running lower inflation pressures, it is extremely important to use an accurate air pressure gauge.

435/485/535

6-19
Section 6 - Specifications
High Usage Items
Part Numbers For High Usage Items
Component
Belt - Fan / Water Pump
Belt - Alternator/A/C Compressor
Block Heater & Cord
Ether Canister
Filter - Cab
Filter - Engine Air Outer (Primary)
Filter - Engine Air Inner (Safety)
Filter - Engine Fuel/Water Separator
Filter - Engine Fuel/Auxiliary (Optional)
Filter - Engine Oil
Filter - Engine Coolant Water
Filter - Transmission (Synchromesh & 1407 Twindisc powershift)
Filter - Transmission (CAT TA22 powershift)
Filter - Hydraulic (standard)
(High Flow)
Fuse 5-amp
Fuse 7.5-amp
Fuse 10-amp
Fuse 15-amp
Fuse 20-amp
Fuse 25-amp
Fuse 30-amp
Fuse Puller
Ignition Key

Part Number
86033867
86033868
Contact Cummins Representative
Source Locally
86032161
86034042
86034041
86034027
86033134
86034028
86034029
86029146
86034346
86033080
86029146
9623775
9623776
9811773
9623774
9804895
9504310
86516011
86000363
86502201

Replacement Bulbs
Description
Head Lamps
Worklamps (Std)
Roof-Mount Worklamps
Turn Signal/Hazard/Extremity
Stop/Tail Lamps
Interior Dome Lamps
Trouble Lamp
RH Console Lamp
Front HID Lamp (Optional)
Rear HID Lamp (Optional)

Bulb Part Number
9626307
9703399
529068
529068
86537133
9849911
9.9CP GE232 or equivalent
86033164
86032753
86034812

Wheel and Tire Options
Wheel and Tire sets are available as optional field accessories. Consult your Buhler Versatile dealer for option availability.

435/485/535

6-20
Section 6 - Specifications
Optional Equipment
Paint (Spray Cans)
Color

PartNumber

Red
Cream

86029274
86029270

Optional Equipment
The following chart lists the optional field and factory installed accessories that are available for 435, 485 and
535 tractors. Not all kits are available for all models. Consult your Buhler Versatile dealer for option availability.
Kit Part
Number

Description

Installation Time
(Hours)

86034749

Front Weight Bracket Kit

2.0

86034750
86034751
86034744
86034745
86034746
86034747
86070703
86070702
109029
V59624
86033190
86030679
86033182
86033183
86030510
86032122
86023024
86023025
86035165
86035166
86035167
86035171
86023026
86033143
86035467
86513451
86031188
86031220
86031163
86032757
86070810
86033274
86033222
86033172
86033341

Upper Weight Bracket Kit
Rear Weight Bracket Kit
Weight Kit - 12 x 30 Kg
Weight Kit - 24 x 30 Kg
Weight Kit - 40 x 30 Kg
Weight Kit - 42 x 30 Kg
33° and 38° Articulation Block Kit
31° Articulation Block Kit
Transmission Sump Heater (Synchromesh Transmission, Non-PTO Only)
Trailer 7-Pin Electrical Connector
Roof-Mounted Front and Rear Worklight Kit
(1.5”) Diameter Hitch Pin Kit
(3/4”) Coupler Kit - 1 Set
(3/4”) Coupler Kit - 2nd Set
Monitor Bracket/Power Bar Kit
Auxiliary 3-Pin Connector Kit
Base Radio - AM/FM Cassette
Deluxe Radio - AM/FM Cassette
Satellite Radio - Deluxe - CD/MP3
Satellite Radio - Deluxe - CD/MP3/Sirius
Satellite Radio - Deluxe - CD/MP3/XM
Antenna Satellite - Universal
Deluxe Radio - CD/AM/FM
Deluxe External Mirror Kit
Power Heated Mirror Kit
Radar “Y” Adapter Harness
Backup Alarm Kit (Powershift Transmission Equipped Tractors)
Backup Alarm Kit (Synchromesh Transmission Equipped Tractors)
Roof Mounted Rotary Beacon kit
Roof Mounted Work Light Kit
Radar Sensor
Training Seat
Rear Wiper/Washer
Front & Rear Sunvisor
Auxiliary Fuel Filter

2.0
2.0
0.5
0.7
0.8
1.0
0.5
0.5
2.0
0.5
1.5
0.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
2.0
2.5
0.2
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
5.0
1.5
1.5

435/485/535

6-21
Section 6 - Specifications
Hardware Torque Values - Metric
Hardware Torque Values

Make sure fastener threads are clean and not
damaged

Check the tightness of hardware periodically.

NOTE: A torque wrench is necessary to properly
tighten hardware.

Use the following charts to determine the correct
torque when checking, adjusting or replacing hardware
on the tractor.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the values listed in the charts
if a different torque value or tightening procedure is
specified in this manual for a specific application.
Torque values listed are for general use only.

Minimum hardware tightening torques
In foot pounds (newton-meters) for normal assembly
applications.
Metric hardware and locknuts
Class 5.8

Class 8.8

Class 10.9

Nominal
Size

Unplated

Plated
W/zncr

Unplated

Plated
W/zncr

Unplated

Plated
W/zncr

Locknut Cl.8
W/cl8.8 Bolt

15* (1.7)

19* (2.2)

23* (2.6)

30* (3.4)

33* (3.7)

42* (4.8)

16* (1.8)

51* (5.8)

67* (7.6)

79* (8.9)

102* (12)

115* (13)

150* (17)

56* (6.3)

124* (14)

159* (18)

195*(22)

248* (28)

274* (31)

354* (40)

133* (15)

M10

21 (28)

27 (36)

32 (43)

41 (56)

45 (61)

58 (79)

22 (30)

M12

36 (49)

46 (63)

55 (75)

72 (97)

79 (107)

102 (138)

39 (53)

M16

89 (121)

117 (158)

137 (186)

177 (240)

196 (266)

254 (344)

97 (131)

M20

175 (237)

226 (307)

277 (375)

358 (485)

383 (519)

495 (671)

195 (265)

M24

303 (411)

392 (531)

478 (648)

619 (839)

662 (897)

855 (1160)

338 (458)

NOTE: Torque values shown with* are inch pounds.
Identification of Hex Cap Screws and Carriage Bolts - Classes 5,6 and Up
Manufacturer’s Identification
XYZ

AB
CD

8.8

Property Classes

Hex Nuts and Locknuts
Classes 05 and Up
Manufacturer’s Identification
AB

8
8

AB
AB

Property Classes

F6-1

Clock Marked

435/485/535

6-22
Section 6 - Specifications
Hardware Torque Values - Inch
Minimum hardware tightening torques
In foot pounds (newton-meters) for normal assembly applications.
Inch hardware and locknuts
SAE Grade 2

SAE Grade 5

SAE Grade 8

Locknuts

Unplated
or
Plated
Silver

Plated
W/zncr
Gold

Unplated
or
Plated
Silver

Plated
W/zncr

Unplated
or
Plated
Silver

Plated
W/zncr

GR.B w/
GR5 Bolts

GR.C w/
GR5 Bolts

1/4

55* (6.2)

7.2* (8.1)

86* (9.7)

112* (13)

121* (14)

157* (18)

61* (6.9)

86* (9.8)

5/16

115* (13)

149* (17)

178* (20)

229* (26)

250* (28)

324* (37)

125* (14)

176* (20)

Nominal
Size

3/8

17 (23)

22 (30)

26 (35)

34 (46)

37 (50)

48 (65)

19 (26)

26 (35)

7/16

27 (37)

35 (47)

42 (57)

54 (73)

59 (80)

77 (104)

30 (41)

42 (57)

1/2

42 (57)

54 (73)

64 (87)

83 (113)

91 (123)

117 (159)

45 (61)

64 (88)

9/16

60 (81)

77 (104)

92 (125)

120 (163)

130 (176)

169 (229)

65 (88)

92 (125)

5/8

83 (112)

107 (145)

128 (174)

165 (224)

180 (244)

233 (316)

90 (122)

127 (172)

3/4

140 (198)

189 (256)

226 (306)

293 (397)

319 (432)

413 (560)

160 (217)

226 (306)

7/8

142 (193)

183 (248)

365 (495)

473 (641)

515 (698)

667 (0904)

258 (350)

364 (494)

213 (289)

275 (373)

547 (742)

708 (960)

773 (1048) 1000 (1356)

386 (523)

545 (739)

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
Identification of Hex Cap Screws and Carriage Bolts

Grade 2 SAE
Bolts

Grade 5 SAE
Bolts

Grade 8 SAE
Bolts

Regular Nuts

SAE Grade 5
Hex Nuts

SAE Grade 6
Hex Nuts

Locknuts
B

Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade

Identification
A: No Notches
B: One Circumferential Notch
C: Two Circumferential Notches

Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade

Identification
A: No Mark
B: Letter B
C: Letter C

Grade Identification
Grade A: No Marks
Grade B: Three Marks
Grade C: Six Marks
Marks need not be located ta corners
F6-2

435/485/535

6-23
Index

Index
Accessories, cab-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Adding diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Additional safety items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Air conditioning operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Air conditioning system specifications . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Air intake & exhaust specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Articulation blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Articulation lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Ashtray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Automatic hitch pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Axles & differentials specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Ballasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Ballasting - basic rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Ballasting application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Load matching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Wheel slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Measuring wheel slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Rolling resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Tractor weight distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Calculation of ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Shipping weight-fore/aft ratio . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Operating weight-fore/aft ratio. . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Ballasting weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Front weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Upper weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Rear weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Ballasting C of G calculation table. . . . . . . . 3-104
Battery cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Battery volt display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Bleeding remote cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79, 3-90
Brake system specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Cab mounted accessory bracket (optional) . . . . . . 3-24
Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
CAT TA22 transmission operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Inching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Auto-modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Manual shift mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Auto shift mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Autoshift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Central display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Climate controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Cold-weather starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Connecting single acting cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Connecting double acting cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

Controls and instrument overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Coolant temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Cooling system specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Cruise control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-54
Decelerator Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Delivery Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Differential lock (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Dome lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Drawbar loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Drawbar operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Drawbar pin conversion kit (1-1/2"). . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Driveline specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Electro-hydraulic (EHR) control pods. . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Electro-hydraulic engagement switch. . . . . . 3-49, 3-84
Electro-hydraulic remote control valves. . . . . . . . . 3-83
Electronic instrument ccontrol (EIC) calibration,. . 3-41
Entering operator calibration (mode 1). . . . . . 3-41
Setting the implement width. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Setting service alert intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Slip percent threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Setting the area preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Turning active display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Selecting between imperial and metric units. . 3-43
Wheel speed calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Exiting mode 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Electronic instrument cluster (EIC) introduction,. . 3-25
Audible alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Indicator, warning lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Bar graph displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Central display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Emergency exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Engine block heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Engine break-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Engine hour meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Engine speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Engine shut down override switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Engine side covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Engine starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Entering the cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Ether cold start button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
External lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Extremity lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70

435/485/535

6-24
Index
Fault codes,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Entering/exiting fault codes (mode 2). . . . . . . 3-40
Viewing fault codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
First 50 hour service report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Flow control adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Fluids specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Foot Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Forward operator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Front and rear axle identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel level display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Fuel selection chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Fuel storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Fuel system specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Fueling the tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
General dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Ground speed display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Hand throttle control lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46, 3-54
Hardware torque values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Hazard warning light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
High flow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
High usage items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Hydraulic motor applications. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81, 3-90
Hydraulic quick couplers. . . . . . . . . . 3-72, 3-78, 3-88
Hydraulic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Hydraulic system schematic diagram. . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Hydraulic flow controls-manual. . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-77
Hydraulic system specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Implement safety chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Implement transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Inch Hardware and locknuts chart. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Inspection access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Battery access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Engine access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Opening hood panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Removing hood panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Instructional seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lights, master switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Lockout levers-manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-75
Low pressure return circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Low pressure return circuit-case drain. . . . . 3-80, 3-87
Lubricants specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Lubrication and maintenance-general information. . 4-2
Lubrication and maintenance chart. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Lubrication and maintenance, as required . . . . . . 4-52
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 10 hours or daily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

435/485/535

Lubrication and maintenance,
every 50 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 250 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 300 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 500 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 1000 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 1200 hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 1500 hours or yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Lubrication and maintenance,
every 2000 hours or 2 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Lubrication and maintenance,
indicated by warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Manual-programmable operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Maximum tractor weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Metric hardware and locknuts chart. . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Multi function switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Operating continuous flow
hydraulic equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80, 3-89
Operating remote equipment, simultaneously. . . . 3-81
Operation introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Operator seat controls (standard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operator seat controls (deluxe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Optional equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Optional hydraulic equipment-(3/4") coupler kit. . 3-81
Overall description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overall heights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Overall widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Overhead climate controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Overhead controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Controls and instruments overview. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Panel dim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Power outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
1407 Twindisc Powershift transmission operation. 3-59
Powershift transmission shifting . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Automatic range select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Forward/reverse shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Differential lock (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Pre-operation checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Pressurizer vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Pressure release detent adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Prestart Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

6-25
Index
Protective shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
PTO engagement switch (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Radio (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Rear window/emergency exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Remote control valve operation-manual . . . . . . . . 3-74
Remote control valve operation, electro-hydraulics 3-82
Remote hydraulic valve controls-manual. . . . . . . . 3-47
Remote hydraulic valve controls-electro-hydraulic. 3-49
Remote valve electro-hydraulic flow control knobs. 3-49
Remote valve electro-hydraulic manual/programmable
operation switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Right side console controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Right side console controls introduction. . . . . . . . 3-14
ROPS maintenance & inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Rotary beacon connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Rotary beacon switch (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Section 1 contents - introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Section 2 contents - general information . . . . . . . . 2-1
Section 3 contents - operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Section 4 contents - Lubrication and maintenance. 4-1
Section 5 contents - troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Section 6 contents - specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34, 3-42
Speed chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Standard flow system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Starter solenoid shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Steering specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Steering wheel and column adjustment . . . . . . . . 3-16
Stopping the tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Storage tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Synchromesh transmission operation. . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Range shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Gear shifting within a range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Forward/reverse shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Timed exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Tire selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Tire load and inflation table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Toolbox/storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Towing the tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Tractor boosting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Tractor identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Tractor identification data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Tractor orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tractor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Tractor performance monitor (TPM) introduction. . 3-36
Area per hour forecast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Area accumulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Wheel slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Slip alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Battery voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Distance measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Cabin temperature (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Fuel per hour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Fuel per area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Fault codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Tractor start-up and engine operation. . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Tractor statement of use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Tractor terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tractor shipping weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Base tractor weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tire weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Weight packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Optional transmission weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Diesel weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Trailer socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Transmission control levers-Synchromesh. . . . . . . 3-46
Transmission control lever-Powershift. . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Transmission gear shift position display. . . . . . . . 3-33
Transmission identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Transmission specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Transporting the tractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Trouble light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Troubleshooting, Syncromesh transmission. . . . . . . 5-5
Troubleshooting, 1407 Powershift transmission . . . 5-6
Troubleshooting, CAT TA22 Powershift transmission 5-7
Troubleshooting, brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Troubleshooting, cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Troubleshooting, electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Troubleshooting, engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Troubleshooting, hydraulic system. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Troubleshooting, operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Troubleshooting, fault codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Turning geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Shipping weight-fore/aft ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Welding and battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Wheel installation - single. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Wheel installation - dual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Wheel installation - triple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Wheels, tires & articulation blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Wheel tread width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Windshield wiper controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

435/485/535

6-26

California
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, and other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

435/485/535

6-27
Deliver Report - Dealer Copy

Delivery Report

Dealer Copy

435, 485 and 535 Tractors

Delivery Date
Owner’s Name
Address
Dealer’s Name
Address
Tractor: Model No.

Serial No.

Engine: Model No.

Serial No.

Using the Operator’s Manual as a guide, instruction was given as indicated by the check marks.

( ) Safety precautions and practice

( ) Lubrication points and schedule

( ) Use of optional equipment

( ) Operation of all controls

( ) Preseason service

( ) All safety shielding is installed

( ) End-of-season service

( ) Warranty coverage

( ) Proper use of operator’s manual

( ) Customer given operator’s manual

( ) Local Cummins Dealer/Distributor contacted with engine information

Dealer Representative’s Signature
“I have been instructed in the operation, maintenance, and safety features of this machine as detailed in the
operator’s manual.”
Owner’s Signature

435/485/535

6-28

435/485/535

6-29
Deliver Report - Customer Copy

Delivery Report

Customer Copy

435, 485 and 535 Tractors

Delivery Date
Owner’s Name
Address
Dealer’s Name
Address
Tractor: Model No.

Serial No.

Engine: Model No.

Serial No.

Using the Operator’s Manual as a guide, instruction was given as indicated by the check marks.

( ) Safety precautions and practice

( ) Lubrication points and schedule

( ) Use of optional equipment

( ) Operation of all controls

( ) Preseason service

( ) All safety shielding is installed

( ) End-of-season service

( ) Warranty coverage

( ) Proper use of operator’s manual

( ) Customer given operator’s manual

( ) Local Cummins Dealer/Distributor contacted with engine information

Dealer Representative’s Signature
“I have been instructed in the operation, maintenance, and safety features of this machine as detailed in the
operator’s manual.”
Owner’s Signature

435/485/535

6-30

435/485/535

6-31
First 50 Hour Service - Dealer Copy

First 50 hour Service

Dealer Copy

Check and adjust, as required
Description

Description

Stationary Checks - Engine Off

Lubricate the upper articulation pins

Clean front grill, coolers & radiator

Lubricate the rear steering cylinder pins

Check engine coolant level

Lubricate the front steering cylinder pins

Check engine fan/ water pump belt tension

Lubricate the rear drag link pins

Check alternator/AC belt tension

Lubricate the front drag link pins

Change the engine oil
Change the engine oil filter

Lubricate the rear axle drive shaft steady
bearing

Check the air cleaner connections

Safety Items Checks

Change the engine coolant system filter

Seat belt operation

Check the level of DCA4 coolant additive

All safety shields installed

Check the battery connections at the starter

Neutral start switch(es) operative

Check the radiator, heater hoses and
connections

Parking brake operation and adjustment

Clean the engine air cleaner outer element

Stationary Checks - Engine Running

Check tire air pressure according to ballast
on axle
Clean the cab air filter

All operative checks are to be performed
with the tractor at normal operating
temperature

Check the air conditioner sight glass

Lights and instruments for proper operation

Check the battery connections at the battery

Maximum no-load and idle speed
adjustments

Clean the alternator
Check the battery electrolyte level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check for proper operation
Change the planetary hub oil
Change the differential oil
Check the transmission oil level
Change the transmission filter
Change the hydraulic oil
Change the hydraulic filter

Articulation lock operation

Hydraulic system
Remote control valves and lockout levers
Flow control operation
Transmission shifting and gear selection
Performance service checks
Road test engine operation including
throttle and governor operation
Transmission
Steering control

Check all wheel hardware torque

Differential lock engagement and
disengagement (optional)

Lubricate the lower articulation pin

Brake action

Service Performed
Tractor Model No.

Tractor Serial No.

Owner’s Signature

Date

Dealer’s Signature

Date

435/485/535

6-32

435/485/535

6-33
First 50 Hour Service - Customer Copy

First 50 hour Service

Customer Copy

Check and adjust, as required
Description

Description

Stationary Checks - Engine Off

Lubricate the upper articulation pins

Clean front grill, coolers & radiator

Lubricate the rear steering cylinder pins

Check engine coolant level

Lubricate the front steering cylinder pins

Check engine fan/ water pump belt tension

Lubricate the rear drag link pins

Check alternator/AC belt tension

Lubricate the front drag link pins

Change the engine oil
Change the engine oil filter

Lubricate the rear axle drive shaft steady
bearing

Check the air cleaner connections

Safety Items Checks

Change the engine coolant system filter

Seat belt operation

Check the level of DCA4 coolant additive

All safety shields installed

Check the battery connections at the starter

Neutral start switch(es) operative

Check the radiator, heater hoses and
connections

Parking brake operation and adjustment

Clean the engine air cleaner outer element

Stationary Checks - Engine Running

Check tire air pressure according to ballast
on axle
Clean the cab air filter

All operative checks are to be performed
with the tractor at normal operating
temperature

Check the air conditioner sight glass

Lights and instruments for proper operation

Check the battery connections at the battery

Maximum no-load and idle speed
adjustments

Articulation lock operation

Check all wheel hardware torque

Differential lock engagement and
disengagement (optional)

Lubricate the lower articulation pin

Brake action

Service Performed
Tractor Model No.

Tractor Serial No.

Owner’s Signature

Date

Dealer’s Signature

Date

435/485/535

6-34

435/485/535

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:08:23
Instance ID                     : uuid:805115c3-118d-49b0-87a1-d4592710c553
Document ID                     : adobe:docid:indd:f0366055-db16-11d9-be08-dd1f2139c7b6
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Manifest Link Form              : ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream
Manifest Placed X Resolution    : 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00
Manifest Placed Y Resolution    : 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00
Manifest Placed Resolution Unit : Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches
Manifest Reference Instance ID  : uuid:7f73fab3-44cf-11da-9e38-000d93356158, uuid:0127e8a3-fd11-11d9-92e9-000d93356158, uuid:393f8749-c979-11da-9c83-0014511cb8d6, uuid:eda2a347-c979-11da-9c83-0014511cb8d6, uuid:2ff9fcfa-456c-11da-b038-000d93356158, uuid:29bec3b9-fd19-11d9-92e9-000d93356158, uuid:15b7a4da-fd1b-11d9-92e9-000d93356158
Manifest Reference Document ID  : uuid:7FCB7E31DF2411D9AE3E8EA4ABBE0C3A, uuid:7FCB7E31DF2411D9AE3E8EA4ABBE0C3A, uuid:CAC04C97DB4411D9BC28D11A454BEE5B, uuid:1863A61AFE7F11D991DDE5D093E34046, uuid:10C52ABFDE3911D9AFEADD50EB729FF8, uuid:808586A2E4C711D99726D7CA573EDC72, uuid:10C52ABFDE3911D9AFEADD50EB729FF8
Create Date                     : 2007:11:29 13:57:48-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2008:04:01 15:40:46-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:04:01 15:40:46-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS2 (4.0)
Thumbnail Format                : JPEG
Thumbnail Width                 : 256
Thumbnail Height                : 256
Thumbnail Image                 : (Binary data 10121 bytes, use -b option to extract)
Format                          : application/pdf
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 7.0
Trapped                         : False
Page Count                      : 249
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CS2 (4.0)

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Buhler 435 Users Manual

!! Buhler-12 Buhler Lawn Mower Manuals - Lawn Mower Manuals – The Best Lawn Mower Manuals Collection

535 to the manual 2f272d1a-2437-33f4-21f3-c904d8796383

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation